Peugeot 3008 Handbook

Views:
 
Category: Others/ Misc
     
 

Presentation Description

No description available.

Comments

Presentation Transcript

slide 1:

Peugeot 3008 Handbook

slide 2:

On-line handbook Select one of the following means of access to view your handbook on-line... Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available easily identified by the bookmark associated with this symbol: If the "MyPEUGEOT" function is not available on the PEUGEOT public website for your country you can find your handbook at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/ the language the vehicle its body style the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle. Select: Find your handbook on the PEUGEOT website under "MyPEUGEOT". Scan this code for direct access to your handbook. This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care and maintenance of your vehicle.

slide 3:

Key This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range. Welcome Thank you for choosing a 3008. This handbook has been designed to help you make the most of using your vehicle in all circumstances. safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the environment Your vehicle will be fitted with some of the equipment described in this document depending on its trim level version and the specification for the country in which it is sold. The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook. This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.

slide 4:

. . Contents 3008-2_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2016 Digital instrument panel 12 Indicator and warning lamps 16 Indicators 32 Manual test 40 Distance recorders 41 Lighting dimmer 42 Trip computer 43 Monochrome screen C 45 Touch screen 48 Remote control 54 Keyless Entry and Starting 58 Back-up procedures 64 Central locking 68 Alarm 70 Doors 74 Boot 75 Hands-free tailgate 76 Electric windows 82 Panoramic opening sunroof 84 Driving position 88 Front seats 90 Steering wheel adjustment 99 Mirrors 99 i-Cockpit Amplify function 102 Heating and Ventilation 104 Manual air conditioning 106 Semi-automatic mono-zone air conditioning 108 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 111 Front demist - defrost 116 Heated windscreen 117 Rear screen demist - defrost 118 Front fttings 119 Courtesy lamps 128 Interior mood lighting 129 Rear seats 130 Rear fttings 133 Boot fttings 135 Boot lamp 140 Exterior lighting control stalk 141 Direction indicators 144 Headlamp beam height adjustment 145 Automatic illumination of headlamps 146 Automatic headlamp dipping 149 Cornering lighting 151 Wiper control stalk 152 Automatic rain sensitive wipers 155 General safety recommendations 156 Hazard warning lamps 157 Horn 157 Emergency or assistance 158 Electronic stability programme ESC 160 Advanced Grip Control 164 Hill Assist Descent Control 166 Seat belts 168 Airbags 172 Child seats 177 Deactivating the passengers front airbag 179 ISOFIX child seats 186 i-Size child seats 190 Child lock 193 Overview Eco-driving Instruments Access Ease of use and comfort Lighting and visibility Safety

slide 5:

. Contents 3008-2_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2016 For the audio and telematic systems refer to the supplement to the handbook or go to the following internet address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/ Driving recommendations 195 Starting / Switching off the engine with the key 197 Starting / Switching off the engine with Keyless Entry and Starting 200 Electric parking brake 203 Manual gearbox 210 Automatic gearbox 211 Hill start assist 216 Dynamic Pack 217 Gear shift indicator 218 Stop Start 219 Under-infation detection 223 Memorising speeds 226 Speed limit recognition 227 Speed limiter 231 Cruise control 234 Dynamic cruise control with Stop function 238 Distance alertandActive Safety Brake 247 Fatigue detection system 252 Lane Departure Warning System 254 Assisted Lane Departure Warning System 255 Blind Spot Monitoring System 260 Parking sensors 263 Panoramic vision 265 Park Assist 272 Fuel tank 281 Misfuel prevention Diesel 282 Towing a trailer 284 Towbar with quickly detachable towball 285 Energy economy mode 290 Very cold climate screens 291 Snow chains 292 Fitting roof bars 293 Bonnet 294 Petrol underbonnet layout 295 Diesel underbonnet layout 296 Checking levels 297 Checks 301 AdBlue ® and SCR system BlueHDi Diesel 303 Warning triangle 307 Running out of fuel Diesel 308 Tool kit 309 Temporary puncture repair kit 312 Spare wheel 317 Changing a bulb 323 Changing a fuse 331 12 V battery 332 Towing the vehicle 336 Petrol engines 338 Petrol weights 339 Diesel engines 340 Diesel weights 342 Dimensions 344 Identifcation markings 345 Driving Practical information In the event of a breakdown Technical data Alphabetical index

slide 6:

Overview 4 3008-2_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016 Towing 336-337 Very cold climate screens 291 Dynamic cruise control with Stop function 238-246 Front parking sensors 263-264 Park Assist 272-279 Front foglamps 142 Cornering lighting 151 Remote control key 54 63-67 Locking / Unlocking 55-57 Starting the engine 197-199 Automatic illumination of headlamps 146-147 Automatic headlamp dipping 149-150 Automatic rain sensitive wipers 155 Fatigue detection system 252-253 Lane Departure Warning System 254 Assisted Lane Departure Warning System 255-259 Speed limit recognition 227-230 Distance alert / Active Safety Brake 247-251 Electric windows 82-83 Doors 74 Central locking 68-69 Alarm 70-73 Electronic stability programme ESC 160-163 Advanced Grip Control 164-165 Hill Assist Descent Control 166-167 Main lighting 141 143-144 Adjusting the headlamp beam height 145 Changing front bulbs 323-327 Heated windscreen 117 Demisting the windscreen 116 Windscreen wiper 152-154 Visiopark 2 265-266 269-271 Electronic key 54 63-67 Hands-free access 58-62 Keyless starting 197 200-202 Exterior

slide 7:

. Overview 5 3008-2_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016 Roof bars 293 Panoramic opening sunroof 84-87 Under-inflation detection 223-225 Tyre pressures 223 315 345 Snow chains 292 Visiopark 1 2 265-271 Rear parking sensors 263-264 Child lock 193-194 Towing 336-337 Towbar 196 284 Quickly detachable towball 285-289 Trailer stability assist 163 Fuel tank 281-283 Misfuel prevention 282 AdBlue tank 303-306 Door mirrors 99-100 Guide-me-home / welcome lighting 146-148 Blind Spot Monitoring System 260-262 Changing rear bulbs 328-330 Defrosting the rear screen 118 Rear wiper 153-154 Boot 57 59 75 Hands-free tailgate access 76-81 Tools 309-311 Temporary puncture repair kit 312-316 Spare wheel 317-322 Exterieur

slide 8:

Overview 6 3008-2_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016 Interior Boot fittings 135-140 - load space cover - 12 V socket - boot lamp - adjustable boot floor - lashing eyes - high load retaining net Warning triangle 307 Tools 309-311 Temporary puncture repair kit 312-316 Spare wheel 317-322 Child seats 177-192 ISOFIX mountings 186-189 i-Size child seats 190-191 Airbags 172-176 Front seats 90-97 Multipoint massage 98 Seat belts 168-171 Rear seats 130-132 Rear fittings 133-134 - 12 V socket - 230 V / 50 Hz socket - rear armrest - ski flap Front fittings 119-127 - USB port - 12 V socket - front armrest - mats Wireless charger 122-123 Scented air freshener 125-126 Glove box 120 Deactivating the passengers front airbag 174 178-181

slide 9:

. Overview 7 3008-2_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016 Instruments and controls Digital instrument panel 12-15 Warning lamps 16-31 Indicators gauges 32-40 Setting buttons 40-42 - CHECK / trip distance recorder - dashboard lighting dimmer / mood lighting Door mirrors 99-100 Electric windows 82-83 Changing a fuse 331 Opening the bonnet 294 Manual gearbox 210 Automatic gearbox 211-215 Electric parking brake 203-209 Blind / Panoramic opening sunroof 84-87 Courtesy lamps 128 Interior mood lighting 129 Emergency or assistance call 158-159 Seat belts / passengers front airbag warning lamp display 169-170 174 Rear view mirror 101 Heating / Ventilation 104-105 Manual air conditioning 106-107 Semi-automatic mono-zone air conditioning 108-110 Automatic dual-zone air conditioning 111-115 Demisting / Defrosting front 116 Demisting / Defrosting rear screen 118 Heated seats 97 Monochrome screen C 45-47 Touch screen 48-53 i-Cockpit Amplify function 102-103 Hazard warning lamps 157 Anti-theft / Starting with the START/ STOP button 200-202 Advanced Grip Control 164-165 Hill Assist Descent Control 166-167

slide 10:

Overview 8 3008-2_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016 Multifunction steering wheel Memorising speeds 226 Speed limit recognition 227-230 Speed limiter 231-233 Cruise control 234-237 Dynamic cruise control with Stop function 238-246 Adjusting the steering wheel 99 Wiper controls 152-155 Trip computer 43-44 Dynamic Pack 217 Lighting controls 141-144 146-150 Alarm volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring 70-73 Heated windscreen 117 Electric child lock 194 Horn 157 Adjusting the headlamp beam height 145 Unlocking - Opening / Closing the hands-free tailgate 76-81 Stop Start 219-222 Side switch panel Instruments and controls

slide 11:

. Overview 9 3008-2_en_Chap00b_vue-ensemble_ed01-2016 Technical data - Maintenance Battery 332-335 Energy economy mode 290 Running out of Diesel fuel 308 AdBlue 37-40 Checking levels 297-300 - oil - brake fluid - coolant - screenwash fluid - additive Diesel with particle filter Petrol engines 338-339 Diesel engines 340-343 Dimensions 344 Identification markings 345 Checking components 301-302 - battery - air filter / passenger compartment filter - oil filter - particle filter Diesel - brake pads / discs Changing bulbs 323-330 - front - rear Changing a fuse 331 Bonnet 294 Petrol underbonnet 295 Diesel underbonnet 296

slide 12:

Eco-driving 3008-2_en_Chap00c_eco-conduite_ed01-2016 10 Optimise the use of your gearbox With a manual gearbox move off gently and change up without waiting. During acceleration change up early. With an automatic gearbox give preference to automatic mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. Control the use of your electrical equipment Before moving off if the passenger compartment is too warm ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning. Above 30 mph 50 km/h close the windows and leave the air vents open. Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down sunroof and window blinds.... Switch off the air conditioning unless it has automatic regulation as soon as the desired temperature is attained. Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls if not automatic. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the ambient light level does not require their use. Avoid running the engine before moving off particularly in winter your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. As a passenger if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices film music video game... you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy and so of fuel. Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle. Eco-driving Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions. Drive smoothly Maintain a safe distance between vehicles use engine braking rather than the brake pedal and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions and also help reduce the background traffic noise. If your vehicle has cruise control make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph 40 km/h when the traffic is flowing well. The gear efficiency indicator invites you to engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel follow it straight away. For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox this indicator appears only in manual mode.

slide 13:

. Eco-driving 3008-2_en_Chap00c_eco-conduite_ed01-2016 11 Limit the causes of excess consumption Spread loads throughout the vehicle place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot as close as possible to the rear seats. Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance roof bars roof rack bicycle carrier trailer.... Use a roof box in preference. Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. At the end of winter remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres. Observe the recommendations on maintenance Check the tyre pressures regularly when cold referring to the label in the door aperture drivers side. Carry out this check in particular: - before a long journey - at each change of season - after a long period out of use. Dont forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan. Have your vehicle serviced regularly engine oil oil filter air filter passenger compartment filter... and observe the schedule of operations recommended in the manufacturers service schedule. With a BlueHDi Diesel engine if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle becomes polluting go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to have the emissions of nitrogen oxides brought back to the legal level. When refuelling do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow. At the wheel of your new vehicle it is only after the first 1 800 miles 3 000 kilometres that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

slide 14:

Instruments 12 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Head-up digital screen Digital screen The representation below shows the "DIALS" display mode. 1. Fuel gauge. 2. Analogue speedometer mph or km/h. 3. Gear shift indicator selector mode and the gear with an automatic gearbox. 4. Digital speedometer mph or km/h. 5. Cruise control or speed limiter setting display of speed limit signs. 6. Rev counter x 1000 rpm or tr/min. 7. Coolant temperature gauge °Celsius. 8. Trip distance recorder miles or km. 9. Total distance recorder miles or km. Control buttons A. Lighting dimmer for the instruments and controls available in night mode. or Instrument panel mood lighting. B. Short press: start a manual test. Long press: reset the service indicator or trip recorder depending on the context. Personalisable digital instrument panel Depending on the display mode selected some information can be hidden or represented differently. Versions with monochrome screen. Versions with touch screen.

slide 15:

1 13 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Displays Permanent information Whatever the display mode selected the instrument panel displays: - in fixed locations: ● gearbox and gear shift indicator information ● the fuel gauge ● the engine coolant temperature indicator ● the distance recorders. - in variable locations: ● the digital speedometer ● status or alert messages displayed temporarily. Most warning and indicator lamps do not have a fixed position. The warning and indicator lamps in the second line are displayed from right to left in order of priority. For certain functions that have indicator lamps for both operation and for deactivation there is only one dedicated location. Personalisation of the instrument panel You can modify the appearance of the instrument panel by choosing: - a display colour - a display mode. Display language This depends on the language selected in the screen configuration menu. Choosing a display colour This depends on the colour scheme activated by the i-Cockpit Amplify function: F "Relax": grey F "Boost": red F "Normal" no colour scheme activated: blue. For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section. Versions with touch screen. Optional information Depending on the display mode selected and the systems activated the following information may appear: - the rev counter - the trip computer - driving aids - the speed limiter or cruise control - the media currently playing - navigation instructions - engine information from the Dynamic Pack.

slide 16:

Instruments 14 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Choice of display mode To modify the display mode of the instrument panel: F turn the thumbwheel on the left of the steering wheel to display and run through the different modes in the right hand part of the instrument panel F once the desired display mode appears press the thumbwheel to confirm. The new display mode is applied immediately. Each mode corresponds to the type of information displayed in the instrument panel. - "DIALS": standard display of the analogue and digital speedometers rev counter fuel gauge coolant temperature indicator and distance recorders. - "NAVIGATION": standard display with in addition information related to the current route navigation map and instructions. - "DRIVING": standard display with in addition information related to the driving assistance system in use. Versions with monochrome screen. Versions with touch screen. - "MINIMAL": reduced display with the digital speedometer and the distance recorders and in the event of an alert only fuel gauge and coolant temperature indicator. - "TRIP COMPUTER": minimal display with in addition the rev counter instantaneous information and the trip recorder selected 1 or 2. or - "PERSONAL": minimal display with in addition the selection made in the touch screen of the type of information displayed in the personalisable areas on the left and right.

slide 17:

1 15 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 To enter settings for the "PERSONAL" display mode and select the information to be displayed in the personalisable areas of the instrument panel: F select the Settings menu in the upper bar of the touch screen F press the "Perso" button F for each personalised area left and right select a type of information using the corresponding scroll arrows in the touch screen: ● "Driving aids" ● "Default" empty ● "Engine info" Dynamic Pack ● "G-meters" Dynamic Pack ● "Temperatures" engine oil ● "Media" ● "Navigation" ● "Trip computer" ● "Rev counter". F a nominal preview appears alongside the corresponding arrows F confirm to save and quit. If the current display mode is "PERSONAL" the new selection is displayed immediately. F select "Configuration" As a safety measure these adjustments should be carried out with the vehicle stationary.

slide 18:

Instruments 16 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Indicator and warning lamps When the ignition is switched on Certain warning lamps come on in the instrument panel for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. When the engine is started these same warning lamps should go off. If they remain on before moving off refer to the information on the warning lamp concerned. Certain warning lamps may come on in one of two modes: fixed continuous or flashing. Only by relating the type of illumination to the operation of the vehicle can it be determined whether the situation is normal or a fault has occurred. For more information refer to the corresponding tables of warning and indicator lamps. Associated warnings The illumination of most of these warning lamps is accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal.

slide 19:

1 17 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Left-hand direction indicator flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk has been pushed down. Right-hand direction indicator flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk has been pushed up. Hazard warning lamps flashing with audible signal. The hazard warning lamps switch located on the dashboard has been operated. The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously. Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position. Dipped beam headlamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position. Main beam headlamps fixed. The lighting stalk has been pulled towards you. Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps. + or Automatic headlamp dipping fixed. The function has been activated via the Driving menu of the touch screen. The lighting stalk is in the "AUTO" position. The camera located at the top of the windscreen manages the illumination of main or dipped beam depending on the exterior lighting and the driving conditions. For more information on Automatic headlamp dipping refer to the corresponding section. Operation indicator lamps For more information on the Lighting control stalk refer to the corresponding section. If one or more of the following indicator lamps come on this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched on.

slide 20:

Instruments 18 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Diesel engine pre-heating fixed. When the ignition is switched on with a key in the ignition switch or a starting instruction made using the "START/STOP" button the engine temperature makes engine pre-heating necessary. The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is determined by the ambient conditions up to about thirty seconds in severe winter conditions. With an ignition switch and key wait until the indicator lamp goes off before starting. With Keyless Entry and Starting once it goes off starting is immediate on condition that the brake pedal remains pressed with an automatic gearbox or the clutch pedal is pressed fully down with a manual gearbox. If the engine does not start switch the ignition off and then on wait until the indicator lamp goes off again then start the engine. Stop Start fixed. When the vehicle stops red lights traffic jams ... the Stop Start system has put the engine into STOP mode. The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode as soon as you want to move off. flashes for a few seconds then goes off. STOP mode is temporarily unavailable or START mode is invoked automatically. For more information on Stop Start refer to the corresponding section. Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps have been switched on using the ring on the lighting control stalk. Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearwards to switch off the rear foglamps. Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on using the ring on the lighting control stalk. Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward twice to switch off the front foglamps.

slide 21:

1 19 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Passengers airbag system fixed in the seat belt and passengers front airbag warning lamps display. The control switch located in the glove box has been placed in the "ON" position. The passengers front airbag is activated. In this case do not install a rearward facing child seat on this seat. Move the control switch to the "OFF" position to deactivate the passengers front airbag. In this case you can install a rearward facing child seat unless there is a fault with the airbags airbag warning lamp on. Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brake fixed. The "automatic application" on switching off the engine and "automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty. Activate the function again or contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop in the event of a fault. For more information on the Electric parking brake refer to the corresponding section. Electric parking brake fixed. The electric parking brake is applied. Release the parking brake to switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal briefly push the parking brake control lever. Observe the safety recommendations. For more information on the Electric parking brake refer to the corresponding section.

slide 22:

Instruments 20 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Hill Assist Descent Control fixed. The system has been activated but is paused because the speed is too high. Between 18 and 30 mph 30 and 50 km/h the system is paused. Reduce the speed of the vehicle. fixed. The system has been activated but the conditions for regulation are not met gradient gear engaged. flashing. The system is regulating the speed of the vehicle. The vehicle is being braked the brake lamps come on during the descent. For more information on the Hill Assist Descent Control system refer to the corresponding section. Blind Spot Monitoring System fixed. The system has been activated. For more information on the Blind Spot Monitoring System refer to the corresponding section. Automatic wiping fixed. The wiper control stalk has been pushed down. Automatic front wiping is activated. To deactivate automatic wiping push the wiper control stalk down again or put the wiper control stalk in another position.

slide 23:

1 21 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Stop Start fixed accompanied by the display of a message. The Stop Start system is deactivated. The engine will not cut out at the next stop in the traffic. Reactivate the system by pressing the button again. For more information on Stop Start refer to the corresponding section. Passengers airbag system fixed in the instrument panel and/or seat belt and front passengers airbag warning lamps display. The control switch located in the glove box is set to the OFF position. The passengers front airbag is deactivated. You can install a rearward facing child seat unless there is a fault with the airbags airbag warning lamp on. Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the passengers front airbag. In this case do not install a rearward facing child seat on this seat. Deactivation indicator lamps If one of the following indicator lamps comes on this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally. This may be accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Distance alert / Active Safety Brake fixed accompanied by a message. The system has been deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu in the screen. For more information on the Distance alert / Active Safety Brake system refer to the corresponding section. Assisted Lane Departure Warning System fixed accompanied by the display of a message. The system has been deactivated. There will be no correction of the vehicles trajectory should there be a change of direction. For more information on the Assisted Lane Departure Warning System refer to the corresponding section.

slide 24:

Instruments 22 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Warning lamps STOP fixed associated with another warning lamp accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Illumination of this warning lamp is related to a serious fault with the engine braking system power steering automatic gearbox or a major electrical fault. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven illumination of one or more of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver. Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated alert message. If you encounter any problems contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 25:

1 23 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Maximum coolant temperature fixed. The temperature of the cooling system is too high. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping- up the level if necessary. If the problem persists contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop. or Service temporarily accompanied by the display of a message. One or more minor faults for which there is no specific warning lamp have been detected. Identify the cause of the fault using the message displayed in the instrument panel. You can deal with some problems yourself such as a door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter as soon as the traffic conditions allow regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph 60 km/h until the warning lamp goes off. For any other problems such as a fault with the tyre under inflation detection system contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. fixed accompanied by the display of a message. One or more major faults for which there is no specific warning lamp have been detected. Identify the cause of the fault using the message displayed in the instrument panel you must then contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. fixed associated with the flashing and then fixed display of the service indicator spanner. The servicing interval has been exceeded. Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.

slide 26:

Instruments 24 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Battery charge fixed. The battery charging circuit has a fault dirty or loose terminals slack or cut alternator belt .... The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Doors open fixed associated with a message identifying the door. Speed below 6 mph 10 km/h a door or the boot is not properly closed. Close the door or boot. fixed associated with a message identifying the door together with an audible signal. Speed above 6 mph 10 km/h a door or the boot is not properly closed. Depending on the country of sale. Engine oil pressure fixed. There is a fault with the engine lubrication system. You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. Park switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 27:

1 25 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Seat belts not fastened / unfastened fixed. The driver and/or the front/rear passenger has not fastened or has unfastened their seat belt. Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle. The illuminated dots represent the passengers that have not fastened / unfastened their seat belt. They come on: - fixed for 30 about seconds on starting the vehicle - fixed from 0 to 12 mph 0 to 20 km/h when driving - flashing above 12 mph 20 km/h accompanied by an audible signal for about 120 seconds. Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Electric parking brake flashing. The electric parking brake is not applied automatically. The application/release is faulty. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park on flat level ground engage a gear select P mode for an automatic gearbox switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Electric parking brake fault fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. For more information on the Electric parking brake refer to the corresponding section. Anti-lock Braking System ABS fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a fault. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

slide 28:

Instruments 26 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Brakes fixed. A minor fault with the braking system. Drive carefully. As soon as possible have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped significantly. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Top-up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT. If the problem persists have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. + fixed associated with the ABS warning lamp. The electronic brake force distribution EBFD system has a fault. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Dynamic stability control DSC/ASR flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is operating. The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of grip or trajectory. fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Distance alert / Active Safety Brake flashing. The system is operating. The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed of collision with the vehicle ahead. fixed accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 29:

1 27 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Lane Departure Warning System flashing accompanied by an audible signal. A lane marking has been crossed on the left or right. Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction to return to the correct trajectory. For more information on the Lane Departure Warning System refer to the corresponding section. fixed accompanied by the display of a message. The system has a fault. Be vigilant and drive carefully. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Assisted Lane Departure Warning System fixed. The system is not available The system has been deactivated or is on automatic standby. For more information on the Assisted Lane Departure Warning System refer to the corresponding section. flashing. You are about to cross a solid lane marking without operating the direction indicators. The system is activated then corrects the trajectory on the side of the lane marking detected. + fixed accompanied by the display of a message an audible signal and the Service warning lamp. The system has a fault. Be vigilant and drive carefully. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. For more information on the Assisted Lane Departure Warning System refer to the corresponding section.

slide 30:

Instruments 28 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Airbags on temporarily. This warning lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition then goes off. This warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault. Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels is too low. Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold. + flashing then fixed accompanied by the Service warning lamp. The tyre pressure monitoring system has a fault or no sensor is detected on one of the wheels. Under-inflation detection is not assured. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 31:

1 29 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Engine autodiagnosis system flashing. The engine management system has a fault. Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. fixed. The emission control system has a fault. The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop without delay. Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations Low fuel level fixed with reserve level represented in red accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. When it first comes on there remains approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on accompanied by a message and an audible signal until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. This audible signal and message are repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops and approaches "0". Fuel tank capacity: approximately 53 litres. Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.

slide 32:

Instruments 30 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations AdBlue ® BlueHDi Diesel fixed on switching on the ignition accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range. The remaining driving range is between 350 miles 600 km and 1500 miles 2400 km. Have the AdBlue ® topped-up as soon as possible: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its tank. flashing accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range. The remaining driving range is between 0 and 350 miles 600 km. You must top-up the AdBlue ® to avoid a breakdown or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its tank. flashing accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that starting is prevented. The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the starting inhibition system required by legislation prevents starting of the engine. To be able to start the engine you must top-up the AdBlue ® or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. It is essential to add at least 4 litres of AdBlue ® to its tank. For topping-up or for more information on AdBlue ® and the SCR system refer to the corresponding section.

slide 33:

1 31 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations + + SCR emissions control system BlueHDi Diesel fixed on switching on the ignition associated with the Service and engine diagnostic warning lamps accompanied by an audible signal and a message. A fault with the SCR emissions control system has been detected. This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions return to normal levels. flashing on switching on the ignition associated with the Service and engine diagnostic warning lamps accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range. After confirmation of the fault with the emissions control system you can drive for up to 650 miles 1 100 km before the engine starting inhibition system is triggered. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to avoid a breakdown. flashing on switching on the ignition associated with the Service and engine diagnostic warning lamps accompanied by an audible signal and a message. You have exceeded the authorised driving limit following confirmation of a fault with the emissions control system: the engine starting inhibition system prevents starting of the engine. To be able to start the engine you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 34:

Instruments 32 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Coolant temperature gauge You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. With the engine running: - in zone A the temperature is correct - in zone B the temperature is too high this warning lamp and the central STOP warning lamp come on accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. For more information on Checking levels refer to the corresponding section. Indicators After first switching off the ignition open the bonnet cautiously and check the coolant level.

slide 35:

1 33 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Service indicator More than 1 800 miles 3 000 km remain before the next service is due When the ignition is switched on no service information is displayed automatically in the instrument panel. Between 600 miles 1 000 km and 1 800 miles 3 000 km remain before the next service is due When the ignition is switched on the system issues an alert to indicate when the next service is due. This alert comprises the temporary display of a message in the instrument panel accompanied by the permanent display of the servicing spanner alongside the total distance recorder. Example: 1 700 miles 2 800 km or 9 months remain before the next service is due. Less than 600 miles 1 000 km remain before the next service is due When the ignition is switched on the system issues an alert to indicate that the next service is due very soon. This alert comprises the temporary display of a message in the instrument panel accompanied by the flashing and then fixed display of the servicing spanner alongside the total mileage recorder. Example: 560 miles 900 km or 2 months remain before the next service is due. The servicing spanner remains on as a reminder that a service is required soon. The servicing spanner remains on as a reminder that a service is required very soon. System which informs the driver when the next service is due in accordance with the manufacturers service schedule. The point at which the service is due is calculated from the last reset of the service indicator according to the mileage covered and the time elapsed since the last service. For BlueHDi Diesel versions depending on the country of sale the degree of deterioration of the engine oil may also be taken into account.

slide 36:

Instruments 34 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Service overdue When the ignition is switched on the system issues an alert to indicate that the next service is overdue. This alert comprises the temporary display of a message in the instrument panel accompanied by the flashing and then fixed display of the servicing spanner alongside the total mileage recorder. Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles 300 km. The servicing spanner remains on until the service has been carried out. With BlueHDi Diesel versions when the ignition is switched on this alert is completed by the fixed illumination of this warning lamp. The alert may be triggered if you have exceeded the period since the last service as indicated in the manufacturers service schedule. For BlueHDi Diesel versions the alert may also be triggered early depending on the degree of deterioration of the engine oil which depends on the driving conditions in which the vehicle is used.

slide 37:

1 35 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Resetting the service indicator If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation lock the vehicle and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be registered. After each service the service indicator must be reset to zero. If you have carried out the service on your vehicle yourself: F switch off the ignition F press and hold the trip distance recorder reset button F switch on the ignition the distance recorder display begins a countdown F when the display indicates "0" release the button the spanner disappears. Retrieving the service information You can access the service information at any time. F Press the trip distance recorder reset button. The service information is displayed for a few seconds then disappears.

slide 38:

Instruments 36 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Engine oil level indicator Oil level correct This is indicated by the display of the message "Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel screen accompanied by the service warning lamp and an audible signal. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine. For more information on Checking levels refer to the corresponding section. Oil level indicator fault In the event of a fault with the electric indicator the oil level is no longer monitored. If the system is faulty you must check the engine oil level using the manual dipstick located under the bonnet. For more information on Checking levels refer to the corresponding section. Oil level incorrect This is signalled by the display of the message "Oil level measurement invalid" in the instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. On versions fitted with an electric oil level indicator the state of the engine oil level is displayed in the instrument panel for a few seconds after the servicing information. Depending on version. The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

slide 39:

1 37 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 AdBlue ® range indicators These range indicators are present only on BlueHDi Diesel versions. Once the AdBlue ® tank is on reserve or after detection of a fault with the SCR emissions control system when the ignition is switched on an indicator displays an estimate of the distance that can be covered the range before engine starting is prevented. In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue ® 1 500 miles" and depending on the level in the AdBlue tank followed by a message indicating that you can top-up with at least 10 litres. Remaining range greater than 1 500 miles 2 400 km Pressing this button will temporarily display the remaining range with the message "AdBlue: range greater than The engine start prevention system required by regulations is activated automatically once the AdBlue ® tank is empty. When switching on the ignition there is no automatic display of range in the instrument panel.

slide 40:

Instruments 38 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles 0 and 600 km When switching on the ignition the AdBlue warning lamp flashes accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message e.g. "Top-up AdBlue: Starting impossible in 150 miles" indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving the message is displayed every 30 seconds until the AdBlue tank has been topped-up. It is essential to top-up as soon as possible and before the tank is completely empty otherwise it will not be possible to restart the engine after the next stop. Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles 600 and 2 400 km When switching on the ignition the AdBlue warning lamp comes on accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message e.g. "Top-up AdBlue: Starting impossible in 900 miles" indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving the message is displayed every 190 miles 300 km until the AdBlue tank has been topped-up. The reserve level has been reached: it is recommended that you top-up as soon as possible. To be able to start the engine it is essential to add at least 4 litres of AdBlue ® to its tank. For more information on AdBlue ® and the SCR system and topping-up in particular refer to the corresponding section. When switching on the ignition the AdBlue warning lamp flashes accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Top-up AdBlue: Starting impossible". The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the system required by regulations prevents engine starting. Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue ® These messages are completed by the recommendation to not top-up by more than 10 litres of AdBlue.

slide 41:

1 39 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system In the event of the detection of a fault The AdBlue SERVICE and self-diagnostic warning lamps comes on accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault". The alert is triggered when driving when the fault is detected for the first time then when switching on the ignition for subsequent journeys while the fault persists. During an authorised driving phase between 650 miles and 0 miles 1 100 km and 0 km If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed after 30 miles 50 km covered with the permanent display of the message signalling a fault the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps come on and the AdBlue warning lamp flashes accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in 150 miles" indicating the remaining range express in miles or kilometres. A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 650 miles 1 100 km after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. If it is a temporary fault the alert disappears during the next journey after self-diagnosis of the SCR system. While driving the message is displayed every 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the ignition. You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. Otherwise you will not be able to restart your engine.

slide 42:

Instruments 40 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Starting prevented Every time the ignition is switched on the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps come on and the AdBlue warning lamp flashes accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented". To be able to start the engine you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You have exceeded the authorised driving limit: the starting prevention system inhibits engine starting. This function allows you at any time to check certain indicators and display the alerts log. This information is also displayed automatically every time the ignition is switched on. Manual test in the instrument panel The following information is displayed in the instrument panel: - the engine oil level - when the next service is due - the driving range for the AdBlue and the SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel versions - current alerts. F With the engine running briefly press this button.

slide 43:

1 41 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Distance recorders When travelling abroad you may have to change the units of distance: the display of road speed must be in the official units miles or km for the country. The change of units is done via the screen configuration menu with the vehicle stationary. The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off when the drivers door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. Total distance recorder It measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its first registration. Trip distance recorder It measures the distance travelled since it was reset by the driver. Resetting the trip recorder F With the ignition on press the button until zeros appear.

slide 44:

Instruments 42 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Instrument panel lighting dimmer Version with monochrome screen The brightness of the instrument panel mood lighting is adjusted in the touch screen. F Select the Settings menu in the upper bar of the touch screen. Operates only when the vehicles exterior lighting is on "night" mode. It allows adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and controls. F Press this button to adjust the brightness. F When the lighting reaches the minimum setting release the button then press it again to increase brightness. or F When the lighting reaches the maximum setting release the button then press it again to decrease brightness. F Release the button once the desired level of brightness is reached. Instrument panel mood lighting F Press this button. F Press the "Brightness" button. F Adjust the brightness by pressing the arrows or moving the cursor. F Confirm to save and quit. Version with touch screen It allows the instrument panel mood lighting to be switched on or off.

slide 45:

1 43 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Trip computer Information display in the instrument panel F Press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk to display the various tabs in succession. The display of trip computer information is permanent when you select the "TRIP COMPUTER" or "PERSONAL" display mode. For all other display modes pressing the end of the wiper stalk displays this information in a new window. System that gives you information on the current journey range fuel consumption…. - The current information tab with: ● the range ● the current fuel consumption ● the Stop Start time counter. - Trip "1" with: ● the average speed. ● the average fuel consumption ● the distance travelled for the first trip. - Trip "2" with: ● the average speed ● the average fuel consumption ● the distance travelled for the second trip. Trip reset F When the desired trip is displayed press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk for more than two seconds. Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical. For example trip "1" can be used for daily figures and trip "2" for monthly figures.

slide 46:

Instruments 44 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 A few definitions… Range miles or km When the range falls below 20 miles 30 km dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel the range is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 60 miles 100 km. Current fuel consumption mpg or l/100 km or km/l Average fuel consumption mpg or l/100 km or km/l Distance travelled miles or km Stop Start time counter minutes / seconds or hours / minutes If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. This function is only displayed from 20 mph 30 km/h. This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief resulting in a significant change in the current fuel consumption. The distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank at the average fuel consumption seen over the last few miles kilometres travelled. Calculated over the last few seconds. Calculated since the last trip computer reset. If your vehicle is fitted with Stop Start a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey. It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on. Calculated since the last trip computer reset. Average speed mph or km/h Calculated since the last trip computer reset.

slide 47:

1 45 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Monochrome screen C Displays in the screen Controls Main menu Depending on the context it displays: - time - date - ambient temperature this flashes if there is a risk of ice - visual parking sensor information - current audio source - telephone or Bluetooth system information - settings menus for the screen and the vehicle equipment. From the audio system control panel press: F the "MENU" button for access to the main menu F the " 5 " or " 6" buttons to scroll through the items in the screen F the " 7" or " 8" buttons to change a setting value F the "OK" button to confirm or F the "Back" button to abandon the operation in progress. F Press the "MENU" button: - "Multimedia" - "Telephone" - "Connections" - "Personalisation-configuration" F Press the " 7" or " 8" button to select the menu required then confirm by pressing the "OK" button. "Multimedia" menu With the audio system switched on this menu allows you to activate or deactivate the functions associated with use of the radio Frequency search RDS DAB / FM auto tracking RadioText TXT display or to choose the media play mode Normal Random Random all Repeat. For more information on the "Multimedia" application refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.

slide 48:

Instruments 46 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 "Telephone" menu "Connections" menu With the audio system on this menu allows a Bluetooth device telephone media player to be paired and the connection mode to be defined hands-free playing audio files. For more information on the "Connections" application refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. With the audio system switched on this menu allows you to make a call view the calls log or the various telephone directories. For more information on the "Telephone" application refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. This menu gives access to the following functions: - "Define the vehicle parameters" - "Choice of language" - "Display configuration" - "Comfort": ● "Rear wipe in reverse gear". For more information on the Wipers refer to the "Lighting and visibility" section. ● "Parking assistance". For more information on Parking assistance refer to the "Driving" section. ● "Fatigue Detection System". For more information on the Fatigue detection system refer to the "Driving" section. Defne the vehicle parameters This menu allows the activation or deactivation of the following equipment depending on version: - "Lighting": ● "Follow-me-home headlamps". ● "Welcome lighting". For more information on Exterior lighting refer to the "Lighting and visibility" section. "Personalisation-configuration" menu - "Access to the vehicle": ● "Plip action". For more information on the Remote control and selective door unlocking in particular refer to the "Access" section. - "Driving assistance": ● "Auto. emergency braking". For more information on the Active Safety Brake refer to the "Driving" section. ● "Speed recommendation". For more information on Speed limit recognition refer to the "Driving" section. ● "Tyre inflation". For more information on Under- inflation detection and reinitialisation in particular refer to the "Driving" section.

slide 49:

1 47 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Choice of language This menu allows selection of the language used by the screen and the instrument" panel. Display confguration This menu gives access to the following settings: - "Choice of units" - "Date and time adjustment" - "Display parameters" - "Brightness". Adjusting the date and time F Press the " 7" or " 8" button to display the "Display configuration" menu then press "OK". F Press the " 5 " or " 6" button to select the "Date and time adjustment" button then press "OK". F Press the " 7" or " 8" button to select the setting to modify. Confirm by pressing "OK" then modify the setting and confirm again to save the modification. F Adjust the settings one by one confirming with the "OK" button. F Press the " 5 " or " 6" button then the "OK" button to select the "OK" box and confirm or the "Back" button to cancel. As a safety measure the driver must only carry out operations that require sustained attention when stationary.

slide 50:

Instruments 48 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Touch screen This system gives access to: - the permanent display of the time and the ambient temperature a blue symbol appears when there is a risk of ice - the heating/air conditioning controls - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle functions and systems - audio system and telephone controls and the display of associated information - the display of visual parking aids visual parking sensor information Park Assist ... - Internet services and the display of associated information. General operation and depending on equipment allows: - access to the navigation system controls and the display of associated information. As a safety measure the driver should only carry out operations that require close attention with the vehicle stationary. Some functions are not accessible when driving. Recommendations This screen is of the capacitive type. Use is possible in all temperatures. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch screen. Principles Use the buttons below the touch screen for access to the menus then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Certain menus may be displayed over two pages. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the second page. To deactivate or activate a function select "OFF" or "ON". To modify a setting or access additional information press the symbol for the function. Use this button to confirm. Use this button to return to the previous page. After a few moments with no action on the second page the first page is displayed automatically. For the audio and telematic systems refer to the supplement to the handbook or go to the following internet address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/

slide 51:

1 49 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Air conditioning. Allows control of the settings for temperature air flow... Connected navigation or Mirror Screen. See more information in "Audio equipment and telematics". Menus i-Cockpit Amplify function. Allows a vehicle ambience to be personalised. Radio Media. See more information in "Audio equipment and telematics". Driving. Allows the activation deactivation and adjustment of settings for certain functions. Telephone. See more in "Audio equipment and telematics". Applications. Allows direct access to certain i-Cockpit Amplify functions scented air freshener.... Volume / mute. See more in "Audio equipment and telematics". Depending on equipment. Upper bar Certain information is always displayed in the upper bar of the touch screen: - Repeat of the air conditioning information and direct access to the corresponding menu. - Repeat of information from the Radio Media Telephone menus and navigation instructions. - Access to Configuration of the touch screen and the digital instrument panel. For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section. For more information on Semi-automatic mono-zone air conditioning and Automatic dual-zone air conditioning refer to the corresponding sections. The functions accessible from this menu are arranged under two tabs: "Settings" and "Driving assistance". For more information on the Scented air freshener refer to the corresponding section. See more information in "Audio equipment and telematics".

slide 52:

Instruments 50 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Driving menu "Settings" tab Button Comments "Lighting" - "Directional headlamps": activation/deactivation of cornering lighting. - "LED daytime running lamps" depending on the country of sale. "Vehicle access" - "Driver plip action": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking of the drivers door. - "Unlock boot only": activation/deactivation of selective unlocking at the tailgate. - "Motorized tailgate": activation/deactivation of motorized operation of the tailgate. - "Hands-Free Tailgate Access": activation/deactivation of the hands-free tailgate access system. "Comfort" - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation/deactivation of the rear wiper coupled with reverse gear. - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of automatic guide-me-home lighting. - "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior welcome lighting. - "Mood lighting": activation/deactivation of mood lighting and adjustment of brightness. - "Auto mirror dipping in reverse": activation/deactivation of automatic dipping of door mirrors in reverse gear. "Safety" - "Collision risk alert and automatic braking": activation/deactivation of collision risk alert and automatic emergency braking. - "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of speed limit recognition. - "Fatigue Detection System": activation/deactivation of the driver fatigue detection system. For more information on one of these functions refer to the corresponding section.

slide 53:

1 51 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 "Driving assistance" tab Corresponding function "Comments" "Speed settings" Memorisation of speed settings for the speed limiter or cruise control. "Under-inflation initialization" Reinitialization of the under-inflation detection system. "Lane departure detection assistance." Activation/deactivation of the function. "Help staying in lane" Activation/deactivation of the function. Parking sensors Activation/deactivation of the function. "Park Assist" Activation/deactivation of the function. "Automatic headlamp dip" Activation/deactivation of the function. "Stop Start" Activation/deactivation of the function. "Blind spot monitoring" Activation/deactivation of the function. "Panoramic visual aid" Activation of the Visiopark 2 function. "Wheel anti-slip regulation" Activation/deactivation of the function For more information on one of these functions refer to the corresponding section.

slide 54:

Instruments 52 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Confguration The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below. Button Comments Turn off the screen black screen. To return to the current screen press the black screen or one of the menu buttons. Adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel mood lighting. Choice and settings for three user profiles. Settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel... Activation and adjustment of Wi-Fi settings.

slide 55:

1 53 Instruments 3008-2_en_Chap01_instruments-de-bord_ed01-2016 Button Corresponding function Comments Screen configuration Adjustment of the display settings scrolling of text animations... and brightness. Instrument panel perso Select the type of information displayed in the digital instrument panel. System configuration Choice of units: - temperature °Celsius or °Fahrenheit - distance and fuel consumption l/100 km mpg or km/l. Languages Choice of language used for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel. Time / Date Setting the time date and format. Option of synchronisation with GPS. Settings The settings possible for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel are presented in the table below.

slide 56:

Access 54 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Remote control The remote control can be used for the following functions depending on version: - unlocking / locking / deadlocking the vehicle - unlocking and opening the boot - switch on the lighting from a distance - folding / unfolding the door mirrors - activation / deactivation of the alarm - opening the windows - closing the windows and the opening roof - locating the vehicle - vehicle immobiliser. In normal operating conditions it is preferable to use the remote control. General points The key integral with the remote control can be used for the following functions depending on version: - unlocking / locking / deadlocking the vehicle - turning the child lock on or off - activation / deactivation of the passengers front airbag - back-up door locking - switching on the ignition and starting / stopping the engine. Ejecting the key Version with Keyless Entry and Starting F Pull on this button to remove the key from the housing. To return it to the housing first pull on this button. Version without Keyless Entry and Starting F Press this button the key is ejected from its housing. To avoid damaging the mechanism first press this button to fold it. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be locked or unlocked in the event of a failure of the remote control the central locking the battery... For more information on the Back-up procedures refer to the corresponding section.

slide 57:

2 Access 55 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 F Press this button. Total unlocking Unlocking the vehicle Selective unlocking of the drivers door Setting is via the vehicle configuration menu in the screen. F To unlock just the drivers door make a first press on this button. F To unlock the other doors and the boot press this button again. On the first press of the locking button flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - total or selective unlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - deactivation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors unfold. Opening the windows Locking the vehicle Normal locking F Press this button. On pressing the locking button illumination of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - locking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - activation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors fold. If one of the doors or the boot is not fully closed the locking does not take place. However if your vehicle has an alarm this will be totally activated after about 45 seconds. If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and there is then no action on the doors or boot the vehicle will automatically lock itself again after about 30 seconds. If the alarm had been previously activated it will be reactivated automatically. The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors with the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Depending on version pressing and holding the unlocking buttons opens the windows to the desired position. The windows stop when you release the button.

slide 58:

Access 56 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Deadlocking F Make a first press on this button. F Within five seconds press this button again to deadlock the vehicle. Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the interior central locking button on the dashboard. Therefore never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked. Locating your vehicle F Press this button. This will switch on the courtesy lamps and door mirror spot lamps and the direction indicators will flash for around ten seconds. This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance particularly in poor light. Your vehicle must be locked. For versions without alarm deadlocking is confirmed by illumination of the direction indicators for few seconds on the second press of the locking button. Closing the windows and sunroof Pressing and holding the locking button closes the windows and depending on version the sunroof to the desired position. When closing the windows and sunroof you must ensure that nothing prevents their correct closing. If on versions with alarm you want to leave the windows and/or sunroof partly open you must first deactivate the volumetric alarm protection. For more information on the Alarm refer to the corresponding section. This operation also starts closing of the blind.

slide 59:

2 Access 57 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated pressing the unlocking button unlocks the whole vehicle. Remote operation of exterior lighting Availability of this function depends on version. F Make a short press on this remote control button. Pressing again before the end of the timed period switches off the lighting immediately. Unlocking and opening the boot Selective unlocking of the boot F Make a long press on this button to unlock the boot and start the motorised opening of the tailgate. The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked. The sidelamps dipped beam headlamps number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30 seconds. The setting for selective unlocking of the boot is done in the vehicle configuration menu in the screen. By default selective unlocking of the boot is activated. If motorised operation of the tailgate is deactivated pressing the unlocking button releases the tailgate. To lock the vehicle it is necessary to close the tailgate manually. On pressing the boot unlocking button flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - total or selective unlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - deactivation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors unfold. The setting for motorised operation of the tailgate is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. By default motorised operation is deactivated.

slide 60:

Access 58 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Keyless Entry and Starting System that allows the unlocking locking and starting of the vehicle while keeping the electronic key on your person. Unlocking the vehicle Complete unlocking The electronic key can also be used as a remote control. For more information on the operation of the Remote control refer to the corresponding section. F With the electronic key on your person and in the recognition zone A pass your hand behind one of the front door handles or press the tailgate opening control located in the middle. If motorised operation of the tailgate is activated this action triggers its automatic opening. Opening the windows Depending on version keeping your hand behind the door handle or pressing the tailgate control allows the windows to be opened to the desired position. Flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - the unlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - the deactivation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors unfold.

slide 61:

2 Access 59 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Selective unlocking of the drivers door F To unlock only the drivers door with the electronic key on your person pass your hand behind the drivers door handle. F To unlock the complete vehicle pass your hand behind the front passenger door handle with the electronic key close to the passenger door or press the tailgate opening control located in the middle with the electronic key close to the rear of the vehicle. Activation or deactivation of the selective unlocking of the drivers door is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. When unlocking the drivers door flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - the selective unlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - the deactivation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors unfold. Selective unlocking of the boot F Press the tailgate opening button to unlock just the boot. The doors remain locked. If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated pressing this control also unlocks the door. Activation or deactivation of selective locking of the boot is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen.

slide 62:

Access 60 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 If one of the doors or the boot is still open or if the electronic key for the Keyless Entry and Starting system has been left inside the vehicle the central locking does not take place. However the alarm if fitted will be fully activated after about 45 seconds. As a safety measure children on board never leave the vehicle without taking the electronic key for the Keyless Entry and Starting system with you even for a short period. Be aware of the risk of theft when the electronic key for the Keyless Entry and Starting system is in one of the defined zones with the vehicle unlocked. The automatic folding and unfolding of the door mirrors can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. In order to preserve the battery in the electronic key and the vehicles battery the "hands-free" functions are put into long-term standby after 21 days without use. To restore these functions press one of the remote control buttons or start the engine with the electronic key in the reader. For more information on starting with Keyless Entry and Starting refer to the corresponding section. If the vehicle is unlocked by mistake and with no action on the doors or boot the vehicle will lock again automatically after about 30 seconds. If fitted to your vehicle the alarm will also be reactivated automatically.

slide 63:

2 Access 61 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Ensure that nothing could prevent the correct closing of the windows and sunroof. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows. Illumination of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - locking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - activation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors fold. For reasons of safety and theft protection do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle even when you are close to it. It is recommended that you keep it on your person. Locking the vehicle Normal locking F With the electronic key in the recognition zone A press with a finger or thumb on one of the front door handles at the markings or press the locking button on the tailgate on the right. It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the electronic keys is left inside the vehicle. Closing the windows and sunroof Maintaining pressure on the door handle or the tailgate control allows the windows and depending on version the sunroof to be closed to the desired position. This operation also closes the sunroof blind.

slide 64:

Access 62 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Accumulations water dust grime salt... on the inner surface of the door handle may affect detection. If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore detection contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A sudden splash of water stream of water high pressure jet washer … may be identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle. Deadlocking F With the electronic key in the recognition zone A press a finger or thumb on one of the front door handles at the markings or on the locking control located on the tailgate to the right. F Within five seconds press one of these locking controls again to deadlock the vehicle. At the first press on one of the locking controls illumination of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: - the locking of the vehicle for versions without alarm - the activation of the alarm for other versions. Depending on version the door mirrors fold. At the second press illumination of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals the deadlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm. Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the interior central control button on the dashboard. Therefore never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

slide 65:

2 Access 63 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Remote control The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle without you being aware of it. Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised. The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition even when the ignition is switched off. Locking the vehicle Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency. As a safety precaution with children on board remove the key from the ignition or take the electronic key when you leave the vehicle even for a short time. Electrical interference The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone laptop computer strong magnetic fields ... Anti-theft protection Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system this could cause malfunctions. For vehicles with an ignition switch do not forget to remove the key and turn the steering to engage the steering lock. Lost keys remote control electronic key Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicles registration certificate your personal identification documents and if possible the label bearing the key code. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key. Do not throw the remote control batteries away they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point. When purchasing a second-hand vehicle Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEOT dealer to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.

slide 66:

Access 64 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Back-up procedures These procedures should be used in the following cases: - remote control cell battery flat - remote control fault - vehicle in an area subject to strong electromagnetic interference. In the first case you can also replace the remote control cell battery. Refer to the corresponding section. In the second case you can also reinitialise the remote control. Refer to the corresponding section. Unlocking F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle. For versions without alarm the unlocking is confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds. Depending on version the door mirrors unfold. If the alarm is activated the siren sounds on opening the door switch on the ignition to stop it. Normal locking F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle. For versions without alarm the locking is confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds. Depending on version the door mirrors fold. If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm this function will not be activated when locking with the key. Total unlocking / locking of the vehicle with the key

slide 67:

2 Access 65 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Deadlocking Without central locking These procedures should be used in the following cases: - central locking fault - battery disconnected or discharged. Drivers door F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to lock it or towards the front to unlock it. Passenger doors Unlocking a door F Pull the interior opening control for the door. Locking F Open the doors. F For the rear doors check that the child lock is not on. Refer to the corresponding section. F Remove the black cap on the edge of the door using the key. F Without forcing insert the key into the aperture then without turning it move the latch sideways towards the inside of the door. F Remove the key and refit the black cap. F Close the doors and check from the outside that the vehicle is locked. F Insert the key in the door lock barrel. F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to lock it. F Within five seconds turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle again to deadlock it. For versions without alarm at the second manoeuvre the deadlocking is confirmed by flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds. Depending on version the door mirrors fold.

slide 68:

Access 66 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Changing the battery A message appears in the instrument panel screen when replacement of the battery is needed. Version without Keyless Entry and Starting Battery type: CR1620 / 3 volts. Version with Keyless Entry and Starting Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts. F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver at the cut-out. F Lift off the cover. F Remove the discharged battery from its housing. F Fit the new battery into its housing observing the polarity. F Clip the cover onto the casing. The remote control must be reinitialised after replacing the battery. For more information on reinitialising the remote control refer to the corresponding section.

slide 69:

2 Access 67 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Following replacement of the battery or in the event of a remote control fault it may be necessary to reinitialise the remote control. Version with Keyless Entry and Starting Reinitialising the remote control Version without Keyless Entry and Starting F Place the electronic key against the back- up reader on the steering column and hold it there until the ignition is switched on. F Switch on the ignition by pressing the "START/STOP" button. The electronic key is now fully operational again. F Switch off the ignition. F Turn the key to position 2 ignition on. F Press the closed padlock button for a few seconds. F Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the switch. The remote control is now fully operational again. F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox select position P then press the brake pedal firmly. If the fault persists after reinitialisation contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

slide 70:

Access 68 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Central locking Manual mode Unlocking This function allows the doors and boot to be locked or unlocked simultaneously from inside the vehicle. Locking When locking / deadlocking from the outside When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from the outside the red indicator lamp flashes and the button is inactive. F After normal locking pull one of the interior door levers to unlock the vehicle. F After deadlocking it is necessary to use the remote control Keyless Entry and Starting or the integral key to unlock the vehicle. Automatic mode This is the automatic central locking of the vehicle when driving also called anti-intrusion security. For more information on Anti-intrusion security refer to the corresponding section. If one of the doors is open the central locking from the inside does not take place. F Press this button to lock the vehicle. The red indicator lamp in the button comes on. F Press this button again to unlock the vehicle. The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.

slide 71:

2 Access 69 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Activation / Deactivation Anti-intrusion security Operation This system allows automatic simultaneous locking of the doors and boot as soon as the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph 10 km/h. If one of the doors or the boot is open the automatic central locking does not take place. Carrying long or voluminous objects If you want to drive with the boot open you should press the central locking button to lock the doors. Otherwise every time the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph 10 km/h the locks will rebound and the alerts mentioned above will appear. Pressing the central locking button unlocks the vehicle. Above 6 mph 10 km/h this unlocking is temporary. You can activate or deactivate this function permanently. Driving with the doors locked may render access for the emergency services difficult in an emergency. This is signalled by the sound of the locks rebounding accompanied by illumination of this symbol in the instrument panel an audible signal and the display of an alert message. The state of the system stays in memory when switching off the ignition. F With the ignition on press this button until an audible signal starts and a corresponding message is displayed.

slide 72:

Access 70 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Depending on version. Alarm - exterior perimeter The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door the boot the bonnet... - interior volumetric The system checks for any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle. - anti-tilt The system checks for any change in the attitude of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted moved or knocked. Self-protection function The system checks for the putting out of service of its components. The alarm is triggered if the battery the central control or the siren wiring are put out of service or damaged. For all work on the alarm system contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Depending on engine. System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring:

slide 73:

2 Access 71 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Locking the vehicle with full alarm system Activation F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. F Lock the vehicle with the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system. The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second and the direction indicators come on for about 2 seconds. Deactivation F Press the unlocking button on the remote control. or F Unlock the vehicle with the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. The monitoring system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button goes off and the direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. Following an instruction to lock the vehicle the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after a delay of 45 seconds. If an opening door boot or bonnet is not fully closed the vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after a delay of 45 seconds at the same time as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring. When the vehicle automatically locks itself again as happens if a door or boot is not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking the monitoring system is also reactivated.

slide 74:

Access 72 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter monitoring only Deactivating the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring F Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds press the button until the indicator lamp is on continuously. F Get out of the vehicle. F Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system. The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is activated: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second. Reactivating the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring F Deactivate the perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle with the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. F Reactivate all monitoring by locking the vehicle with the remote control or the Keyless Entry and starting system. The indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second again. Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as: - leaving a pet in the vehicle - leaving a window or sunroof partially open - washing your vehicle - changing a wheel - having your vehicle towed - transport by sea. To be effective the deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.

slide 75:

2 Access 73 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Operating fault When the ignition is switched on fixed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault with the system. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Failure of the remote control To deactivate the monitoring functions: F unlock the vehicle using the key integral to the remote control in the drivers door lock F open the door the alarm is triggered F switch on the ignition the alarm stops the indicator lamp in the button goes off. Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm Triggering of the alarm This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 seconds. The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession. When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on this flashing stops immediately. F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key integral to the remote control in the drivers door lock.

slide 76:

Access 74 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Doors Opening From outside F After unlocking the vehicle or with the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and Starting system in the recognition zone pull the door handle. From inside F Pull the interior control lever of a front door this unlocks the vehicle completely. Closing - with the engine running or the vehicle moving speed below 6 mph 10 km/h this warning lamp comes on accompanied by an alert message for a few seconds. With the selective unlocking activated: - opening the drivers door unlocks the drivers door only if the vehicle has not already been completely unlocked. - opening one of the passenger doors unlocks the rest of the vehicle. When the selective unlocking is activated the first press of the remote control unlocking button permits unlocking of the drivers door only. When a door is not closed correctly: - with the vehicle moving speed above 6 mph 10 km/h in addition to the warning lamp and alert message there is an audible signal for a few seconds.

slide 77:

2 Access 75 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Boot Opening the tailgate F With the vehicle unlocked or with the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and Starting system in the recognition zone press the central tailgate control. F Raise the tailgate. Closing the tailgate When selective unlocking is activated the electronic key must be close to the rear of the vehicle. F Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. F Release the grips and press down on the outside of the tailgate to close it. With the exterior tailgate control The tailgate is not designed to take a bicycle carrier. If the tailgate is not properly closed: - engine running this warning lamp and a message appear in the instrument panel for a few seconds - vehicle running speed above 6 mph 10 km/h this warning lamp and a message appear in the instrument panel for a few seconds accompanied by an audible signal.

slide 78:

Access 76 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Hands-free tailgate General points The motorised operation of the tailgate can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings menu. The motorised tailgate must only be operated with the vehicle stationary. Never introduce a finger in the locking system of the motorised tailgate - Risk of a serious injury Anti-pinch The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection system that automatically interrupts and reverses its movement by a few degrees to allow the obstacle to be cleared. Please note that this anti-pinch system is not active at the end of the closing travel around 1 cm from completely closed. Bicycle carrier / Towbar The motorised tailgate is not designed to support a bicycle carrier. When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar with connection of a cable to the towbar socket the motorised operation of the tailgate will be automatically deactivated. If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not recommended by PEUGEOT it is essential to deactivate the motorised operation of the tailgate. Check that there is enough space to allow for the movement of the motorised tailgate. To avoid the risk of injury through pinching or trapping before and during operation of the motorised tailgate: - ensure that there is no person close to the rear of the vehicle - watch the activity of your passengers particularly any children.

slide 79:

2 Access 77 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Operation There are several ways of operating the motorised tailgate: A. using the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and Starting system B. using the exterior control on the tailgate C. using the interior tailgate control D. using the control on the dashboard E. using the "hands-free access" procedure below the rear bumper. Motorised opening There are several possibilities. F Make a long press on the central button A of the electronic key. or F Press the exterior control B on the tailgate with the electronic key on your person. or F Press twice in succession on the dashboard control D. The command is confirmed by an audible signal. The tailgate opens either completely as the default setting or to the memorised position. Motorised closing There are several possibilities. F Make a long press on the central button A of the electronic key. or F Press the exterior control B on the tailgate. or F Press the interior tailgate control C. or F Press twice in succession on the dashboard control D. The command is confirmed by an audible signal. Activation and deactivation of motorised operation of the tailgate is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. This function is deactivated by default. It is possible to stop the movement of the tailgate. Pressing one of these controls again interrupts the movement. Following the interruption of a movement pressing one of these controls again resumes the movement.

slide 80:

Access 78 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 "Hands-free" motorised opening This movement first unlocks just the boot or the vehicle if the latter was locked. F With the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and Starting system on your person F Use the "hands-free" access E by passing a foot rapidly below the rear bumper. The command is confirmed by an audible signal. The tailgate opens either completely by default or to the memorised position. Ensure that you are steady on your feet before passing a foot rapidly below the rear bumper. Take care not to touch the exhaust system which may be hot - Risk of burns Passing your foot rapidly below the bumper again while the tailgate is opening interrupts the movement. A third pass of your foot reverses the direction of movement. "Hands-free" motorised closing F With the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and Starting system on your person F Use the "hands-free" access E by passing a foot rapidly below the rear bumper. The command is confirmed by an audible signal. Passing your foot rapidly below the bumper again while the tailgate is closing interrupts the movement. A third pass of your foot reverses the direction of movement. Activation / deactivation of the Hands-Free Tailgate Access function is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. This function is deactivated by default.

slide 81:

2 Access 79 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 When opening and closing a motorised tailgate manually there is no assistance from gas-filled struts. Resistance to opening and closing is therefore entirely normal. Repeated opening and closing of the motorised tailgate can cause overheating of its electric motor after which opening and closing will not be possible. Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric motor to cool down before operating the tailgate again. If you are unable to wait operate it manually. Detection of obstacles If an obstacle person or object is encountered the anti-pinch system stops the closing movement and raises the tailgate by a few centimetres to clear the obstacle. Memorising an opening position Where height is restricted garage with a low ceiling ... it is possible to limit and memorise the opening angle of the motorised tailgate. This memorisation is done as follows: F open the tailgate to the desired position F press button C or the exterior control B for more than 3 seconds. Memorisation of the maximum opening position of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. To cancel the memorised position: F stop the tailgate in an intermediate position F press button C or the exterior control B for more than 3 seconds. Cancellation of the memorised position is confirmed by an audible signal. Manual operation The tailgate can be opened and closed manually even if motorised operation is activated. However any manual operation must be done with the tailgate first stopped. It is possible to activate automatic locking of the vehicle on closing the tailgate using the Hands-Free Tailgate Access function. F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on. Pressing this button again deactivates the function its indicator lamp goes off. Automatic locking by the Hands- Free Tailgate Access function

slide 82:

Access 80 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Precautions in use In wintry conditions In the event of an accumulation of snow on the tailgate clear the snow before commanding a motorised opening of the tailgate. The formation of ice can block the tailgate and prevent its opening: wait until the ice melts with the heating of the passenger compartment. When washing When washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash dont forget to lock your vehicle to avoid the risk of unexpected opening. Reinitialising the motorised tailgate This operation is necessary where there is no movement - after detection of an obstacle connecting or recharging the battery ... F Open the tailgate manually if necessary. F Fully close the tailgate manually. If the problem persists contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 83:

2 Access 81 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Back-up release Unlocking F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot. F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate. F Move the latch to the left. Locking after closing If the fault persists after closing again the boot will remain locked. To manually unlock the boot in the event of a battery or central locking failure. Recommendations related to the "Hands-free tailgate access" function If several passes of your foot below the rear bumper fail to open the tailgate wait a few seconds before starting again. The function is automatically deactivated in the event of heavy rain or accumulation of snow. If the function fails to operate check that the electronic key is not exposed to strong electromagnetic interference a smartphone .... The function may not work correctly with a prosthetic leg. The function may not work correctly if your vehicle is fitted with a towbar. In some circumstances the tailgate may only open or close particularly if: - your vehicle is fitted with a towbar - you hitch or unhitch a trailer - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle carrier - you place or lift something behind the vehicle - an animal approaches the rear bumper - you are washing your vehicle - a service is being carried out on your vehicle - you are accessing the spare wheel depending on version. To avoid such operating problems keep the electronic key away from the recognition zone or deactivate "Hands-free tailgate access". Ensure that no object or person might prevent the correct opening or closing of the tailgate. Be particularly aware of children when operating the tailgate.

slide 84:

Access 82 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Electric windows Manual operation To open or close the window press or pull the switch gently. The window stops as soon as the switch is released. 1. Left-hand front. 2. Right-hand front. 3. Right-hand rear. 4. Left-hand rear. 5. Deactivate the electric window switches located at the rear seats. Automatic operation Safety anti-pinch To open or close the window press or pull the switch fully: the window opens or closes completely when the switch is released. Pressing the switch again stops the movement of the window. When the window rises and meets an obstacle it stops and immediately partially lowers again. In the event of unwanted opening of the window on closing press the switch until the window opens completely then pull the switch immediately until the window closes. Continue to hold the switch for approximately one second after the window has closed. The safety anti-pinch function is not active during this operation. The electric window switches remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after switching off the ignition. Once this time has elapsed the electric windows will not operate. To reactivate them switch the ignition on again.

slide 85:

2 Access 83 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 For the safety of your children press switch 5 to prevent operation of the rear windows irrespective of their positions. In the event of contact during operation of the windows you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this press the switch concerned. When operating the passenger electric window switches the driver must ensure that nothing is preventing correct closing of the windows. The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows. Be aware of passengers or other persons present when closing the windows using the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. Deactivating the rear controls for the rear windows The indicator lamp in the button comes on accompanied by a message confirming activation. It remains on as long as the child lock is off deactivated. Use of the rear electric windows from the drivers controls remains possible. Reinitialising the electric windows Following reconnection of the battery the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. The safety anti-pinch function is not active during these operations. For each window: - lower the window completely then raise it it will rise in steps of a few centimetres with each action. Repeat the operation until the window closes completely - continue to pull the switch for at least one second after reaching this position window closed.

slide 86:

Access 84 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Panoramic opening sunroof The control buttons for the sunroof and blind can be used: - with the ignition on if the state of charge of the battery is adequate - with the engine running - in STOP mode of Stop Start - during the 45 seconds after switching off the ignition - during the 45 seconds after locking the vehicle. Opening The panoramic sunroof and its blind are opened and closed using the buttons in the roof console. A. Blind control button. B. Sunroof control button. Ensure that any luggage or accessories carried on the roof bars do not interfere with the movement of the sunroof. Do not place heavy loads on the fixed or mobile glass of the sunroof. Before operating the sunroof or blind control buttons ensure that no object or person might prevent the movement. Principles Complete opening of the sunroof involves partly raising the mobile glass then sliding it over the fixed glass. Any intermediate position is possible. Opening the sunroof also opens its blind. However the blind can be left open when the sunroof is closed. With the sunroof fully closed or partly raised: F press and release the rear of button B without going beyond the point of resistance to fully raise the sunroof. With the sunroof open in the raised position: F press and release the rear of button B without going beyond the point of resistance to open the sunroof. With the sunroof partly or fully closed: F press and release the rear of button B going beyond the point of resistance to fully close the sunroof. Any new action on this button interrupts the movement. Operating the sunroof F Press and hold the rear of button B without going beyond the point of resistance the sunroof opens and stops when you release the button.

slide 87:

2 Access 85 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 If the sunroof is wet following a shower or washing the vehicle wait until it is completely dry before opening. Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by snow or ice - Risk of damage Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or ice. Do not extend your head or arms through the open sunroof when driving - Risk of serious injury Closing F press and hold the front of button B without going beyond the point of resistance the sunroof closes and stops when you release the button. Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof open. Anti-pinch system If the sunroof encounters an obstacle when closing the movement is automatically reversed. The anti-pinch system is designed to be effective at speeds of up to 75 mph 120 km/h. Reinitialisation Following reconnection of the battery or in the event of a fault or jerky movement of the sunroof the opening sunroof must be reinitialised: F press the rear of button B until the sunroof is fully open F press and hold the rear of button B again for at least 3 seconds. Check the condition of the sunroof seals regularly presence of dust or deposits dead leaves.... Before using a car wash first check that the sunroof is closed. If using a high pressure jet wash keep the tip of the lance at least 30 centimetres from the seals. With the sunroof partially or fully open: F press and release the front of button B going beyond the point of resistance to fully close the sunroof. Any new action on this button interrupts the movement. With the sunroof partly or fully open: F press and release the front of button B without going beyond the point of resistance to close the sunroof to its raised position. F press and release the front of button B again to fully close the sunroof. With the sunroof fully or partly raised: F press and release the front of button B without going beyond the point of resistance to fully close the sunroof.

slide 88:

Access 86 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 Operating the sunroof blind Opening F Press and hold the rear of button A without going beyond the point of resistance the blind opens and stops when you release the button. During simultaneous closing of the sunroof and the blind if the blind catches up with the sunroof the blind then suspends its movement and automatically resumes when the sunroof stops. The closing movement of the blind is limited by the position of the opening sunroof: the blind cannot be further forward than the front of the mobile glass. Closing Any new action on this button interrupts the movement. Anti-pinch system If the blind encounters an obstacle when closing the movement is automatically reversed. Reinitialisation Following reconnection of the battery or in the event of a fault or jerky movement of the blind the blind must be reinitialised: F press the rear of button A until the blind is fully open F press and hold the rear of button A again for at least 3 seconds. F Press the rear of button A going beyond the point of resistance to fully open the blind. Any new action on this button interrupts the movement. F Press the front of button A going beyond the point of resistance to fully close the blind. F Press and hold the front of button A without going beyond the point of resistance the blind closes and stops when you release the button.

slide 89:

2 Access 87 3008-2_en_Chap02_ouvertures_ed01-2016 When locking the vehicle pressing and holding the locking button also closes the windows and the sunroof and then the blind. The movements are interrupted when you release the locking button. Never leave the electronic key inside the vehicle if you get out of the vehicle even for a short time. If something is trapped when closing the sunroof or blind you should reverse the movement of the sunroof or blind. To do this press the control button in question. The driver must ensure that passengers use the sunroof and blind correctly. Be particularly aware of children when operating the sunroof or blind.

slide 90:

88 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Driving position Adopting a good driving position helps improve your comfort and protection. It also optimises interior and exterior visibility as well as access to controls. Sitting comfortably Driver Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis back and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest. Adjust the height of the seat so that your eyes are level with the middle of the windscreen. Your head should be at a distance of at least 10 cm from the roof. Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so that you can fully depress the pedals with your legs still slightly bent. Passenger Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis back and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest. Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so that you are at a distance of at least 25 cm from the dashboard. Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is level with the top of your head. If your vehicle has electric seats the ignition must be on to adjust them. The distance between your knees and the dashboard should be at least 10 cm for easy access to the controls in the dashboard. Adjust the seat backrest angle to the most vertical position possible the backrest must not be reclined more than 25° from vertical. Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is level with the top of your head. Adjust the length of the seat cushion to support your thighs. Adjust the lumbar support to fit the shape of your spine. Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at distance of at least 25 cm from your chest and you are able to hold it with your arms slightly bent. The steering wheel must not obstruct your view of the instrument panel. As a safety measure the seats and steering wheel must only be adjusted when stationary. The presence in the vehicle of certain seat adjustments described in this section depends on the trim level and country of sale.

slide 91:

3 Ease of use and comfort 89 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Before moving off If your vehicle has electric door mirrors the ignition must be on to adjust them. When driving Adjust the interior and exterior door mirrors so as to reduce blind spots. Maintain a good driving position and hold the steering wheel with both hands at the quarter to three position so that you can easily and quickly reach the controls behind and near the steering wheel. Fasten your seat belt: place the diagonal belt in the middle of your shoulder and adjust the lap belt so that is tightened over your pelvis. Ensure that all passengers have fastened their seat belts correctly. Never adjust the seats or steering wheel when driving. Always keep your feet on the floor.

slide 92:

90 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Front seats Before moving the seat backwards ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat. Manual seats 1. Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards F Raise the control bar and slide the seat forwards or backwards. F Release the bar to engage the seat in position in the runners. 2. Adjusting the seat height F Raise or lower the control as many times as needed to obtain the desired seat height. 3. Adjusting the seat backrest angle F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to recline the backrest to the desired angle. 4. Adjusting the height of the head restraint Refer to the corresponding section. 5. Adjusting the lumbar support only on the drivers seat F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to increase or decrease the level of lumbar support.

slide 93:

3 Ease of use and comfort 91 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 "AGR" certified seats Additional adjustments 1. Adjustment of the length of the seat cushion F Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion then move the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. 2. Adjusting the seat cushion angle electrically F Press and hold the front or rear of the control to raise or lower the front of the seat cushion. 3. Adjusting the lumbar support electrically The control allows independent adjustment of the depth and vertical position of the lumbar support. F Press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or reduce the lumbar support. F Press and hold the top or bottom of the control to raise or lower the lumbar support area.

slide 94:

92 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Placing the passenger seat in the table position The backrest of the passenger seat can be fully folded forward and secured in this position. This function when associated with folding of the backrest of the rear seats helps in transporting long and voluminous objects. First steps: F lower the head restraint F move the seat fully back to allow space for the head restraint when folding F adjust the seat to the lowest position F check that there is nothing that might interfere with folding of the backrest seat belt child seat items of clothing bags.... Folding the backrest F Pull the control fully up to release the backrest. F Tip the backrest fully forward. In this position the backrest can support a maximum load of 30 kg. When the front passenger seat is fully folded only the outer rear seat behind the driver can be occupied by a passenger. Returning the backrest to the normal position F Pull the control fully up to release the backrest. F Raise the backrest and guide it back until it latches into place. F Check that the backrest has engaged correctly.

slide 95:

3 Ease of use and comfort 93 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Front head restraints Adjusting the height Upward: F pull the head restraint up to the desired position the head restraint can be felt to click into position. Downward: F press the lug A and push the head restraint down to the desired position. The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of your head. Removing a head restraint F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go. F Press the lug A to free the head restraint and then pull it fully out. F Stow the head restraint securely. Reftting a head restraint F Introduce the head restraint rods into the guides in the seat backrest. F Push the head restraint down as far as it will go. F Press the lug A to free the head restraint and push it down. F Adjust the height of the head restraint. Never drive with the head restraints removed they should be in place and correctly adjusted for the occupant of the seat.

slide 96:

94 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Before moving the seat backwards ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat. To adjust the seat electrically switch on the ignition or start the engine if the vehicle has gone into energy economy mode. These electric adjustments remain available for about a minute after opening the drivers door. They are deactivated about a minute after switching off the ignition. Electric drivers seat

slide 97:

3 Ease of use and comfort 95 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 1. Adjusting the angle and height of the seat cushion / Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards F Raise or lower the front of the control to obtain the desired seat cushion angle. F Raise or lower the rear of the control to raise or lower the seat. F Slide the control forwards or backwards to move the seat forwards or backwards. 2. Adjusting the seat backrest angle F Turn the control forwards or backwards to recline the backrest to the desired angle. 3. Adjusting the height of the head restraint Refer to the corresponding section. 4. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion F Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion then move the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. 5. Adjusting the lumbar support The control allows independent adjustment of the depth and vertical position of the lumbar support. F Press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or reduce the lumbar support. F Press and hold the top or bottom of the control to raise or lower the lumbar support area.

slide 98:

96 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Storing driving positions Associated with the electric drivers seat this function allows two driving positions to be stored to facilitate adjustment if there is a frequent change of driver. It takes account of the electric adjustments of the seat and the door mirrors. Storing a position Using buttons M / 1 / 2 F Sit in the drivers seat. F Switch on the ignition. F Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. F Press button M then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds. An audible signal indicates that the position has been stored. Storing a new position cancels the previous position. You can interrupt the current movement by pressing button M 1 or 2 or by using one of the seat controls. A stored position cannot be recalled while driving. Recalling stored positions is deactivated 45 seconds after switching off the ignition. Recalling a stored position Ignition on or engine running F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the corresponding position. An audible signal confirms that adjustment is complete.

slide 99:

3 Ease of use and comfort 97 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Heated seats The function is active only with the engine running. Switching on F Press the button for your seat. F Each press changes the level of heating the corresponding number of indicator lamps come on: ● 1 indicator lamp low. ● 2 indicator lamps medium. ● 3 indicator lamps high. Do not use the function if the seat is not occupied. Reduce the level of heating as soon as possible. Once the temperatures of the seat and the passenger compartment are at adequate levels you can switch off the function lower current consumption reduces fuel consumption. Switching off F Press the button again until all of the indicator lamps are off. The state of the function is not held in memory when the ignition is switched off. Prolonged use at the highest setting is not recommended for those with sensitive skin. There is a risk of burns for those that do not have normal perception of heat illness taking medicines .... There is a risk of overheating the system if material with insulating properties is used such as cushions or seat covers. Do not use the system: - if wearing damp clothing - if child seats are fitted. To avoid breaking the heating element in the seat: - do not place heavy objects on the seat - do not kneel or stand on the seat - do not place sharp objects on the seat - do not spill liquids onto the seat. To avoid the risk of short-circuit: - do not use liquid products for cleaning the seat - never use the heating function when the seat is damp.

slide 100:

98 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 System with a choice of type of massage and adjustment of its intensity. This system operates with the engine running as well as in STOP mode of Stop Start. Activation / Settings The massage settings are adjusted in the touch screen. The system is switched on either directly using the button on the front seat or by activating a personalised ambience with the i-Cockpit Amplify function Multipoint massage F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on. The system is activated immediately with the last settings used and the settings page is displayed in the touch screen. If the settings suit you and you make no changes the display returns to its previous state. If you want to modify the settings: F select another type of massage from the five offered F select a massage intensity from the 3 levels offered: "1" Low "2" Medium or "3" High. The modifications are taken into account immediately. Once activated the system starts a one hour massage cycle made up of sequences of 6 minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes at rest. The system stops automatically at the end of the cycle the indicator lamp in the button goes off. The multipoint massages are also manage by the i-Cockpit Amplify function. Using the button on the front seat: For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section.

slide 101:

3 Ease of use and comfort 99 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Steering wheel adjustment F When stationary pull the control lever to release the adjustment mechanism. F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position. F Push the control lever to lock the adjustment mechanism. As a safety measure these operations should only be carried out with the vehicle stationary. Mirrors Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded for parking in confined spaces. Door mirrors Demisting / Defrosting If your vehicle is fitted with heated mirrors the demisting-defrosting operates by switching on the heated rear screen. For more information on Demisting and defrosting the rear screen refer to the corresponding section. Adjustment F Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror. F Move control B in all four directions to adjust. F Return control A to the central position. The objects observed are in reality closer than they appear. Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind. As a safety measure the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.

slide 102:

100 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If necessary the mirrors can be folded manually. Unfolding F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the key. F From inside: with the ignition on pull the control A in the central position rearwards. Automatic tilting in reverse gear System which provides a view of the ground during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear. With the engine running on engaging reverse gear the mirror glasses tilt downwards. They return to their initial position: - a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear - once the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph 10 km/h - on switching off the engine. This function can be activated or deactivated in the Driving menu of the touch screen. If the mirrors are folded using control A they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on control A. Folding F From outside: lock the vehicle using the remote control or the key. F From inside: with the ignition on pull the control A in the central position rearwards. F Select the"Setting" tab then "Comfort" and "Auto mirror dipping in reverse".

slide 103:

3 Ease of use and comfort 101 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Rear view mirror Equipped with an anti-dazzle system which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun headlamps from other vehicles... Manual model Adjustment F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position. Day / night position F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- dazzle position. F Push the lever to change to the normal "day" position. Automatic "electrochrome" model This system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses by means of a sensor which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle. In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

slide 104:

102 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 i-Cockpit Amplify function This function allows the driving ambiences to be managed. Specific system settings are offered for each ambience. These ambiences can be personalised in the touch screen. Content of an ambience Access to the i-Cockpit Amplify home page Direct access by this button Access via the Applications menu An ambience is defined as the settings for each of the following systems: Activating an ambience From the home page: F Select an ambience: "Relax" or "Boost". Depending on the settings made for the ambience the systems are activated immediately. Deactivating an ambience From the home page: F Press "Deactivate the ambience". or F Select another ambience. The ambience is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched off. F Select "i-Cockpit Amplify". - the passenger compartment mood lighting activation / deactivation and adjustment of brightness - the audio ambience choice of predetermined settings for the audio system equaliser - scented air freshener activation / deactivation selection of a fragrance and a setting for diffusion intensity - multipoint massage selection of the seat activation / deactivation selection of a type of massage and a setting for intensity - Dynamic pack. activation / deactivation

slide 105:

3 Ease of use and comfort 103 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Personalising an ambience From the home page: F Select an ambience to activate it. F Press "Settings" to display the settings page for the ambience. F Select a system for which you wish to modify the settings. F After making the modifications press any area of the screen outside the system settings window to return to the ambience settings page. F After making all of the desired modifications to settings press "Save settings". The modifications are taken into account immediately. It is possible to temporarily modify an ambience at any time by modifying the settings for one or more of the systems managed in the ambience without going via the i-Cockpit Amplify function. For example you can deactivate or modify the intensity of the current massage by pressing the massage button on your seat or activate or deactivate the passenger compartment mood lighting in the Driving menu. In this case the new settings will not be saved as part of the current ambience.

slide 106:

104 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Heating and Ventilation Air intake The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode. Controls The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver the front passenger and rear passengers according to the level of equipment. The temperature control enables you to obtain the level of comfort required by mixing the air of the various circuits. The air distribution control enables you to select the air vents used in the passenger compartment by the combined use of the associated buttons. The air flow control enables you to increase or reduce the speed of the ventilation fan. Depending on your vehicle the controls are accessible in the "Air conditioning" menu of the touch screen or are grouped together on control panel on the centre console. Air distribution 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents. 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents. 3. Side adjustable air vents. 4. Central adjustable air vents. 5. Air outlets to the front footwells. 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells. To close the air vents: F side vents place the cursor in the central position then move it sideways towards the door. F centre vents place the cursor in the central position then move it sideways towards the centre of the dashboard.

slide 107:

3 Ease of use and comfort 105 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Stop Start The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment you can temporarily deactivate the Stop Start system. For more information on Stop Start refer to the corresponding section. In order for these systems to be fully effective follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below: F To obtain an even air distribution take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen the nozzles the vents and the air outlets as well as the air extractor located in the boot. F Do not cover the sunshine sensor located on the dashboard this is used for regulation of the air conditioning system. F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to keep it in perfect working order. F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly. We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment reduction of allergic symptoms bad odours and greasy deposits. F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record. F If the system does not produce cold air switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability. The condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle which is perfectly normal. If after an extended stop in sunshine the interior temperature is very high first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few moments. Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment. The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer. Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

slide 108:

106 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Manual air conditioning F Turn this knob from blue cold to red hot. Temperature adjustment Air distribution adjustment Windscreen and side windows. Central and side vents. Footwells. F Press this button as many times as necessary to obtain the desired air distribution. 1. Temperature. 2. Air conditioning On / Off. 3. Air distribution. 4. Air flow. 5. Air recirculation. The air conditioning system operates only with the engine running. The air distribution can be adapted by combining the corresponding indicator lamps.

slide 109:

3 Ease of use and comfort 107 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Air flow adjustment Air conditioning On / Off Recirculation of interior air The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons with the windows closed. It enables you to: - lower the temperature in summer - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter above 3°C. F Press this button to activate the function its indicator lamp comes on. F Press the "large fan" or "small fan" button to increase or decrease the air flow. The corresponding indicator lamps come on. Switching on Switching off The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off. To obtain cool air more quickly you can use recirculation of the interior air for a few moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air. If you keep pressing the "small fan" until all of the indicator lamps go off system off the temperature is no longer controlled. However a slight flow of air can still be felt resulting from the forward movement of the vehicle. Avoid the prolonged use of air recirculation - Risk of misting and deterioration of air quality The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the windscreen and side windows. Recirculation of the interior air isolates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and fumes. This function also allows the desired temperature in the passenger compartment to be reached in the shortest time. F Press this button again to deactivate the function its indicator lamp goes off. Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort humidity misting. F Press this button again its indicator lamp goes off. F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on.

slide 110:

108 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Semi-automatic mono-zone air conditioning 1. Automatic visibility programme. 2. Air recirculation. 3. Air flow. 4. Temperature. 5. Air distribution. 6. System Off. 7. Air conditioning On / Off. 8. Maximum air conditioning. The air conditioning system operates only with the engine running. The temperature at the nozzles and vents is regulated by the system according to the temperature in the passenger compartment and the temperature setting. Press the Air conditioning menu button to display the system controls page. Temperature adjustment The setting corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit depending on the unit selected. A setting of around 21 provides optimum comfort. Depending on your requirements a setting between 18 and 24 is normal. F Press one of these buttons to reduce blue or increase red the setting.

slide 111:

3 Ease of use and comfort 109 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Air flow adjustment Avoid driving too long without ventilation - Risk of misting and deterioration of air quality Air distribution adjustment Recirculation of interior air Press one of these buttons to increase + or decrease - the speed of the booster fan. The air flow symbol a fan fills progressively according to the air flow wanted. By reducing the air flow to minimum you are stopping ventilation. Windscreen and side windows. Central and side vents. Footwells. The air distribution can be adapted by using several buttons: illumination of the indicator lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air in the direction indicated the indicator lamp off indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the direction indicated. For a uniform distribution of air in the passenger compartment the three buttons can be activated simultaneously. These buttons are used to arrange the distribution of air in the passenger compartment by combining several air outlets. F Press this button to activate the function its indicator lamp comes on. F Press this button again to deactivate the function its indicator lamp goes off. Avoid the prolonged use of air recirculation - Risk of misting and deterioration of air quality The intake of exterior air prevents the formation of mist on the windscreen and side windows. Recirculation of the interior air isolates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and fumes. This function also allows the desired temperature in the passenger compartment to be reached in the shortest time.

slide 112:

110 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Maximum air conditioning This function allows rapid cooling of the air in the passenger compartment. The system automatically adjusts the temperature setting to the lowest possible air distribution towards the centre and outer vents air flow to maximum and activates recirculation of interior air. F Press this button to activate the function its indicator lamp comes on. Automatic visibility programme For more information on Front demisting - defrosting refer to the corresponding section. Air conditioning On / Off The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons with the windows closed. It enables you to: - lower the temperature in summer - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter above 3°C. Switching on The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off. To obtain cool air more quickly you can use recirculation of interior air for a few moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air. Switching off Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort humidity misting. F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on. F Press this button again its indicator lamp goes off. Switching off the system This action deactivates all functions of the air conditioning system. Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight air flow can still be felt however resulting from the forward movement of the vehicle. F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on and all other indicator lamps of the system go off. Avoid driving for too long with the system switched off - Risk of misting and deterioration of air quality Pressing any button reactivates the system with the settings that were previously in use. F Press this button again to deactivate the function and return to the previous settings its indicator lamp goes off.

slide 113:

3 Ease of use and comfort 111 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 1. Automatic visibility programme. 2. Recirculation of interior air. 3. Temperature adjustment on drivers side. 4. Temperature adjustment on passengers side. 5. Air distribution adjustment. 6. Air flow adjustment. 7. System off. 8. Air conditioning On/Off. 9. Automatic comfort programme on / off. 10. Maximum air conditioning. 11. Access to the secondary page. 12. Selection of settings for the automatic comfort programme. 13. Air Quality System AQS. 14. Mono-zone / Dual-zone. This air conditioning system operates with the engine running but the ventilation and its controls are available with just the ignition on. Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment are automatic. Press the Air conditioning menu button to display the controls for the air conditioning. F Press one of these buttons to increase the value. F Press one of these buttons to decrease the value. It is recommended that you avoid a difference of more than 3 in the settings for left and right. Temperature adjustment The driver and front passenger can each choose their own temperature setting. The value indicated corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a precise temperature.

slide 114:

112 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Automatic comfort programme F Press this button to activate or deactivate the automatic mode of the air conditioning system. When the indicator lamp in the button is on the air conditioning system operates automatically: the system manages the temperature air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment in an optimum way according to the comfort level you have selected. It is possible to modulate the intensity of the automatic comfort programme by choosing one of three settings offered in the secondary page accessible from the "OPTIONS" button. To change the current setting shown by illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp press this button repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed: "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow. "Normal": offers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation default setting. "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. Use the "Normal" or "Fast" setting to assure the comfort of passengers in the rear seats. This setting is associated with automatic mode only. However on deactivation of AUTO mode the indicator for the last setting remains on. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO mode if deactivated. In cold weather with the engine cold the air flow is increased gradually until the system has warmed up in order to limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger compartment. On entering the vehicle if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value setting there is no need to alter the value displayed in order to reach more quickly the required level of comfort. The system compensates automatically and corrects the temperature difference as quickly as possible.

slide 115:

3 Ease of use and comfort 113 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Automatic visibility programme For more information on Front demisting / defrosting refer to the corresponding section. "Air Quality System" AQS function Using a pollution sensor this function automatically activates recirculation of the interior air once it detects a certain level of polluting substances in the exterior air. When the air quality returns to a satisfactory level recirculation of interior air is automatically deactivated. This function is not designed to detect unpleasant odours. The function is automatically activated when the screenwash is used or when in reverse gear. The function does not operate if the ambient temperature is below 5°C to avoid the risk of misting of the windscreen and side windows. To activate or deactivate the function go to the secondary page by pressing the "OPTIONS" button. Windscreen and side windows. Centre and side vents. Footwells. Manual control You can manually adjust one or more settings while retaining automatic control of the other functions: - air flow - air distribution. As soon as you modify a setting the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off. F Press this button again to reactivate the automatic comfort programme. Air fow adjustment F Press one of these buttons to increase or decrease the speed of the booster fan. The air flow symbol a fan is filled in progressively as the speed of the fan is increased. By reducing the air flow to minimum you are stopping ventilation. "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. Avoid driving for too long with the ventilation off - Risk of misting and deterioration of air quality Air distribution adjustment You can modulate the distribution of air in the passenger compartment using these three buttons. Each press on a button activates or deactivates the function. The indicator lamp is on when the button is activated. For a uniform distribution in the passenger compartment all three buttons can be pressed simultaneously. In AUTO mode the indicator lamps in all three buttons are off.

slide 116:

114 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 The air conditioning is designed to operate efficiently in all seasons with the windows closed. It allows you: - in summer to lower the temperature - in winter above 3 °C to improve demisting. Air conditioning On / Off Switching on Switching off Maximum air conditioning F Press this button to activate the function its indicator lamp comes on. F Press this button again to deactivate the function and return to the previous settings its indicator lamp goes off. This function allows faster cooling of the air in the passenger compartment. The system automatically adjusts the temperature setting to the lowest possible air distribution towards the centre and outer vents air flow to maximum and activates recirculation of interior air. Avoid prolonged operation of the air recirculation - Risk of misting and of deterioration of the air quality The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the windscreen and side windows. Recirculation of the interior air Recirculation of interior air prevents exterior odours and smoke from entering the passenger compartment. This function also allows the desired temperature in the passenger compartment to be reached in the shortest time. F Press this button to activate the function its indicator lamp comes on. F Press this button again to deactivate the function its indicator lamp goes off. F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on. The air conditioning cannot operate when the air flow is set to off. F Press this button again its indicator lamp goes off. Switching the air conditioning off may cause some deterioration of the conditions in the passenger compartment humidity misting.

slide 117:

3 Ease of use and comfort 115 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Mono-zone / Dual-zone The passenger temperature setting can be indexed to the drivers setting mono-zone function. It is available in the secondary page by pressing the "OPTIONS" button. F Press this button to activate the "MONO" function its "ON" status is displayed. The function is automatically deactivated if the passenger uses their temperature adjustment buttons dual-zone function. Ventilation with the ignition on With the ignition on you can use the ventilation system controlling the air flow and distribution in the passenger compartment. This function is also available for a few minutes after switching off the ignition depending on the state of charge of the vehicles battery. You can also make use of the residual heat in the engine to warm the passenger compartment using the temperature adjustment buttons. This function does not activate operation of the air conditioning. Switching off the system F Press this button its indicator lamp comes on and all other indicator lamps for the system go off. This action deactivates all functions of the air conditioning system. Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight air flow can still be felt however resulting from the forward movement of the vehicle. Avoid driving for long periods with the system off - Risk of misting and deterioration of air quality Pressing any button reactivates the system with the settings that were previously in use.

slide 118:

116 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Front demist - defrost With semi-automatic and automatic air conditioning With Stop Start when the demisting air conditioning and air flow functions are activated STOP mode is not available. Automatic visibility programme With Stop Start when demisting has been activated the STOP mode is not available. The system automatically manages the air conditioning depending on version air flow and air intake and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows. F To switch it off press this button its indicator lamp goes off. With manual air conditioning F Adjust the temperature to maximum red. F Adjust the air flow to maximum all the indicator lamps come on. F Adjust the air distribution to the "Windscreen" position its associated indicator lamp comes on. F Check that recirculation of interior air is deactivated its indicator lamp must be off. F Switch on the air conditioning by pressing the "A/C" button its indicator lamp comes on. F Press this button to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows as quickly as possible its indicator lamp comes on. The system allows the manual modification of air flow without causing automatic deactivation of the automatic visibility programme.

slide 119:

3 Ease of use and comfort 117 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Heated windscreen Switching on Switching off With the engine running press this button its indicator lamp comes on. Pressing the button again switches off the system its indicator lamp goes off. The system is automatically deactivated every time the engine is switched off. The system is active if the ambient temperature is below 0°C. In cold weather this system heats the bottom of the windscreen as well as the areas alongside the windscreen pillars. Without changing the settings for the air conditioning system it allows faster release of the windscreen wiper blades when they are frozen to the windscreen and avoids the accumulation of snow resulting from the operation of the windscreen wipers.

slide 120:

118 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Rear screen demist - defrost Switching on Switching off F Press this button to demist/ defrost the rear screen and depending on version the door mirrors. The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current. The rear screen demist - defrost can only operate when the engine is running. Switch off the heating of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as you judge it possible as reducing the consumption of electrical current reduces fuel consumption. F It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again. The indicator lamp associated with the button goes off. The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.

slide 121:

3 Ease of use and comfort 119 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Front fttings 1. Grab handle 2. Sun visor 3. Card holder 4. Storage compartment below the steering wheel 5. Illuminated glove box 6. Door pockets 7. Scented air freshener 8. USB port 9. Front 12 V accessory socket 120 W 10. Storage compartment or CD player or Wireless charger 11. Storage compartment 12. Cup holder 13. Front armrest with storage compartment 14. Rear 12 V accessory socket 120 W 15. Storage compartment 16. 230 V socket

slide 122:

120 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Cigarette lighter / 12 V accessory socket F To use the cigarette lighter press it in and wait a few seconds until it pops out automatically. F To connect a 12 V accessory max power: 120 W remove the cigarette lighter and connect a suitable adaptor. Component which protects against sunlight from the front or the side also equipped with an illuminated vanity mirror. F With the ignition on raise the concealing flap the mirror is illuminated automatically. This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket holder. Sun visor Illuminated glove box It can be used for storing a water bottle the vehicles handbook pack... F To open the glove box raise the handle. The glove box is illuminated when the lid is opened. It gives access to the passengers front airbag deactivation switch A. It also gives access to the housing for scented air freshener B cartridges. The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT such as a USB charger may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems causing faults such as poor telephone reception or interference with displays in the screens. You can use this socket to connect a telephone charger a bottle warmer... After use put the cigarette lighter back into place straight away.

slide 123:

3 Ease of use and comfort 121 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 When connected to the USB port the portable device charges automatically. While charging a message is displayed if the power consumption of the portable device exceeds the current delivered by the vehicle. For more information on Audio and telematics and the USB port in particular refer to the corresponding section. The USB port also allows a smartphone to be connected by MirrorLink™ or CarPlay ® so that certain applications on the smartphone can be used in the touch screen. USB port The USB port allows the connection of a portable device such as a digital audio player of the iPod ® type or a USB memory stick. The USB player reads your audio files which are transmitted to your audio system and played via the vehicles speakers. The management of these files is from the steering mounted controls or the audio system.

slide 124:

122 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Wireless charger Operation The charger works with the engine running and in STOP mode of Stop Start. Charging is managed by the smartphone. This system allows the wireless charging of a portable device such as a smartphone using the principle of magnetic induction based on the Qi 1.1 standard. The portable device to be charged must be compatible with the Qi standard either by design or by using a compatible holder or shell. The charging zone is identified by the Qi symbol. For versions with Keyless Entry and Starting operation of the charger may be interrupted when opening a door or switching off the ignition. FOCAL ® premium Hi-Fi system Your vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity acoustic system designed by the French brand FOCAL ® a specialist in acoustics for more than 35 years and recognised throughout the world for its patented innovations and its unique audio signature. 10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL ® technologies offer the pleasure of pure and detailed sound inside the vehicle: - High fidelity woofer / mid-range speakers: Polyglass technology delivering balance and precise sound. - TNF tweeters: Inverted dome aluminium technology giving optimum sound dispersion and very detailed treble. - Sub-woofer: 200 mm triple coil Power Flower™ technology for defined and dynamic reproduction of low frequencies. - 12-way active amplification - 515 Watts: Hybrid Class AB / Class D technology providing breadth and finesse in the high frequency signals as well as real power in the bass.

slide 125:

3 Ease of use and comfort 123 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Charging F First ensure that the charging zone is clear of other articles. F Place a portable device in the middle of the charging zone. F Once the portable device is detected the charge indicator lamp comes on in green. If the indicator lamp is on in orange: Do not leave metal objects coins keys the vehicles remote control... in the charging zone while a portable device is charging - Risk of overheating or interruption of the charge - remove the portable device then return it to the middle of the charging zone. or - remove the portable device and try again in a quarter of an hour. If the problem persists have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F Charging of the portable devices battery then starts. F Once the portable devices battery is fully charged the charge indicator lamp goes off. Checking operation The state of the charge indicator lamp allows the operation of the charger to be monitored. The system only supports charging one portable device at a time. Charge indicator lamp Significance Off Engine switched off. No compatible portable device detected. Charging finished. On green Compatible portable device detected. Charging... Flashing orange Foreign object detected in the charging zone. Portable device not well centred in the charging zone. On orange Fault with the portable devices battery meter. Temperature of the portable devices battery too high. Charger fault.

slide 126:

124 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Front armrest Comfort arrangement for the driver and front passenger. It includes a cooled storage space. Opening F Raise the latch below the lid. The lid opens in two sections. Storage The small movable flat top can be fitted at the front or at the rear of the storage space. A ventilation outlet delivers cooled air. Closing F Fold both parts of the lid.

slide 127:

3 Ease of use and comfort 125 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 A complete air freshener system for the passenger compartment. It is supplied by a three-fragrance cartridge. This system operates only with the engine running. Scented air freshener Activation / Settings Activation and adjustment of settings is done in the touch screen: - either directly in the Applications menu - or by personalising an ambience for the i-Cockpit Amplify function. In the Applications menu: The scented air freshener is also managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify function. Changing the cartridge Access to the cartridge is in the glove box. F select "Scented air freshener" F select a fragrance from the three offered F select a delivery intensity to activate the system or F select "OFF" to deactivate it. Modifications are taken into account immediately. For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section. F With the ignition on pull the tongue to release the empty cartridge. F Remove the empty cartridge from its housing. The air freshener stops working with the cartridge removed.

slide 128:

126 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Recommendations Do not discard the original cartridge which serves as a blanking plug if the air freshener is not used. Retain the cartridge sealing caps which serve as packaging if the cartridge is not used. Replacement cartridges are available from PEUGEOT dealers or from the brands internet website. As a safety measure: - use only the cartridges designed for the system - do not try to fit or remove a cartridge when driving - do not try to refill or dismantle the cartridges. Keep cartridges out of the reach of children or pets. Avoid contact between the fluid in the cartridge and the skin or eyes. In the event of ingestion of the fluid in the cartridge consult a doctor showing them the product packaging or label. F Remove the two seals from the new cartridge. F Insert the new cartridge into its housing observing the direction of fitment. The air freshener is ready to operate again.

slide 129:

3 Ease of use and comfort 127 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Mats When fitting the mat for the first time on the drivers side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached. The other mats are simply placed on the carpet. Removal Refitting To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to the fixings already present in the vehicle these fixings must be used - never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter. The mats approved by PEUGEOT have two fixings located below the seat. Fitting To remove the mat on the drivers side: F move the seat as far back as possible F unclip the fixings F remove the mat. To refit the mat on the drivers side: F position the mat correctly F refit the fixings by pressing F check that the mat is secured correctly.

slide 130:

128 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 1. Front courtesy lamp 2. Front map reading lamps Courtesy lamps Front and rear courtesy lamps Front and rear map reading lamps It switches off gradually: - when the vehicle is locked - when the ignition is switched on - 30 seconds after the last door is closed. In permanent lighting mode the lighting time varies according to the circumstances: - with the ignition off approximately ten minutes - in energy economy mode approximately thirty seconds - with the engine running unlimited. Take care not to put anything in contact with the courtesy lamps. 3. Rear courtesy lamp 4. Rear map reading lamps When the courtesy lamp is in the "permanent lighting" position the rear courtesy lamp also comes on except if it is in the "permanently off" position. To switch off the rear courtesy lamp put it in the "permanently off" position. In this position the courtesy lamp comes on gradually: - when the vehicle is unlocked - when the key is removed from the ignition - on opening a door - when the remote control locking button is used to locate your vehicle. Permanently off. Permanent lighting. F With the ignition on press the corresponding switch.

slide 131:

3 Ease of use and comfort 129 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Interior mood lighting The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor. The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off. At night the interior mood lighting comes on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on. The interior mood lighting can be activated or deactivated and its brightness adjusted in the Driving menu of the touch screen. The interior mood lighting is also managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify function. Depending on version the interior mood lighting includes: - two LEDs located in the front courtesy lamp - a light source in the storage compartment at the front of the centre console - a light source for each of the front footwells - light guides on the front door panels and the sides of the centre console - illuminated bezels for the front cup holders - a light source for each of the front door pockets - illuminated rails for the panoramic sunroof blind. For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section.

slide 132:

130 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Rear seats Rear head restraints Bench seat with a fixed cushion and split folding backrests 2/3-1/3 to adapt the boot load space. They have two positions: - a high position for when the seat is in use: F pull the head restraint fully up. - a low position for stowing when the seat is not in use: F press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it fully down. The rear head restraints can be removed. Never drive with passengers seated at the rear when the head restraints are removed they must be in place and in the high position. The head restraint for the centre seat and those for outer seats are not interchangeable. To remove a head restraint: F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go F press the lug A to release the head restraint and remove it completely F stow the head restraint. To refit a head restraint: F introduce the rods of the head restraint into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest F push the head restraint down as far as it will go F press the lug A and then push the head restraint fully down.

slide 133:

3 Ease of use and comfort 131 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 The folding of the backrest is accompanied by a slight lowering of the corresponding cushion. To obtain a flat surface it is necessary to place the adjustable boot floor in the high position. When the backrest is released the red indicator is visible in the release grip. Folding from the passenger compartment F Press the backrest release grip 1. F Guide the backrest 3 down to the horizontal position. Folding the backrests Each section of the backrest has two release controls: - a grip 1 on the outer edge of the backrest - a lever 2 on the boot side trim. First: F lower the head restraints F if necessary move the front seats forward F fold away the rear armrest F check that nothing or no person might interfere with the folding of the backrests clothing luggage ... F check that the outer seat belts are lying correctly on the backrests. Folding or unfolding the seat backrests must only be done with the vehicle stationary.

slide 134:

132 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Returning the backrests to their original position Folding from the boot F Pull the backrest release lever 2 towards you. The backrest 3 folds fully onto the cushion. First check that the outer seat belts are lying vertically alongside the backrest latching rings. F Put the backrest 3 in the upright position and push on it to latch it home. F Check that the red indicator is no longer visible in the release grip 1. F Ensure that the outer seat belts are not trapped during the manoeuvre. Caution a backrest that has not latched correctly compromises the safety of passengers in the event of sudden braking or an accident. The contents of the boot may be thrown forward - Risk of serious injury

slide 135:

3 Ease of use and comfort 133 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Rear fttings A 230 V / 50 Hz socket maximum power: 150 W is located on the back of the centre console under a protective cover. This socket works with the engine running as well as in STOP mode with Stop Start. F Raise the protective cover. F Check that the green indicator lamp is on. F Connect your multimedia or other electrical device telephone charger laptop computer CD-DVD player baby food warmer.... 230 V / 50 Hz power socket In the event of a fault with the socket the green warning lamp flashes. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Connect only one device at a time to the socket no extension or multi-way connector. Connect only devices with class II insulation shown on the device. Do not use a device with a metal case electric shaver .... As a safety measure when electrical consumption is high and when required by the vehicles electrical system particular weather conditions electrical overload... the current supply to the socket will be cut off the green indicator lamp goes off. F To connect a 12 V accessory max power: 120 W lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor. 12 V accessory socket The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT such as a USB charger may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems causing faults such as poor telephone reception or interference with displays in the screens.

slide 136:

134 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Rear armrest F Lower the rear armrest for a more comfortable position. The armrest incorporates two cup holders. Ski flap Opening F Lower the rear armrest. F Pull the flap handle downwards. F Lower the flap. F Load the objects from inside the boot. Comfort and storage arrangement for rear passengers. Arrangement for storing and transporting long objects.

slide 137:

3 Ease of use and comfort 135 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Boot fttings 1. Load space cover 2. 12 V accessory socket 120 W 3. Boot lamp 4. Rear seat folding controls 5. Hooks 6. Stowing rings 7. Adjustable boot floor 2 positions 8. Storage well / Tool box under the floor The stowing rings are designed for securing luggage by attaching a retaining net to the rings. Such nets are available as an option or as an accessory. For more information contact a PEUGEOT dealer. For the installation of a high load retaining net refer to the corresponding section.

slide 138:

136 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Luggage cover It is in two parts: - a fixed part with an open storage space - a mobile part which rises as the tailgate opens with an open storage space. To remove the luggage cover: F unhook the two cords F raise the moving part slightly then unclip it on each side F unclip the fixed part on each side then remove the luggage cover. The luggage cover can be stowed under the boot floor. Under sudden deceleration objects placed on the luggage cover may be turned into projectiles. 12 V accessory socket F To connect a 12 V accessory max power: 120 W remove the cap and connect an appropriate adaptor. F Switch on the ignition. The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT such as a USB charger may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems causing faults such as poor telephone reception or interference with displays in the screens.

slide 139:

3 Ease of use and comfort 137 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 High load retaining net This removable net allows the use of the entire loading volume up to the roof: - behind the front seats row 1 when the rear seats are folded - behind the rear seats row 2 when the luggage cover is removed. It provides protection for the occupants of the vehicle in the event of sudden braking. Behind the front seats F Fold the rear seats. F Remove the cover trims located on each side of the roof. F Position the nets upper hooks in the roof on each side in turn. F Attach the net straps to the lower anchorages located on the front seat outer runners. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. Behind the rear seats F Remove the luggage cover. F Remove the cover trims on each side located high up in the roof. F Position the nets upper hooks in the roof on each side in turn F Attach the net straps to the lower rings located on each of the boot side trims. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. Once fitted the net does not prevent folding of the rear seat backrests.

slide 140:

138 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Adjustable boot floor This two-position floor allows you to optimise the volume of the boot by means of the outer stops placed on the sides: - High position 100 kg max: you obtain a flat floor up to the front seats when the rear seats are folded. - Low position 150 kg max: maximum boot volume. To change the height of the floor: F Push the floor fully forwards then use the side stops to move the floor to the desired position. To support the floor in the raised position: F From the high position raise the floor towards the load space cover. F Take it past the retractable stops then rest the floor on these stops. On certain versions the adjustable boot floor cannot be fitted in the low position.

slide 141:

3 Ease of use and comfort 139 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Sliding boot floor F From the high position press the handle and pull the boot floor towards you as far as it will go. This position facilitates loading and unloading of the boot. Maximum load: 100 kg. Storage well F Raise the boot floor fully for access to the storage well. Depending on version this houses: - a temporary puncture repair kit with the vehicles tools - a spare wheel with the vehicles tools. It also allows storage of the luggage cover.

slide 142:

140 Ease of use and comfort 3008-2_en_Chap03_ergonomie-et-confort_ed01-2016 Boot lamp This comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes off automatically when the boot is closed. The lighting time varies according to the circumstances: - when the ignition is off approximately ten minutes - in energy economy mode approximately thirty seconds - when the engine is running no limit.

slide 143:

4 Lighting and visibility 141 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Without AUTO lighting With AUTO lighting F Turn the ring A to place the desired symbol against the mark. Exterior lighting control stalk Lighting off ignition off / Daytime running lamps engine running. Automatic illumination of headlamps. Daytime running lamps / Dipped beam / Main beam. Sidelamps only. Dipped or main beam headlamps. Displays Selection of main lighting mode Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on. Headlamp dipping F Pull the stalk B toward you to switch between dipped and main beam headlamps. In the lighting off and sidelamps modes the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily "headlamp flash" by maintaining a pull on the stalk. Main lighting "Highway" function On versions fitted with "Full LED" technology headlamps the range of the dipped beam headlamps is automatically increased once the speed of the vehicle is above 68 mph 110 km/h. A fault with a lamp is signalled by the permanent illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal.

slide 144:

Lighting and visibility 142 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 In good or rainy weather by both day and night use of the front and rear foglamps is prohibited. In these situations the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or falling snow. In these weather conditions you should switch on the foglamps and dipped beam headlamps manually as the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when they are no longer necessary. Foglamps Rear foglamps The sidelamps or dipped or main beam headlamps must be on. Front and rear foglamps The main or dipped beam headlamps must be on. Rotate and release ring C: F forward to switch on the rear foglamps. F backward to switch them off. Rotate and release ring C: F forward a first time to switch on the front foglamps F forward a second time to switch on the rear foglamps F backward a first time to switch off the rear foglamps F backward a second time to switch off the front foglamps.

slide 145:

4 Lighting and visibility 143 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Switching on the lighting after switching off the ignition To reactivate the lighting control stalk turn the ring A to position "0" - lighting off then to the position of your choice. When the drivers door is opened a temporary audible signal warns you that the vehicles lighting is on. They switch off automatically after a period which depends on the state of charge of the battery entry to energy economy mode. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps The light-emitting diodes LEDs in these lamps front and rear come on automatically when the engine is started. They provide the following functions: - Daytime running lamps lighting control stalk at position "0" or "AUTO" with adequate light level. - Sidelamps lighting control stalk at position "AUTO" with a low ambient light level or "Sidelamps only" or "Main or dipped beam headlamps". In some weather conditions e.g. low temperature or humidity the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes. Travelling abroad If using your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road the headlamps must be adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming drivers. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Switching off the lighting when switching off the ignition When the ignition is switched off all of the lamps switch off immediately except for the dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide- me-home lighting is activated.

slide 146:

Lighting and visibility 144 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Direction indicators F Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance. F Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance. Three fashes of the direction indicators F Press briefly upwards or downwards without going beyond the point of resistance the direction indicators will flash 3 times. If you forget to cancel the direction indicators for more than twenty seconds the volume of the audible signal will increase if the speed is above 40 mph 60 km/h. On versions fitted with LED direction indicators the line of LEDs is illuminated sequentially. The brightness of the daytime runnning lamps is reduced during sequential operation of the direction indicators. Parking lamps Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of the sidelamps on the traffic side only. F Depending on version within one minute of switching off the ignition operate the lighting control stalk up or down depending on the traffic side for example: when parking on the left lighting control stalk upwards the right hand sidelamps are on. This is confirmed by an audible signal and illumination of the corresponding direction indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel. To switch off the parking lamps return the lighting control stalk to the central position.

slide 147:

4 Lighting and visibility 145 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Headlamp beam height adjustment Automatic adjustment of "Full LED" technology headlamps This system automatically adjusts the height of the beams from this type of headlamp according to the load in the vehicle to avoid causing a nuisance to other road users. Do not touch the "Full LED" technology headlamps. Risk of electrocution Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The initial setting is position "0". Manual adjustment of halogen headlamps To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users the beams of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. 0 Driver or driver + front passenger. - Driver + front passenger + rear passengers. 1 5 people. - 5 people + a load in the boot. 2 Driver + a load in the boot. If a fault occurs this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The system then places the headlamp beams in the lowest position.

slide 148:

Lighting and visibility 146 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Automatic guide-me-home lighting With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps" function activated under low ambient light the sidelamps dipped beam headlamps and door mirror spotlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off. Activation deactivation and the duration of the guide-me-home lighting are set in the vehicle parameters menu in the screen. Automatic illumination of headlamps When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor the number plate lamps sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off the lamps are switched off automatically. Activation F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. Activation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message. Operating fault In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor the lighting comes on this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Do not cover the sunshine sensor coupled with the rain sensor and located at the top centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror the associated functions would no longer be controlled. Deactivation F Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message. In fog or snow the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case the lighting will not come on automatically.

slide 149:

4 Lighting and visibility 147 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Manual guide-me-home lighting The temporary illumination of the dipped beam headlamps after the vehicles ignition has been switched off makes the drivers exit easier when the light is poor. Switching on F With the ignition off "flash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk. F A further "headlamp flash" switches the function off. Switching off For versions without "Automatic illumination of headlamps" the manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after 30 seconds. For versions with "Automatic illumination of headlamps" the period of operation of the manual guide-me-home lighting is the same as that set for the automatic guide-me-home lighting. Automatic exterior welcome lighting With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps" function activated under low ambient light the sidelamps dipped beam headlamps and door mirror spotlamps come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked. Activation deactivation and the duration of the exterior welcome lighting are set in the vehicle parameters menu in the screen.

slide 150:

Lighting and visibility 148 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Door mirror spotlamps Switching on Whatever the position of the front courtesy lamp switch they also come on with the exterior welcome lighting and the guide-me- home lighting. - when you unlock the vehicle - when you open a door - when you use the remote control to locate the vehicle. When the front courtesy lamp switch is in this position the spotlamps come on automatically: To make your approach to the vehicle easier these illuminate: - the zones facing the driver’s and passenger’s doors - the zones forward of the door mirrors and rearward of the front doors. Remote operation of exterior lighting Availability of this function depends on version. F Make a short press on this remote control button. Pressing again before the end of the timed period switches off the lighting immediately. The sidelamps dipped beam headlamps number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30 seconds. Switching off They go off automatically after 30 seconds.

slide 151:

4 Lighting and visibility 149 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Automatic headlamp dipping This system is a driving aid. The driver remains responsible for the vehicles lighting its correct use for the prevailing conditions of light visibility traffic and observation of driving and vehicle regulations. The system will be operational as soon as you have exceeded 15 mph 25 km/h. If the speed drops below 9 mph 15 km/h the system no longer operates. System which automatically changes between dipped and main beam according to the ambient light level and the driving conditions using a camera located at the top of the windscreen.

slide 152:

Lighting and visibility 150 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Activation F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the "AUTO" position. Operation Once the function is activated the system operates as follows: If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of the main beam headlamps: Pause If the situation requires a change of headlamp beam the driver can take over at any time. F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function and the system changes to "automatic illumination of headlamps" mode: - if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator lamps are on the system changes to main beam - if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator lamps are on the system changes to dipped beam. To reactivate the system flash the headlamps again. - dipped beam is maintained this indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel. If the ambient light level is very low and the traffic conditions permit: - main beam comes on automatically: this indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel. Deactivation The system may suffer interference or not work correctly: - under conditions of poor visibility falling snow heavy rain or thick fog ... - if the windscreen is dirty misted or obscured by a sticker ... in front of the camera - if the vehicle is facing highly reflective signs. The system is not able to detect: - road users that do not have their own lighting such as pedestrians - vehicles whose lighting is obscured for example: vehicles running behind a safety barrier on a motorway - vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep slope on twisty roads on crossroads. F In the Driving menu select "Driving assistance" then "Automatic headlamp dip". F In the Driving menu select the "Driving assistance" tab then "Automatic headlamp dip" the system changes to "automatic illumination headlamps" mode. The state of the system stays in memory when the ignition is switched off.

slide 153:

4 Lighting and visibility 151 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Cornering lighting Present on vehicles fitted with "Full LED" technology headlamps this system makes use of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend when the main or dipped beam headlamps are on and the vehicle speed is below 25 mph approximately 40 km/h urban driving winding road junctions parking manoeuvres.... With cornering lighting Activation / Deactivation Switching on This system starts: - when the corresponding direction indicator is switched on or - from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel. Switching off The system does not operate: - below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel - above 25 mph 40 km/h - when reverse gear is engaged. Without cornering lighting The cornering lighting can be activated or deactivated in the Driving menu of the touch screen.

slide 154:

Lighting and visibility 152 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Programming Your vehicle may also include some functions that can be configured: - automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers - rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. In wintry conditions remove snow ice or frost present on the windscreen around the wiper arms and blades and the windscreen seal before operating the wipers. Without AUTO wiping With AUTO wiping Windscreen wiper A. Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position. Fast wiping heavy rain. Normal wiping moderate rain. Intermittent wiping proportional to the speed of the vehicle. Park. Single wipe press downwards or pull the stalk briefly towards you then release. Automatic wiping press down then release. or Wiper control stalk Single wipe pull the stalk briefly towards you. Do not operate the wipers on a dry windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold conditions ensure that the wiper blades are not stuck to the windscreen before operating the wipers.

slide 155:

4 Lighting and visibility 153 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 B. Rear wiper selection ring: turn the ring to place the desired symbol against the marking. Rear wiper Park. Intermittent wipe. Wash-wipe. F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. The screenwash and then the wiper operate for a fixed time. The screenwash includes a wiper blade system with integral washer jets called "Magic Wash". The screenwash fluid is sprayed from all along the length of the wiper blade this improves visibility and reduces the consumption of screenwash fluid. Windscreen wash Reverse gear When reverse gear is engaged the rear wiper will come into operation automatically if the windscreen wipers are operating. The function is activated or deactivated via the vehicle settings menu in the screen. In the event of snow or hard frost deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the vehicle settings menu in the screen. Turn the ring fully the rear screen wash then the rear wiper automatically operate for a set duration. This function is activated by default.

slide 156:

Lighting and visibility 154 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Special position of the windscreen wipers This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades. It is used for cleaning or replacement of the wiper blades. It can also be useful in winter to release the wiper blades from the windscreen. F Any action on the wiper stalk within one minute after switching off the ignition places the wiper blades vertically on the screen. F To park the wiper blades again switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk. To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper blades it is advisable to: - handle them with care - clean them regularly using soapy water - avoid using them to retain cardboard on the windscreen - replace them at the first signs of wear. Screenwash fuid low level When the low fluid level is reached in the reservoir this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The warning lamp come son when the ignition is switched on or every time the stalk is operated until the reservoir is refilled. Next time you stop refill the screenwash fluid reservoir. To avoid damaging the wiper blades or the pump do not operate the screenwash if the screenwash reservoir is empty. Only operate the screenwash if there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen and hindering visibility. Always use screenwash fluid suitable for low temperatures during the winter period.

slide 157:

4 Lighting and visibility 155 3008-2_en_Chap04_eclairage-et-visibilite_ed01-2016 Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers Switching on F Briefly push the control stalk down. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted. Switching off F Briefly push the control stalk down again or place the control stalk in another position Int 1 or 2. The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards if the ignition has been off for more than one minute. This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by a message. This warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel accompanied by a message. The windscreen wipers operate automatically adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall without any action on the part of the driver. Detection of rainfall is by means of a sensor at the top centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror. Operating fault If a fault occurs with the automatic rain sensitive wipers the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have them checked by PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Do not cover the rain sensor linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the top centre of the windscreen. Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash. In winter it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

slide 158:

Safety 156 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 General safety recommendations Labels are applied at various points on your vehicle. They carry safety warnings as well as vehicle identification information. Do not remove them: they form an integral part of your vehicle. For any work on your vehicle use a qualified workshop that has the technical information skills and equipment required all of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. We draw your attention to the following points: - The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not listed by PEUGEOT may cause excessive current consumption and faults and failures with the electrical system of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer for information on the range of recommended accessories. - As a safety measure access to the diagnostic socket used for the vehicles electronic systems is reserved strictly for PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops equipped with the special tools required risk of malfunctions of the vehicles electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or serious accidents. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is not followed. - Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by Automobiles PEUGEOT or carried out without meeting the technical requirements defined by the manufacturer would lead to the suspension of the legal and contractual warranties. Installation of accessory radio communication transmitters Before installing a radio communication transmitter you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted frequency maximum power aerial position specific installation requirements in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/104/EC. Depending on the legislation in force in the country certain safety equipment may be compulsory: high visibility safety vests warning triangles breathalysers spare bulbs spare fuses fire extinguisher first aid kit mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle...

slide 159:

5 Safety 157 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Hazard warning lamps Visual warning with all of the direction indicators flashing to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown towing or accident. F Press this button all of the direction indicators flash. They can operate with the ignition off. Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps When braking in an emergency depending on the force of deceleration the hazard warning lamps come on automatically. They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate. It is also possible to switch them off by pressing the switch on the dashboard. Horn Audible warning to alert other road users to an imminent danger. F Press the central part of the multifunction steering wheel.

slide 160:

Safety 158 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Emergency or assistance call If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit and independently of the deployment of any airbags an emergency call is made automatically. PEUGEOT Connect SOS In an emergency press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call centre. Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green LED goes off. The green LED remains on without flashing when communication is established. It goes off at the end of the call. "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates your vehicle starts communication with you in your language and where necessary sends the appropriate public emergency services. In countries where the service is not available or when the locating service has been expressly declined the call is sent directly to the emergency services 112 without the vehicle location. Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk. Subject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. If you benefit from the PEUGEOT Connect Packs offer with the SOS and assistance pack included there are additional services available to you in your MyPEUGEOT personal space via the Internet website for your country.

slide 161:

5 Safety 159 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 PEUGEOT Connect Assistance If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and if desired modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice. For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT CONNECT services" services to customers the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicles on-board telematic system. A fault with the system does not prevent the vehicle being driven. Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confirms that the call has been made. Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message. The red indicator lamp is on continuously: replace the back-up battery. The red indicator lamp flashes: replace the back-up battery. Operation of the system For all countries except Russia Belarus and Kazakhstan. For Russia Belarus and Kazakhstan. When the ignition is switched on the green LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly. The red indicator lamp flashes then goes off: there is a system fault. The red indicator lamp is on continuously: there is a system fault. Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk. Geo-location You can deactivate geo-location by simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm. To reactivate geo-location simultaneously press the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons again followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm. In either case the emergency and assistance calls may not function. Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible.

slide 162:

Safety 160 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Electronic stability programme ESC Definitions Anti-lock braking system ABS and electronic brake force distribution EBFD These systems improve the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and contribute towards improved control in corners in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking. The electronic brake force distribution system manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel. Emergency braking assistance In an emergency this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking. Anti-slip regulation ASR This system also known as Traction Control optimises traction in order to avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration. Dynamic stability control DSC If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver this system monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path within the limits of the laws of physics. A set of the following Electronic Stability systems: - anti-lock braking system ABS and electronic brake force distribution EBFD - emergency braking assistance - wheel anti-slip regulation ASR or traction control - dynamic stability control DSC. - trailer stability assist TSA. Trailer stability assist TSA This system allows control of the vehicle to be retained when towing a trailer so as to avoid the risk of snaking. It is available on vehicles with factory-fitted trailer wiring preparation for towbar option or the towbar with quickly-detachable towball pack.

slide 163:

5 Safety 161 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Anti-lock braking system ABS and electronic brake force distribution EBFD The fixed illumination of this warning lamp signals that there is a fault with the ABS. Illumination of this warning lamp coupled with the STOP and ABS warning lamps accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal signals that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution EBFD. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When changing wheels tyres and rims ensure that these are approved for your vehicle. In emergency braking press very firmly and maintain this pressure. Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal. Intelligent traction control system Depending on version your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: intelligent traction control. This system detects situations of difficult surface grip that could make it difficult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow. In these situations the intelligent traction control limits the amount of wheel spin to provide the best traction and trajectory control for your vehicle. The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at moderate speed. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

slide 164:

Safety 162 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Anti-slip regulation ASR / Dynamic stability control DSC Operation These systems are activated automatically every time the vehicle is started. They come into operation in the event of a problem of grip or trajectory. Deactivation In exceptional conditions starting a vehicle which is bogged down stuck in snow on soft ground... it may be advisable to deactivate the ASR system so that the wheels can turn freely and regain grip. Reactivate the system as soon as the level of grip permits. Deactivation is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. Reactivation The ASR system is reactivated automatically every time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph 50 km/h. Below 30 mph 50 km/h you can reactivate it manually: Operating fault This is indicated by flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel. Illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal indicates a fault with the system. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the systems checked. It is confirmed by the display of a message. The ASR system no longer acts on the operation of the engine or the brakes in the event of an involuntary change of trajectory. ASR / DSC These systems offer increased safety in normal driving but they should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed. It is in conditions of reduced grip rain snow black ice that the risk of loss of grip increases. It is therefore important for your safety to keep these systems activated in all conditions and particularly in difficult conditions. The correct operation of these systems depends on observation of the manufacturers recommendations regarding as much the wheels tyres and rims braking and electronic components as the assembly and repair procedures used by PEUGEOT dealers. To benefit in full from the effectiveness of these systems in wintry conditions the vehicle must be fitted with four snow tyres allowing the vehicle to retain neutral behaviour on the road. After an impact have these systems checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Reactivation is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. It is confirmed by the display of a message.

slide 165:

5 Safety 163 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Trailer stability assist Operation The system is activated automatically when the ignition is switched on. The electronic stability programme ESC must not have any faults. Between 36 and 100 mph 60 and 160 km/h if the system detect oscillations snaking in the movement of the trailer it acts on the brakes to stabilise the trailer and if necessary reduces engine power to slow down the vehicle. For information on the weights and towed loads refer to the "Technical data" section or the registration certificate for your vehicle. For advice on driving safely when Towing a trailer refer to the corresponding section. When towing this system reduces the risk of the vehicle or trailer snaking. It is available on vehicles with factory-fitted trailer wiring preparation for towbar option or the towbar with quickly-detachable towball pack. The correction is signalled by the flashing of this indicator lamp in the instrument panel and illumination of the brake lamps. Operating fault Should a fault occur with the system this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. If you continue to tow a trailer reduce your speed and drive carefully Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The trailer stability assist system offers increased safety in normal driving provided that the recommendations on towing a trailer are observed. It should not encourage the driver to take risks such as towing a trailer in adverse operating conditions overloading failure to observe the trailer nose weight worn or under-inflated tyres faulty braking system …. or drive at too high a speed. In certain certain cases oscillation of the trailer may not be detected by the ESC system particularly with a light trailer. When driving on slippery or poor surfaces the system may not be able to prevent sudden snaking of the trailer.

slide 166:

Safety 164 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Advanced Grip Control Standard ESC F Place the knob in this position. Snow Special patented traction control system which improves traction on snow mud and sand. This system the operation of which has been optimised for each situation allows you to manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip encountered during touring use. This mode is calibrated for a low level of wheel spin based on the different levels of grip normally encountered on the road. This mode adapts its strategy to the conditions of grip encountered for each of the two front wheels on moving off. mode active up to 30 mph 50 km/h F Place the knob in this position. The accelerator pedal should be pressed sufficiently to allow the system to use the power of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds is completely normal. Every time the ignition is switched off the system automatically resets to this mode. A five-position selector knob allows you to choose the setting best suited to the driving conditions encountered. An indicator lamp associated with each mode comes on accompanied by the display of a message to confirm your choice. Associated with all-season M+S Mud and Snow tyres this system offers a compromise between safety adhesion and traction. Operating modes

slide 167:

5 Safety 165 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 All terrain mud damp grass ... This mode when moving off allows considerable spin on the wheel with the least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to regain grip. At the same time the wheel with the most grip is controlled in such a way as to transmit as much torque as possible. When moving the system optimises wheel spin to respond to the drivers requirements as fully as possible. mode active up to 50 mph 80 km/h F Place the knob in this position. Sand This mode allows little spin on the two driving wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck in the sand. mode active up to 75 mph 120 km/h F Place the knob in this position. You can deactivate certain ESC systems ASR and DSC by turning the knob to the "OFF" position. Driving advice Your vehicle is designed principally to drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to drive on other less passable terrain occasionally. However it does not permit off-road driving such as: - crossing and driving on terrain which could damage the underbody or strip away components fuel pipe fuel cooler... due to obstacles or stones in particular - driving on terrain with steep gradients and poor grip - crossing a stream. Do not use the other modes on sand as the vehicle may become stuck. These systems are reactivated automatically from 30 mph 50 km/h or every time the ignition is switched on.

slide 168:

Safety 166 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Hill Assist Descent Control System that provides assistance when descending on loose or soft surfaces gravel mud... or a steep gradient. This system reduces the risk of slip or loss of control of the vehicle when descending whether going forward or in reverse. During a descent it assists the driver in maintaining a constant speed depending on the gear engaged while progressively releasing the brakes. Operation By default the system is not selected. The state of the system does not stay in memory when the ignition is switched off. The driver can select the system with the engine running and the vehicle stationary or at speeds of up to about 30 mph 50 km/h. F Once the vehicle starts its descent you can release the accelerator and brake pedals speed is regulated by the system: - if the gearbox is in first or second gear speed is reduced and the indicator flashes rapidly - if the gearbox is in neutral or if the clutch pedal is depressed speed is reduced and the indicator flashes slowly in this case the speed maintained during the descent is lower. Switching on F With the speed below 30 mph 50 km/h press this button until its indicator lamp comes on to select the system this indicator appears in grey in the instrument panel. F With the speed below 18 mph 30 km/h the system becomes active this indicator comes on in green in the instrument panel. If you release the accelerator and brake pedals while the vehicle is stationary on a gradient the system will release the brakes for progressive movement of the vehicle. The brake lamps come on automatically when the system is regulating the speed of the vehicle.

slide 169:

5 Safety 167 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 For the system to operate the slope must be steeper than 5. The system can be used with the gearbox in neutral. Otherwise engage a gear appropriate for the speed of the vehicle to avoid the engine stalling. With an automatic gearbox the system can be used with the selector at N D or R. If the speed of the vehicle exceeds 18 mph 30 km/h regulation is automatically paused and the indicator in the instrument panel changes back to grey but the indicator lamp in the button still stays on. Regulation resumes automatically as soon as the speed of the vehicle drops below 18 mph 30 km/h provided that the conditions of gradient and release of the pedals are met. You can press the accelerator or brake pedal at any time. Operating fault If a fault occurs with the system this warning lamp comes on accompanied by the display of a message in the instrument panel. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Switching off F Press this button until its indicator lamp goes off the indicator goes off in the instrument panel. Above 43 mph 70 km/h the system is automatically deactivated the indicator lamp in the button goes off. The system is not available: - if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph 70 km/h - if the speed of the vehicle is being controlled by the Dynamic cruise control with Stop function depending on the type of gearbox. When the system is regulating the Active Safety Brake system is automatically deactivated.

slide 170:

Safety 168 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 F To adjust the anchorage point squeeze the control A and slide it to one of the notches. Height adjustment Seat belts Front seat belts The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant so improving their protection. Fastening Unfastening F Press the red button on the buckle. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle. F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

slide 171:

5 Safety 169 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Rear seat belts The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point inertia reel seat belt. The outer rear seats are fitted with pyrotechnic pretensioners and force limiters. Front seat belts not fastened / unfastened warning lamp When the ignition is switched on this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt and passengers front airbag warning lamps display if the driver and/or the front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. 1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened / unfastened warning lamp. 2. Front left seat belt warning lamp. 3. Front right seat belt warning lamp. 4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp. 5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. 6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp. Seat belts not fastened / unfastened warning lamps display The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 comes on in red on the seat belt and passengers front airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened. From approximately 12 mph 20 km/h this warning lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed this warning lamp remains on until the driver and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.

slide 172:

Safety 170 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Fastening F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle. F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap. Unfastening F Press the red button on the buckle. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. This warning lamp comes on in the seat belt and passengers front airbag warning lamps display when one or more rear passengers unfasten their seat belt. Seat belt unfastened warning lamp Seat belt unfastened warning lamps display When the ignition is switched on with the engine running or when the vehicle is moving at less than 12 mph 20 km/h the corresponding warning lamps 4 5 and 6 come on in red for approximately 30 seconds if the seat belt is not fastened. When the vehicle is moving at more than 12 mph 20 km/h the corresponding warning lamp 4 5 or 6 comes on in red accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message if a rear passenger has unfastened their seat belt. From approximately 12 mph 20 km/h this warning lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once the two minutes have elapsed this warning lamp remains on until one or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.

slide 173:

5 Safety 171 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all fastened before setting off. Wherever you are seated in the vehicle always fasten your seat belt even for short journeys. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfill their role fully. The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use. Before and after use ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly. The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. Recommendations for children Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person. Never allow a child to travel on your lap. For more information on Child seats refer to the corresponding section. In the event of an impact Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. In all cases the airbag warning lamp comes on. Following an impact have the seat belts system checked and if necessary replaced by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Advice In order to be effective a seat belt must: - be tightened as close to the body as possible - be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement checking that it does not twist - be used to restrain only one person - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying - not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance. In accordance with current safety regulations for all repairs on your vehicles seat belts go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop particularly if the straps show signs of damage. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product sold by PEUGEOT dealers. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

slide 174:

Safety 172 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Airbags General information System designed to contribute towards improving the safety of the occupants with the exception of the rear centre passenger in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the seat belts fitted with force limiters all except the centre rear passenger belt. If a collision occurs the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones: - in the case of a serious impact the airbags are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle with the exception of the rear centre passenger immediately after the impact the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants - in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions the airbags may not be deployed the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations. Impact detection zones A. Front impact zone. B. Side impact zone. The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off. This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs during the same or a subsequent accident the airbag will not be deployed again. Deployment of one or more of the airbags is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. This smoke is not harmful but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation. The noise of detonation associated with the deployment of one or more airbags may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

slide 175:

5 Safety 173 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Front airbags Deployment The airbags are deployed except the passengers front airbag if it is deactivated in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel drivers side and the dashboard passengers side to cushion their forward movement. System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax. The drivers airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel the front passengers airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.

slide 176:

Safety 174 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 F With the ignition off insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch. F Turn it to the "OFF" position. F Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position. Reactivating the passengers front airbag When you remove the child seat with the ignition off turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the front airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact. When the ignition is switched on this warning lamp comes in the seat belt warning display screen. It stays on while the airbag is deactivated. To assure the safety of your child the passengers front airbag must be deactivated when you install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed. When the ignition is switched on this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt warning display screen for approximately one minute to signal that the front airbag is activated. If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact. Operating fault Deactivating the passengers front airbag

slide 177:

5 Safety 175 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Lateral airbags System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest between the hip and the shoulder. Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame door side. Deployment The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel. Curtain airbags System contributing towards greater protection for the driver and passengers with the exception of the rear centre passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area. Deployment The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows. Operating fault If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact. In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over the airbags may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision none of the lateral airbags is deployed.

slide 178:

Safety 176 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Advice Front airbags Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel. Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard. Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently. Do not fit or attach anything to the steering wheel or dashboard this could cause injuries with deployment of the airbags. Lateral airbags Use only approved covers on the seats compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs clothing.... This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary. Curtain airbags Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed. If fitted on your vehicle do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof they play a part in securing the curtain airbags. Sit in a normal upright position. Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags a child pet object... nor fix or attach anything close to the inflation trajectory of the airbags this could cause injuries during their deployment. Never modify the original definition of your vehicle particularly in the area directly around the airbags. After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into have the airbag systems checked. All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly within a few milliseconds then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose. For the airbags to be fully effective observe the safety recommendations below: The vehicles front door panels include side impact sensors. A damaged door or any unauthorised or incorrectly executed work modification or repair on the front doors or their interior trim could compromise the operation of these sensors - Risk of malfunction of the lateral airbags Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 179:

5 Safety 177 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 General points relating to child seats Although one of PEUGEOTs main criteria when designing your vehicle the safety of your children also depends on you. The regulations on carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country. For maximum safety please observe the following recommendations: - in accordance with European regulations all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings - statistically the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats - a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the rearward facing position both in the front and in the rear. PEUGEOT recommends that children should travel on the rear seats of your vehicle: - rearward facing up to the age of 3 - forward facing over the age of 3.

slide 180:

Safety 178 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Passenger seat in the fully back and highest position. Child seat at the front Rearward facing Forward facing Refer to the legislation in force in your country before installing a child seat on this seating position. Ensure that the seat belt is properly tightened. For child seats with a support leg ensure that this is in firm and steady contact with the floor. If necessary adjust the passengers seat. When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat adjust the vehicle seat to the fully back and highest position with the backrest straightened. The passengers airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat adjust the vehicle seat to the fully back and highest position with the backrest straightened. Leave the passengers airbag active.

slide 181:

5 Safety 179 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Passenger airbag OFF Deactivating the passengers front airbag The warning label present on both sides of the passengers sun visor repeats this advice. In line with current legislation the following tables contain this warning in all of the languages required. For information on deactivating the passengers front airbag refer to the "Airbags" section. Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.

slide 182:

AR BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето. CS NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ. DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT. DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden. EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ. EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño. ET Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada. FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN. FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT. HR NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta. HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT BEKAPCSOLT FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja. IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino. LT NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS. Safety 180 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016

slide 183:

5 LV NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS. MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla. NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN. NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET. PL NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA CIAŁA. PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii dispus cu spatele in directia de mers pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA. RU ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ. SK NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA. SL NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE. SR NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT. TR KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir. Safety 181 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016

slide 184:

Safety 182 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Child seat at the rear Rearward facing When a rearward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat move the vehicles front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the rearward facing child seat does not touch the vehicles front seat. Forward facing When a forward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat move the vehicles front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward facing child seat do not touch the vehicles front seat. Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg ensure that this is in firm contact with the floor. If necessary adjust the front seat of the vehicle. Centre rear seat A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat. The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the protection of the child in the event of an accident.

slide 185:

5 Safety 183 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" Installed in the rearward facing position. L5 "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Can be fitted to the vehicles ISOFIX mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt. L6 "GRACO Booster" The child is restrained by the seat belt. PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.

slide 186:

Safety 184 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt Weight of the child / indicative age Seat Passengers front airbag Under 13 kg groups 0 b and 0+ Up to about 1 year From 9 to 18 kg group 1 From 1 to about 3 years From 15 to 25 kg group 2 From 3 to about 6 years From 22 to 36 kg group 3 From 6 to about 10 years Row 1 c Passenger seat with height adjustment Deactivated "OFF" U U U U Activated "ON" X UF UF UF Passenger seat without height adjustment Deactivated "OFF" U U U U Activated "ON" X UF UF UF Row 2 d Seat behind the drivers seat U U U U Seat behind the passengers seat U U U U Centre rear seat e U U U U In accordance with European regulations this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved a in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle. Fully high position. Backrest straightened.

slide 187:

5 Safety 185 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 U: seating position suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and approved for universal use rearward facing and/or forward facing. UF: seating position suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and approved for universal use forward facing. X: seating position not suitable for installing a child seat for the weight group indicated. a Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. b Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat. c Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat. d To install a child seat at the rear rearward or forward facing move the front seat forward then straighten the backrest to allow enough room for the child seat and the childs legs. e A child seat with a support leg must never be installed at this seating position. Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

slide 188:

Safety 186 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 "ISOFIX" mountings There are three rings for each seat: - two rings A located between the vehicle seat back and cushion indicated by a marking This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle. The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are secured on the two rings A. Some seats also have an upper strap known as the Top Tether which is attached to ring B. Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulation. To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: - remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on the seat refit it once the child seat has been removed - pass the upper strap of the child seat behind the seat backrest between the apertures for the head restraint rods - fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B - tighten the upper strap. - a ring B behind the seat and identified by a marking referred to as the Top Tether for fixing the upper strap. The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the childs protection in the event of an accident. Follow strictly the fitting instructions provided by with the child seat. When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left hand rear seat before fitting the seat first move the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of the vehicle so as to avoid the seat interfering with the operation of the seat belt. For information on the possibilities for installing ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle refer to the summary table. The seats represented below are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:

slide 189:

5 Safety 187 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 ISOFIX child seats recommended by PEUGEOT PEUGEOT offers a range of ISOFIX child seats listed and type approved for your vehicle. Refer also to the child seat manufacturers fitting instructions for information on installing and removing the seat. "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" and its ISOFIX base size category: E Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg adjustable for height which sits on the vehicles floor. This child seat can also be secured with a seat belt. In this case only the shell is used and attached to the vehicles seat by the three-point seat belt. "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" size category: B1 Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Is installed only in the forward facing position. Is attached to the rings A and the upper ring B referred to as the TOP TETHER using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting reclining lying down. This child seat can also be used on seats not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case it must be secured to the vehicles seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the position of the vehicles front seat so that the childs feet are not touching the backrest.

slide 190:

Safety 188 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Locations for ISOFIX child seats In line with European regulations this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats the ISOFIX size category determined by a letter from A to G is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo. Weight of the child / indicative age Under 10 kg group 0 Up to about 6 months Under 10 kg group 0 Under 13 kg group 0+ Up to about 1 year From 9 to 18 kg group 1 From about 1 to 3 years Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot Rearward facing Rearward facing Forward facing ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 Seat Passengers front airbag Row 1 a Passengers seat with height adjustment Deactivated "OFF" X IL IL IUF / IL Activated "ON" X X X IUF / IL Passengers seat without height adjustment Deactivated "OFF" X IL IL IUF / IL Activated "ON" X X X IUF / IL Row 2 Seat behind drivers seat IL b IL IL IUF / IL Seat behind passengers seat IL b IL IL IUF / IL Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX

slide 191:

5 Safety 189 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 a Refer to the legislation in force in your country before installing a child at this seating position. b The installation of a cot at this seating position may prevent the use of one or both other seats in this row. IUF: seating position suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat Forward facing secured using the upper strap. IL: seating position suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either: - rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg - forward facing fitted with a support leg - a cot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX mountings refer to the corresponding section. X: seating position not suitable for the installation for an ISOFIX seat or cot of the weight group indicated. Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with a backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

slide 192:

Safety 190 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Locations for i-Size child seats The i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. The i-Size child seats also have: - either an upper strap which is attached to the ring B - or a support leg which sits on the vehicles floor compatible with the seat approved for i-Size the role of which is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on ISOFIX mountings refer to the corresponding section. In accordance with the new European regulations this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size. Seating position Passengers front airbag i-Size restraint system Row 1 a Passenger seat Deactivated "OFF" i-U Activated "ON" i-UF Row 2 Seat behind the drivers seat i-U Seat behind the front passengers seat i-U Centre rear seat Not i-Size

slide 193:

5 Safety 191 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 i-U: suitable for i-Size restraints of the "universal" category forward facing or rearward facing. i-UF: only suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the "Universal" category forward facing. X: seating position not suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the "Universal" category. Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed. a Refer to the current legislation in your country before installing a child at this seating position.

slide 194:

Safety 192 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 For optimum installation of the forward facing child seat ensure that the back of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicles seat in contact if possible. You must remove the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest to a passenger seat. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed. Advice Installing a booster seat Children at the front The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the childs protection in the event of an accident. Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt buckle under the child seat as this could destabilise it. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack relative to the childs body to a minimum even for short journeys. When installing a child seat using the seat belt ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable move it forwards if necessary. The legislation on carrying children on the front passenger seat is specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country. Deactivate the passengers front airbag when a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Otherwise the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the childs shoulder without touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the childs thighs. PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level. At rear seating positions always leave sufficient space between the front seat and: - a rearward facing child seat - the childs feet for a child seat fitted forward facing. To do this move the front seat forwards and if necessary move its backrest into the upright position. As a safety precaution do not leave: - a child or children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle - a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun with the windows closed - the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle. To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows use the child lock. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun fit side blinds on the rear windows.

slide 195:

5 Safety 193 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Manual child lock Turning the child lock on F Using the ignition key or the integral key depending on version turn the red control as far as it will go: - to the right on the left-hand rear door - to the left on the right-hand rear door. Turning the child lock off F Using the ignition key or the integral key depending on version turn the red control as far as it will go: - to the left on the left-hand rear door - to the right on the right-hand rear door. Do not confuse the child lock control which is red with the back-up locking control which is black. Mechanical system to prevent opening of a rear door using its interior control. The control red in colour is located on the edge of each rear door. It is identified by a symbol marked on the bodywork.

slide 196:

Safety 194 3008-2_en_Chap05_securite_ed01-2016 Electric child lock Remotely operated system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls. The control is located on the dashboard drivers side. Switching on F Press this button. The indicator lamp in the button comes on accompanied by a confirmation message. This indicator lamp remains on until the child lock is switched off. Switching off F Press this button again. The indicator lamp on button goes off accompanied by a confirmation message. This indicator lamp remains on while child lock is switched on. Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle even for a short time. In the event of a serious impact the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.

slide 197:

6 Driving 195 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Driving recommendations Observe the driving regulations and remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your hands on the wheel so that you are ready to react at any time to any eventuality. On a long journey a break every two hours is strongly recommended. In difficult weather drive smoothly anticipate the need to brake and increase the distance from other vehicles. Driving on flooded roads We strongly advise against driving on flooded roads as this could cause serious damage to the engine or gearbox as well as to the electrical systems of your vehicle. Important If you are obliged to drive through water: - check that the depth of water does not exceed 15 cm taking account of waves that might be generated by other users - deactivate the Stop Start system - drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In all cases do not exceed 6 mph 10 km/h - do not stop and do not switch off the engine. Never drive with the parking brake applied - Risk of overheating and damage to the braking system Risk of fire As the exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot even several minutes after switching off the engine do not park or run the engine over areas where inflammable substances and materials are present: grass leaves etc. Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with the engine running. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running apply the parking brake and put the gearbox into neutral or position N or P depending on the type of gearbox. On leaving the flooded road as soon as circumstances allow make several light brake applications to dry the brake discs and pads. If in doubt on the state of your vehicle contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 198:

Driving 196 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 When towing Distribution of loads F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it. Air density decreases with altitude thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 for every 1 000 metres of altitude. Side wind F Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind. For more information on Weights refer to the corresponding section. F If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible. Braking Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. To avoid overheating of the brakes the use of engine braking is recommended. Tyres F Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer observing the recommended pressures. Lighting F Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. For more information on Adjusting the headlamp beam height refer to the corresponding section. The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically to avoid the audible signal if a genuine PEUGEOT towbar is used. Cooling Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant. As the fan is electrically controlled its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. F To lower the engine speed reduce your speed. The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature. In all cases keep a check on the coolant temperature.

slide 199:

6 Driving 197 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 It has 3 positions: - position 1 Stop: insert and removing the key steering column locked - position 2 Ignition on: steering column unlocked ignition on Diesel preheating engine running - position 3 Starting. Ignition on position It allows the use of the vehicles electric equipment or portable devices to be charged. Once the state of charge of the battery drops to the reserve level the system switches to energy economy mode: the power supply is cut off automatically to preserve the remaining battery charge. Starting / Switching off the engine with the key Ignition switch Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key or the remote control which would weigh down on its blade in the ignition switch and could cause a malfunction. It could adversely affect the deployment of the front airbag. Switching off the engine leads to a loss of braking assistance. Anti-theft protection In the event of a malfunction you are informed by a message in the instrument panel screen. For reasons of safety and theft protection do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle even when you are close to it. It is recommended that you keep it on your person. Electronic engine immobiliser The keys contain an electronic chip which has a secret code. When the ignition is switched on this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key. In this case your vehicle does not start contact a PEUGEOT dealer if required.

slide 200:

Driving 198 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Starting the engine F With a petrol engine operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 without pressing the accelerator pedal until the engine starts. Once the engine is running release the key. F With a Diesel engine turn the key to position 2 ignition on to operate the engine pre-heating system. Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel then operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 without pressing the accelerator pedal until the engine starts. Once the engine is running release the key. If the engine does not start straight away switch off the ignition. Wait a few moments before operating the starter motor again. If the engine does not start after several attempts do not keep trying: you risk damaging the starter motor or the engine. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Never leave the engine running in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation: internal combustion engines emit toxic exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Danger of intoxication and death In very severe wintry conditions temperatures below -23°C to ensure the correct operation and durability of the mechanical components of your vehicle engine and gearbox it is necessary to leave the engine running for 4 minutes before moving off. In certain cases you may have to apply more force to the steering wheels on full lock for example. In wintry conditions the warning lamp can stay on for a longer period. When the engine is hot the warning lamp does not come on. In temperate conditions do not leave the engine at idle to warm up but move off straight away and drive at moderate speed. With the parking brake applied and the gearbox in neutral or position N or P: F depress the clutch pedal fully manual gearbox or F press the brake pedal firmly automatic gearbox F insert the key into the ignition switch the system recognises the code F unlock the steering column by simultaneously turning the steering and the key.

slide 201:

6 Driving 199 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Switching off the engine Energy economy mode After switching off the engine position 1-Stop for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use functions such as the audio and telematic system the wipers dipped beam headlamps courtesy lamps ... F Check that the parking brake is correctly applied particularly on sloping ground. Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle is at a complete stop. With the engine off the braking and steering assistance systems are also cut off: risk of loss of control of the vehicle. To facilitate unlocking of the steering column it is recommended that the wheels be returned to the straight ahead position before switching off the engine. When you leave the vehicle keep the key with you and lock the vehicle. For more information on Energy economy mode refer to the corresponding section. Key left in the "Ignition on" position If the key has been left in the ignition switch at position 2 Ignition on the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. To switch the ignition back on turn the key to position 1 Stop then back to position 2 Ignition on. F Stop the vehicle. F With the engine running at idle turn the key to position 1. F Remove the key from the ignition switch. F To lock the steering column turn the steering until it locks.

slide 202:

Driving 200 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Starting / Switching off the engine with Keyless Entry and Starting Starting the engine F Briefly press the "START/ STOP" button while maintaining pressure on the pedal until the engine starts. The presence of the "Keyless Entry and Starting" electronic key in the recognition zone is essential. If the electronic key is not detected in this zone a message is displayed. Move the electronic key into this zone so that the engine can be started. If there is still a problem refer to the "Key not detected - Back-up starting" section. If one of the starting conditions is not met a reminder message is displayed in the instrument panel. In some circumstances it is necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly while pressing the "START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of the steering column a message warns you when this is needed. F With a manual gearbox put the gear lever into neutral. F With the electronic key inside the vehicle fully depress the clutch pedal. or F With an automatic gearbox place the gear selector at position P or N. F With the electronic key inside the vehicle fully depress the brake pedal. The steering column unlocks and the engine starts. F With a manual gearbox you should keep the clutch pedal fully depressed until the warning lamp goes off and not press the "START/STOP" button again until the engine is running. or F With an automatic gearbox you should keep the brake pedal fully depressed until the warning lamp goes off and not press the "START/STOP" button again until the engine is running. For Diesel engines in temperatures below zero and/or with a cold engine the engine will not start until the pre-heater warning lamp has gone off. If this warning lamp comes on after pressing the "START/STOP" button: As a safety measure never leave the vehicle while the engine is running.

slide 203:

6 Driving 201 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Switching off the engine F Immobilise the vehicle engine at idle. F With a manual gearbox put the gear lever into neutral. or F With an automatic gearbox place the gear selector at position P or N. Never leave your vehicle with the electronic key still inside. Switching off the engine leads to a loss of braking assistance. If the vehicle is not immobilised the engine will not stop. F With the electronic key inside the vehicle press the "START/ STOP" button. The engine stops and the steering column locks. Ignition on without starting With the Keyless Entry and Starting remote control inside the vehicle pressing the "START/ STOP" button with no action on the pedals allows the ignition to be switched on. This also allows the accessories to be used for example: audio system lighting.... F Press the "START/STOP" button the instrument panel comes on but the engine does not start. F Press the button again to switch off the ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. With the ignition on the system automatically goes into energy economy mode to maintain an adequate state of charge in the battery.

slide 204:

Driving 202 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Key not detected Back-up starting A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column to allow the engine to be started if the system does not detect the key in the recognition zone or when the battery in the electronic key is discharged. F Place and hold the remote control against the reader. F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox select position P then press the brake pedal firmly. F Press the "START/STOP" button. The engine starts. Emergency switch-off In the event of an emergency only the engine can be switched off without conditions even when driving. Press the "START/STOP" button for about five seconds. In this case the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops. F To confirm the instruction to switch off the engine press the "START/STOP" button for about five seconds. In the event of a fault with the electronic key contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Back-up switch off When the electronic key is not detected or is no longer in the recognition zone a message appears in the instrument panel when closing a door or trying to switch off the engine.

slide 205:

6 Driving 203 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Electric parking brake The system provides in automatic operation the application of the parking brake on switching off the engine and release as the vehicle moves off. The driver can take over at any time to apply or release the parking brake by operating the control lever: F by briefly pulling the control lever to apply the brake F by briefly pushing the control lever while pressing the foot brake to release it. Automatic mode is activated by default. Indicator lamp This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel and in the control lever to confirm the application of the parking brake. It goes off to confirm the release of the parking brake. The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes during manual application or release. In the event of a battery failure the electric parking brake no longer works. As a safety measure if the parking brake is not applied immobilise the vehicle by engaging a gear with a manual gearbox or placing the chocks supplied against one of the wheels. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 206:

Driving 204 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 When towing parking on a steep slope or if your vehicle is heavily laden turn the wheels towards the kerb and engage a gear with a manual gearbox or place the gear selector at position P with an automatic gearbox. For towing you vehicle is approved for parking on slopes of up to 12. Manual operation Manual application With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the control lever. If you push the control lever without pressing the brake pedal the parking brake will not be released and a message is displayed. Manual release With the ignition on or the engine running to release the parking brake: F press the brake pedal F while maintaining pressure on the brake pedal briefly push the control lever. The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever going off accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake released". Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on as they could release the parking brake. Before leaving the vehicle check that parking brake is applied: the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the control lever must be on fixed not flashing. If the parking brake is not applied there is an audible signal and a message is displayed on opening the drivers door. Label on door panel Confirmation of the instruction is signaled by flashing of the indicator lamp in the control lever. Application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake applied".

slide 207:

6 Driving 205 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Automatic operation Automatic release Ensure first that the engine is running and the drivers door is properly closed. The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively when the vehicle is moving. With a manual gearbox F Fully depress the clutch pedal engage 1 st gear or reverse. F Press the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox F Press the brake pedal. F Select position D M or R. F Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal. With an automatic gearbox if the brake does not release automatically check that the front doors are correctly closed. When stationary with the engine running do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily you risk releasing the parking brake. The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever going off accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake released". Automatic application With the vehicle stationary the parking brake is automatically applied when the engine is switched off by pressing the START/STOP button. Application of of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake applied". Automatic application does not take place if the engine stalls or goes into STOP mode of Stop Start. With automatic operation you can also manually apply or release the parking brake using the control lever.

slide 208:

Driving 206 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Special cases In some situations you may need to operate the parking brake manually. Immobilisation of the vehicle with the engine running To immobilise the vehicle with the engine running briefly pull the control lever. In very cold conditions ice it is recommended that the parking brake not be applied. To immobilise your vehicle engage a gear or fit the chocks supplied against one of the wheels. Application of of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake applied". Parking the vehicle with the brake released Immobilisation of the vehicle with the parking brake released F Switch off the engine. Illumination of the warning lamps in the instrument panel and control lever confirm application of the parking brake. F Switch on the ignition again without starting the engine. F Release the parking brake manually by pushing the control lever while keeping your foot on the brake. The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever going off accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake released". F Switch off the ignition. With an automatic gearbox P mode is automatically selected when the ignition is switched off. The wheels are blocked.

slide 209:

6 Driving 207 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Deactivating automatic operation In some situations such as very cold weather or towing caravan recovery it may be necessary to deactivate automatic operation of the system. F Start the engine. F Apply the parking brake with the control lever if it is released. F Take your foot off the brake pedal. F Push and hold the control lever in the release direction for at least 10 seconds and no more than 15 seconds. F Release the control lever. F Press and hold the brake pedal. F Pull the control lever in the apply direction for 2 seconds. Deactivation of the automatic functions is confirmed by illumination of this indicator lamp in the instrument panel. F Release the control lever and the brake pedal. From this point the parking brake can only be applied and released manually using the control lever. Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic operation. Reactivation of automatic operation is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the instrument panel going off. Emergency braking The emergency braking should only be used in an exceptional situation. In the event of a failure of the main service brake or in an exceptional situation e.g. driver taken ill under instruction etc. a continuous pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle. Braking takes place while the control lever is being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever is released. The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of the vehicle during emergency braking. If the emergency braking malfunctions the message "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed in the instrument panel. If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction signalled by the illumination of one or both warning lamps in the instrument panel then stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. In this event stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" actions on the control lever until the vehicle is immobilised.

slide 210:

Driving 208 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Operating faults The various alert situations are described in this table. In the event of a fault with the electric parking brake it is recommended that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. Situations Consequences Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and this warning lamp. - Automatic release is not available. - If you attempt an automatic release a help message is displayed on acceleration when the parking brake is applied prompting you to use manual release. Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - Secondary braking does not have full power. - If automatic release is not available a help message is displayed on acceleration when the parking brake is applied prompting you to use manual release. Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - Automatic application is not available: use the control lever. - The electric parking brake can only be used manually. - If automatic release is also not available a help message is displayed on acceleration when the parking brake is applied prompting you to use manual release. Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - If manual application and release do not work the control lever is faulty. - The automatic functions must be used in all circumstances: they are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever. - You can no longer immobilise the vehicle with the engine running.

slide 211:

6 Driving 209 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Situations Consequences Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. The parking brake is faulty the manual and automatic functions may not operate. When stationary to immobilise your vehicle: F Pull and hold the control lever for about 7 to 15 seconds until the warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. If this procedure does not work you should make your vehicle safe: F Park on a level surface. F Engage a gear with a manual gearbox or select position P with an automatic gearbox. F If possible place a chock against one of the wheels. Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps. - The parking brake does not have its full performance to securely hold the vehicle in all situations. You should make your vehicle safe: F Park on a level surface. F Engage a gear with a manual gearbox or select position P with an automatic gearbox. F If possible place a chock against one of the wheels. Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The flashing of the P warning lamps on starting the vehicle indicates that the parking brake is not correctly applied. As soon as possible stop the vehicle and try to completely release the parking brake using the control lever with your foot on the brake pedal. Display of the message "Battery fault" and this warning lamp. - The state of charge of the battery is very low and requires immobilisation of the vehicle in a safe place: engage a gear with a manual gearbox or place a chock against one of the wheels. - Once the battery is completely discharged the controls do not operate: to release the parking brake call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 212:

Driving 210 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 6-speed manual gearbox Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5 th or 6 th gear F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear. Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine always select neutral and depress the clutch pedal. F Raise the trigger under the knob and move the gear lever to the left then forwards. Failure to follow this advice could cause permanent damage to the gearbox inadvertent engagement of 3 rd or 4 th gear.

slide 213:

6 Driving 211 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Automatic gearbox EAT6 P. Park. For parking the vehicle: the wheels are blocked. R. Reverse. N. Neutral. For moving the vehicle with the ignition off: for certain car washing machines when towing the vehicle... D. Automatic drive mode. The gearbox manages the gear changes according to the driving style the profile of the road and the load in the vehicle. M. Manual mode. The driver changes gear using the steering mounted control paddles. Gearbox selector positions A. Button P. To put the gearbox into P. B. Unlock button. To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or change to R. This button should be pressed before pressing the selector. C. Button M. To change from D to permanent manual mode. D. Display panel showing the operation of the gearbox P R N D. Push selector Six-speed automatic gearbox with push selector. It also offers a manual mode with steering mounted paddle gear changes. Move the selector by pressing it forward once or twice N or R or rearward N or D if necessary going beyond the point of resistance. The selector returns to its initial position when released.

slide 214:

SPORT SPORT Driving 212 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Steering mounted control paddles In M or D mode the steering mounted control paddles allow the driver to change gear manually. F Pull the right-hand "+" paddle toward you and release to change up a gear. F Pull the left-hand "-" paddle toward you and release to change down a gear. The steering mounted control paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to select or come out of reverse. "Sport" button Activating the Sport programme or the Dynamic pack is not recommended in the following situations: - one of the special modes other than standard mode of Grip control is on - low fuel level reached - low AdBlue level reached. Sport programme With the engine running when the programme associated with the button is active the gearbox delays changing up for a more dynamic driving style. The programme is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched off. Pressing this button has no effect when a trailer is connected. In D mode pressing this button activates the Sport programme. "S" appears in the instrument panel. Dynamic pack You can activate or deactivate the function: - by pressing this button or - via the i-Cockpit Amplify function by modifying the setting for an ambience in the touch screen. For more information on the Dynamic Pack and the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section. The indicator lamp in the button is on when the Dynamic pack is activated.

slide 215:

6 Driving 213 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 With the ignition on the state of the gearbox is displayed in the instrument panel: P: park. R: reverse. N: neutral. D1...D6: automatic mode. S: Sport programme or Dynamic pack. M1...M6: manual mode. -: instruction not accepted in manual mode. Displays in the instrument panel If the drivers door is opened with the ignition on a message is displayed asking you to put the gearbox into P mode. The state of the gearbox is displayed in the instrument panel for a few moments after switching off the ignition. With the engine running if it is necessary to press the brake pedal or the Unlock button in order to change mode an alert message is displayed in the instrument panel. Only appropriate attempted changes of mode are accepted. Operation General points To release the gearbox: - from P mode: F press the brake pedal firmly F press the Unlock button F while maintaining pressure on the brake pedal and on the Unlock button select another mode. - from neutral N: F speed below 3 mph 5 km/h F press the brake pedal firmly F maintaining pressure on the brake pedal select another mode. To engage reverse: F speed below 3 mph 5 km/h F press the Unlock button F push forward once or twice. To change to manual mode: F with D mode first selected F press the M button the indicator lamp in the button comes on. To come out of manual mode: F push forward to return to D. or F press the M button the indicator lamp in the button goes off. With the engine running and the brakes released if R D or M is selected the vehicle moves off even without pressing the accelerator pedal. Never leave children unsupervised inside the vehicle with the engine running. Never press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time - Risk of damage to the gearbox In the event of a battery failure you must place the chocks supplied with the vehicle tools against one of the wheels to immobilise the vehicle.

slide 216:

Driving 214 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 The vehicle must be stationary to switch off the ignition. To put the vehicle into free-wheel with the engine off: F vehicle stationary engine running select N F switch off the engine F switch the ignition on within five seconds F with your foot on the brake pedal push the selector forward or rearward and release to confirm N and release the electric parking brake manually F switch off the ignition. If you exceed the period of five seconds the gearbox goes into P mode you must then start the procedure again from the beginning. Special aspects of automatic mode The gearbox selects the gear that offers optimum performance taking account of the ambient temperature the profile of the road the load on the vehicle and the style of driving. For maximum acceleration without touching the selector press the accelerator fully down kick-down. The gearbox changes down automatically or holds the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. When braking the gearbox changes down automatically to provide effective engine braking. The steering mounted controls allow the driver to temporarily select a gear if the road and engine speed permit. Special aspects of manual mode The change from one gear to another takes place only if the if the road speed and engine speed permit. If the engine speed is too high or too low the gear selected flashes for a few seconds then the gear actually engaged is displayed. With N engaged opening the drivers door results in an audible signal. Closing the drivers door stops the signal. Moving off From P mode: F Press the brake pedal firmly. F Start the engine. F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal press the Unlock button. F Push twice rearward going beyond the point of resistance to select the automatic D mode or forward to engage reverse R. From neutral N: F Press the brake pedal firmly. F Start the engine. F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal push rearward to select the automatic D mode or forward while pressing the Unlock button to engage reverse R. Then from P or N: F Release the brake pedal. F Accelerate progressively to automatically release the electric parking brake. F With the parking brake released the vehicle then moves off.

slide 217:

6 Driving 215 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 In severe wintry conditions temperature below -23°C it is recommended that the engine be allowed to run for a few minutes before moving off to ensure the correct operation and durability of the engine and gearbox. Stopping the vehicle Whatever the state of the gearbox when the ignition is switched off P mode is engaged automatically with the exception of N in which case P mode will be engaged after a delay of 5 seconds allowing the change to free-wheel. Check that P mode has been engaged and that the electric parking brake was applied automatically if not apply it manually. Operating faults Malfunction of the gearbox Malfunction of the selector In the event of a minor fault In the event of a serious fault Stop as soon as it is safe to do so away from the traffic and call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When the ignition is switched off the gearbox goes into P mode automatically. You are alerted by the illumination of this warning lamp. The corresponding indicator lamps for the selector panel and the electric parking brake control lever must be on as well as the ones in the instrument panel. This is signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal when the ignition is switched on. The gearbox goes into back-up mode: D mode stays in third gear the steering mounted control paddles are inoperative M mode is no longer available. You may feel a pronounced jolt when engaging reverse. This does not present any risk for the gearbox. Do not drive faster than 62 mph 100 km/h keeping to the speed limit. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You are alerted by the illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. In certain cases the selector lamps may not come on but the state of the gearbox is still displayed in the instrument panel. Drive cautiously and go to a PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop.

slide 218:

Driving 216 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Hill start assist On an ascending slope with the vehicle stationary the vehicle is held for a momentarily when you release the brake pedal: - provided you are in first gear or neutral with a manual gearbox - provided you are in position D or M with an automatic gearbox. Operation On a descending slope with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal. Operating fault If a fault in the system occurs these warning lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily approximately 2 seconds when starting on a gradient the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. This system only operates when: - the vehicle is completely stationary with your foot on the brake pedal - certain gradient conditions are met - with the driver’s door closed. The hill start assist system cannot be deactivated. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase. If you need to leave the vehicle with the engine running apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp and the warning lamp P in the lever of the electric parking brake control are on fixed not flashing.

slide 219:

6 SPORT Driving 217 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Dynamic Pack This pack adapts: - the display colour for the instrument panel - the acoustic ambience of the engine - the level of power assistance for the steering - acceleration - the management of gear changes with an automatic gearbox - the display in the instrument panel of information on the vehicles dynamic parameters. Activation F Press and hold this button until the instrument panel colour changes red the indicator lamp in the button comes on. Displays F Press the end of the wiper control stalk to display the various dynamic parameters in the instrument panel. F Press repeatedly to go from one screen to another. You can also display this information with the "PERSONAL" mode of the instrument panel. If the indicator lamp flashes activation is not possible for example if Park Assist is selected and the instrument panel display colour returns to its normal mode. If the indicator lamp continues flashing for a long time contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. This telemetry information power output turbocharger pressure torque longitudinal and lateral acceleration ... is given as an indication only. The Dynamic pack is also managed by the i-Cockpit Amplify function. For more information on the i-Cockpit Amplify function refer to the corresponding section.

slide 220:

Driving 218 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Gear shift indicator Depending on the driving situation and your vehicles equipment the system may advise you to skip one or more gears. You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears. The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. In fact the configuration of the road the amount of traffic and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the advice given by the system. This function cannot be deactivated. - You press the accelerator pedal. Example: - You are in third gear. - The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear. The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow. System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate gear. With an automatic gearbox the system is only active in manual mode. Depending on engine. On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the arrow may be accompanied by the gear recommended. The system adapts its gear change recommendation according to the driving conditions slope load ... and the demands of the driver power acceleration braking .... The system never suggests: - engaging first gear - engaging reverse gear. Operation On BlueHDi Diesel 135 and 150 versions with manual gearbox in certain driving conditions the system may suggest changing into neutral so that the engine can go into standby STOP mode with Stop Start. In this case N is displayed in the instrument panel.

slide 221:

6 Driving 219 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Stop Start Operation Going into engine STOP mode This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby automatically: - with a manual gearbox at speeds below 12 mph 20 km/h or vehicle stationary with the PureTech 130 petrol and BlueHDi 115 and 120 Diesel versions when you place the gear lever in neutral and you release the clutch pedal A time counter calculates the sum of the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It resets itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key or the START/STOP button. - with an automatic gearbox vehicle stationary when you press the brake pedal or put the gear selector in N mode. The Stop Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic red lights traffic jams .... The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly quickly and silently. Perfect for urban use the Stop Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary. Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode you must switch off the ignition with the key or the START/ STOP button. For your comfort during parking manoeuvres STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear. Stop Start does not affect the operation of vehicle systems such as braking power steering...

slide 222:

Driving 220 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked automatically This indicator lamp goes off and the engine starts automatically: - with a manual gearbox when you fully depress the clutch pedal - with an automatic gearbox: ● gear selector in D or M mode when you release the brake pedal ● or gear selector in N mode and brake pedal released when you place the gear selector in D or M mode ● or when you engage reverse. As a safety measure or to maintain comfort levels in the vehicle START mode is invoked automatically when: - you open the drivers door - you unfasten the drivers seat belt - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph 25 km/h with a manual gearbox 2 mph 3 km/h with PureTech 130 petrol and BlueHDi 115 and 120 Diesel versions or 2 mph 3 km/h with an automatic gearbox. - the electric parking brake is being applied - some special conditions battery charge engine temperature braking assistance ambient temperature... where the engine is needed for control of a system. In this case this indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off. This operation is perfectly normal. Special cases: STOP mode not available STOP mode is not invoked when: - the vehicle is on a steep slop rising or falling - the drivers door is open - the drivers seat belt is not fastened - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph 10 km/h since the last engine start with the key or the START/STOP button - the electric parking brake is applied or being applied - the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment - demisting is active - some special conditions battery charge engine temperature braking assistance ambient temperature... where the engine is needed to assure control of a system. In this case this indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off. This operation is perfectly normal.

slide 223:

6 Driving 221 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Deactivation / Reactivation In certain circumstances such as the need to maintain the temperature in the passenger compartment it may be useful to deactivate the Stop Start system. The system can be deactivated at any time once the ignition is switched on. If the engine is in STOP mode it then restarts. The Stop Start system is reactivated automatically every time the ignition is switched on. Opening the bonnet Before doing anything under the bonnet deactivate the Stop Start system to avoid the risk of injury related to an automatic change to START mode. Driving on flooded roads Before driving through a flooded road it is strongly recommended that you deactivate the Stop Start system. For more information on Driving advice particularly on flooded roads refer to the corresponding section. With the button on the dashboard Pressing the button again reactivates the system the associated indicator lamp goes off. The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off accompanied by the display of a message. F Press this button the associated indicator lamp comes on. Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination of this indicator lamp and the display of a message in the instrument panel. Activation and deactivation of the function is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. With the touch screen button Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination of this indicator lamp and the display of a message in the instrument panel. Select the "Driving assistance" tab then "Stop Start". A new selection reactivates the system. The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off accompanied by the display of a message.

slide 224:

Driving 222 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Operating fault The Stop Start system requires a 12 V battery of specific technology and specification. All work on this type of battery must be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. For more information on the 12 V battery refer to the corresponding section. In the event of a fault with the system this warning lamp flashes for a few moments in the instrument panel then remains on accompanied by the display of a message. In the event of a fault in STOP mode the vehicle may stall. All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again with the key or the "START/STOP" button. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 225:

6 Driving 223 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Under-infation detection System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving. The under-inflation detection system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. This system does not avoid the need to check the tyre pressures including the spare wheel every month as well as before a long journey. Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs road holding extends braking distances and causes premature tyre wear particularly under arduous conditions high loading high speed long journey. The inflation pressures defined for your vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label. For more information on the Identification markings refer to the corresponding section. Driving with under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption. The system monitors the pressures in the four tyres once the vehicle is moving. It compares the information given by the four wheel speed sensors with reference values which must be reinitialised every time the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. The system triggers an alert as soon as it detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or more tyres. Snow chains The system does not have to be reinitialised after fitting or removing snow chains. Checking tyre pressures This check should be done when the tyres are "cold" vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles 10 km at moderate speeds. Otherwise add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.

slide 226:

Driving 224 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 It is necessary to reinitialise the system every time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted and after changing one or more wheels. Reinitialisation This is given by fixed illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by an audible signal and depending on equipment the display of a message. Under-inflation alert F Reduce speed immediately avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking. F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. F If you have a compressor such as the one in the temporary puncture repair kit check the pressures of the four tyres when cold. F If it is not possible to make this check immediately drive carefully at reduced speed. or F In the event of a puncture use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel depending on equipment. The loss of pressure detected does not always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual check. The alert is maintained until the system is reinitialised. Before reinitialising the system ensure that the pressures of the four tyres are correct for the use of the vehicle and in line with the recommendations on the tyre pressure label. The under-inflation alert can only be relied on if the reinitialisation of the system has been done with the pressures in the four tyres correctly adjusted. The under-inflation detection system does not give a warning if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.

slide 227:

6 Driving 225 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Touch screen Monochrome screen C Operating fault The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by illumination of the Service warning lamp indicates a fault with the system. A message appears accompanied by an audible signal. In this case under-inflation monitoring of the tyres is no longer assured. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Before doing anything to the system the pressures of the four tyres must be checked and the system reinitialised. Reinitialisation of the function is done in the "Personalisation- configuration" menu of the screen. F Select the "Define the vehicle parameters" menu. F Select the "Driving assistance" menu. F Select the "Tyre inflation" menu. F Select the "Reinitialisation" function. F Select "Yes" to confirm. The reinitialisation is confirmed by an audible signal. Reinitialisation of the function is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. F In the Driving menu select the "Settings" tab. F In the page select the "Under-inflation reinitialisation" function. F Select "Yes" to confirm. The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display of a message and an audible signal.

slide 228:

Driving 226 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Memorising speeds This function allows speeds to be saved which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter to limit the speed of the vehicle or the cruise control for a vehicle cruising speed. You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems. By default some speed settings are already memorised. As a safety measure the driver must only modify the speed settings when stationary. This function is accessible in the Driving menu of the touch screen. F Select the "Driving assistance" tab. F Select "Speed settings". F Select the "Speed limiter" or "Cruise control" tab depending on the system for which you want to memorise new speed settings. F Select the speed setting you want to modify. F Enter the new value using the numerical keypad and confirm. F Confirm to save the modifications and quit the menu. "MEM" button Modifying a speed setting This button allows you to select a memorised speed setting for use with the speed limiter or the cruise control. For more information on the Speed limiter or the Cruise control refer to the corresponding section.

slide 229:

6 Driving 227 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Speed limit recognition This system allows the speed limit detected by the camera to be displayed in the instrument panel. Specific speed limits such as those for heavy goods vehicles are not displayed. The display of the speed limit in the instrument panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign intended for cars light vehicles. The units for the speed limits mph or km/h depend on the country you are driving in. It should be taken into account so that you observe the speed limit. For the system to operate correctly when you change country the units for speed in the instrument panel must be those for the country you are driving in. The automatic reading of road signs is a driving assistance system and does not always display speed limits correctly. The speed limit signs present on the road always take priority over the display by the system. The system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must observe the driving regulations and must adapt the speed of the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic. It is possible for the system to not display the speed limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset period. The system is designed to detect signs that conform to the Vienna Convention on road signs. To maintain correct operation of the system: regularly clean the area in front of the camera. Principles Using a camera at the top of the windscreen this system detects and reads speed limit and end of speed limit signs. The system also takes account of information on speed limits from the navigation system mapping. It is necessary to update your navigation mapping regularly in order to receive accurate information on speed limits from the system.

slide 230:

Driving 228 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Display in the instrument panel 1. Indication of the speed limit. or 2. Indication of the end of the speed limit. Display of the speed The system is active but is not detecting speed limit information. On detection of speed limit information the system displays the value. The driver can if desired adjust the speed of the vehicle according to the information given by the system. Activation / Deactivation The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle parameters menu in the screen.

slide 231:

6 Driving 229 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Memorising the speed setting This memorisation is in addition to the display of Speed limit recognition. The driver can choose to adapt the speed setting to the speed limit suggested by pressing the memorisation button for the speed limiter the standard cruise control and the dynamic cruise control with Stop function. This speed setting then replaces the previous speed setting for the speed limiter and/or cruise control. For more information on the Speed limiter Cruise control or Dynamic cruise control with Stop function refer to the corresponding sections. Steering mounted controls 1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode. 2. Memorise a speed setting. Operating limits The legislation on speed limits is specific to each country. The system does not take account of reduced speed limits in the following cases: - poor weather rain snow - atmospheric pollution - trailer caravan - driving with a space-saver type spare wheel or snow chains fitted - puncture repair using the temporary repair kit - young drivers - ... The system may be disrupted or not work at all in the following situations: - poor visibility inadequate street lighting falling snow rain fog - windscreen area ahead of the camera dirty misty frosty covered with snow damaged or masked by a sticker - fault with the camera - obsolete or incorrect mapping - hidden road signs other vehicles vegetation snow - speed limit signs that do not conform to the standard are damaged or distorted. Display in the instrument panel 3. Speed limiter indication. 4. Memorise the speed. 5. Current speed setting.

slide 232:

Driving 230 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Memorising the speed F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. Speed limiter/cruise control information is displayed. On detection of a speed limit sign the system displays the speed limit and offers to make it a new speed setting. "MEM" flashes in the screen for a few seconds. F Make an initial press on this button to request saving of the speed suggested. If the difference between the speed setting and the speed displayed by the recognition system is less than 6 mph 10 km/h the MEM symbol is not displayed. F Press this button again to confirm and save the new speed setting. After a predetermined period the screen returns to the current display.

slide 233:

6 Driving 231 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 6. Speed limiter on / pause indication. 7. Speed limiter mode selection indication. 8. Programmed speed value. 9. Select a memorised speed or depending on version Speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. Displays in the instrument panel Speed limiter 1. Select speed limiter mode. 2. Decrease the programmed value. 3. Increase the programmed value. 4. Speed limiter On / Pause. 5. Display memorised speed settings or depending on version Accept the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. Steering mounted controls System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver. The speed limiter is a driving aid that cannot in any circumstances replace the need to observe speed limits or the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The speed limiter is switched on manually. The minimum programmed speed is 20 mph 30 km/h. The programmed speed remains in the system memory when the ignition is switched off. For more information on Memorising speeds or Speed limit recognition refer to the corresponding section.

slide 234:

Driving 232 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Switching on F If the speed setting is suitable last speed setting programmed in the system press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on. F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position to select the speed limiter the function is paused. F Pressing button 4 again temporarily interrupts the function pause. Adjusting the limit speed setting You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed. To modify the limit speed setting from the current speed of the vehicle: F in steps of +/- 1 mph km/h make successive short presses on button 2 or 3 F continuously in steps of +/- 5 mph km/h press and hold button 2 or 3. To modify the limit speed setting using memorised speeds and from the touch screen: F press button 5 to display the six memorised speed settings F press the button for the desired speed setting. This setting becomes the new limit speed. To modify the speed limiter setting using the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system: F the speed suggested is displayed in the instrument panel F make a first press on button 5 a message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request F press button 5 again to save the suggested speed. This value is then displayed in the instrument panel as the new speed limiter setting.

slide 235:

6 Driving 233 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 On a steep descent or in the event of sharp acceleration the speed limiter will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of the speed limiter. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned correctly - do not fit one mat on top of another. Temporarily exceeding the programmed speed F If you want to temporarily exceed the programmed limit speed press firmly on the accelerator pedal going beyond the point of resistance. The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the displayed programmed speed flashes. Switching off When the limit speed is exceeded but is not due to action by the driver there is an audible signal to complete the alert. Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the programmed setting the speed limiter functions again: the display of the programmed speed setting becomes steady again. F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position: the display of information on the speed limiter disappears. Operating fault Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the speed limiter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 236:

Driving 234 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Cruise control 1. Select cruise control mode selection. 2. Set the current speed of the vehicle as the cruise setting or lower the cruise setting. 3. Set the current speed of the vehicle as the cruise setting or raise the cruise setting. 4. Pause / Resume cruise control. 5. Display memorised speed settings or depending on version Accept the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. Steering mounted controls 6. Cruise control pause / resume indication. 7. Cruise control mode selected indication. 8. Cruise speed setting. 9. Select a memorised cruise speed or depending on version The speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. Displays in the instrument panel The operation of the cruise control can be interrupted pause: - by pressing control 4 or by pressing the brake pedal - automatically if operation of the dynamic stability control system is triggered. Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed setting. The cruise control is switched on manually. It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph 40 km/h as well as: - with a manual gearbox the engagement of third gear or higher - with an automatic gearbox the gear selector in D mode or second gear or higher in M mode. Speed regulation remains active after changing gear on vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox and Stop Start. System which automatically maintains the cruising speed of the vehicle at a setting programmed by the driver without any action on the accelerator pedal. The cruise control system is a driving aid that cannot in any circumstances replace the need to observe speed limits nor the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. As a safety measure you are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at all times. For more information on Memorising speeds or Speed limit recognition refer to the corresponding section.

slide 237:

6 Driving 235 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Switching on F To start the cruise control and set a cruise speed once the vehicle has reached the desired speed press button 2 or 3: the current speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. You can release the accelerator pedal. F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position to select cruise control mode the function is paused. F Pressing button 4 interrupts operation of the system pause. F Pressing button 4 again restores operation of the cruise control ON. Modifying the cruise speed setting The cruise control must be active. To modify the cruise speed setting using memorised speeds and from the touch screen: F press button 5 to display the six memorised speed settings F press the button for the desired speed setting. This setting becomes the new cruise speed. Take care: pressing and holding button 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the speed of your vehicle. To modify the cruise speed setting from the current speed of the vehicle: F in steps of + or - 1 mph km/h make repeated short presses on button 2 or 3 F continuously in steps of + or - 5 mph km/h press and hold button 2 or 3.

slide 238:

Driving 236 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 As a precaution it is recommended that the cruise speed chosen be close to the current speed of your vehicle so as to avoid any sudden acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. Temporarily exceeding the programmed speed When descending a steep hill the cruise control system cannot prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. When required overtaking manoeuvre... it is possible to exceed the programmed speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. The cruise control is temporarily overridden and the programmed speed setting flashes. To return to the programmed speed simply release the accelerator pedal. Once the vehicle has returned to the programmed speed the cruise control takes over again: the display of the programmed speed setting becomes steady again. You may have to brake to control the speed of your vehicle. In this case the cruise control is automatically paused. To activate the system again with the speed of the vehicle above 25 mph 40 km/h press button 4. Switching off F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control information disappears from the screen. To modify the cruise speed setting using the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system: F the speed suggested is displayed in the instrument panel F make a first press on button 5 a message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request F press button 5 again to save the suggested speed. This value is then displayed in the instrument panel as the new cruise speed setting.

slide 239:

6 Driving 237 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Only use the cruise control if the traffic conditions will allow you to drive for a certain time at a steady speed and at a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Do not activate the cruise control in urban areas in heavy traffic on winding or steep roads on slippery or flooded roads or in conditions of poor visibility heavy rain fog falling snow.... In some circumstances it may not be possible to maintain or reach the cruise speed set: towing vehicle heavily loaded steep climb. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of the cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned correctly - never fit one mat on top of another. Operating fault Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the cruise control system. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 240:

Driving 238 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Dynamic cruise control with Stop function The dynamic cruise control is a driving aid that cannot in any circumstances replace the observation of speed limits and safe distances nor the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. It is recommended that you always keep your feet close to the pedals. The driver must be ready to take back control of their vehicle at any time using the brake or accelerator pedal as appropriate. This system provides two functions: - automatic regulation of the speed of the vehicle to a value programmed by the driver - automatic adjustment of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. It manages the acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle by automatically acting on the engine and the braking system. To do this the system has a radar located in the middle of the front bumper with a maximum range of 150 metres. Principles This system detects a vehicle running in front of your vehicle travelling in the same direction. It automatically adapts the speed of your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front to maintain a constant distance. If the vehicle in front is running more slowly the system slows or even stops your vehicle using engine braking and the braking system. If the braking system is used to decelerate the vehicle the brake lamps come on. If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes lane the cruise control progressively accelerates your vehicle to return to the programmed speed. If the driver operates a direction indicator to overtake a slower vehicle the dynamic cruise control allows your vehicle to temporarily approach the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking manoeuvre though never exceeding the programmed speed.

slide 241:

6 Driving 239 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Steering mounted controls 1. Select cruise control mode. 2. Use the current speed as the speed setting / Lower the speed setting. 3. Use the current speed as the speed setting / Raise the speed setting. 4. Pause / Resume cruise control. 5. Use the speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. 6. Display and adjust the inter-vehicle distance setting. For more information on Speed limit recognition refer to the corresponding section. Displays in the instrument panel 7. Indication of the presence / absence of a target vehicle. 8. Indication of cruise control activation / deactivation. 9. Speed setting. 10. Indication that vehicle is held stationary. 11. Speed suggested by the speed limit recognition system. 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting. 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the radar. If a vehicle is detected the symbol 7 is filled with the colour associated with the cruise control mode. By default the symbol 7 is empty. In cruise control activated mode the symbol 8 appears in green. By default the symbol 8 appears in grey. This information is visible in the instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode.

slide 242:

Driving 240 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Switching on The cruise control is switched on manually it requires a vehicle speed of between 18 and 112 mph 30 and 180 km/h. An automatic gearbox must be in position D or M. F With the ignition on turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: cruise control mode is selected but not started grey. F Vehicle moving press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. The cruise control is activated green. By default the inter-vehicle distance is set at "Normal" 2 dashes. Otherwise the last setting made will be used when switching on the system. When the cruise control is operating Stop Start is automatically deactivated. Pause The dynamic cruise control can be paused manually by: - action by the driver: ● on button 4 ● on the brake pedal ● on the electric parking brake control ● when changing from D to N with an automatic gearbox. - or automatically if operation of the ESC system is triggered for reasons of safety. Following braking of the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop the system holds the vehicle stationary the cruise control is paused. The driver should press the accelerator pedal to move off then reactivate the system by exceeding 18 mph 30 km/h and pressing button 2 3 or 4. If the driver takes no action following this immobilisation the electric parking brake is applied automatically after a few minutes. Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed setting.

slide 243:

6 Driving 241 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 When the cruise control is paused it can only be reactivated when all of the safety conditions are met. The message "Activation not possible conditions unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is not possible. Wait until the speed of the vehicle is close to the speed setting before reactivating the system - by pressing button 2 or 3 - in order to set your current speed as the new speed setting. Modification of the speed setting Engine running and cruise control on green you can modify the speed setting. As a precaution it is recommended that you select a cruise speed setting close to the current speed of your vehicle so as to avoid any sudden acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. Modifcation from the speed limit recognition system F The speed to be memorised is displayed in the instrument panel. F Make an initial press on button 5 a message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request. F Press button 5 again to save the suggested speed. The speed is then displayed in the instrument panel as the new speed setting. Modifcation from the current speed F By successive short presses on button 2 or 3 to raise or lower the setting in steps of + or - 1 mph km/h F By a maintained press on button 2 or 3 to raise or lower the setting in steps of + or - 5 mph km/h. For more information on Speed limit recognition refer to the corresponding section. Take care: a prolonged press on button 2 or 3 will cause a very quick change in the speed of your vehicle.

slide 244:

Driving 242 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Modification of the inter- vehicle distance setting Three predefined inter-vehicle distance settings are offered: - "Distant" 3 dashes - "Normal" 2 dashes - "Close" 1 dash. Engine running and cruise control selected grey you can modify the inter-vehicle distance setting: F press button 6 to display the selection screen for inter-vehicle distance F press button 6 repeatedly to cycle through the predefined settings. The selection screen closes after a few seconds. The modification is then taken into account. This setting remains in memory whatever the state of the system and when the ignition is switched off. Exceeding the programmed setting It is possible to exceed the speed setting temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal. The cruise control no longer manages the braking system during this period. Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed. If the programmed speed setting is exceeded the display of the speed setting disappears and a message "Cruise control suspended" is displayed until the accelerator pedal is released.

slide 245:

6 70 70 Driving 243 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Driving situations and associated alerts To benefit from all of the information available in the instrument panel you must first select the "DRIVING" display mode. The following table describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential. Indicator Display Associated message Comment according to the inter-vehicle distance selected "Cruise control paused" System paused. No vehicle detected. according to the inter-vehicle distance selected "Cruise control paused" System paused. A vehicle has been detected. according to the inter-vehicle distance selected "Cruise control on" System activated. No vehicle detected. according to the inter-vehicle distance selected "Cruise control on" System activated. A vehicle has been detected. or "Cruise control suspended" System activated. The driver has temporarily taken control of the vehicle by accelerating.

slide 246:

70 70 70 70 Driving 244 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Indicator Display Associated message Comment + "Take back control of the vehicle" The driver should take control of the vehicle by accelerating or braking depending on the circumstances. + "Take back control of the vehicle" The system cannot manage the critical situation alone emergency braking of the target vehicle rapid insertion of another vehicle between the two vehicles. The driver must immediately take back control of the vehicle. or "Activation not possible conditions unsuitable" The system refuses to activate the cruise control speed outside the operating range winding road. or according to the inter-vehicle distance selected and the actual distance from the target vehicle "Cruise control paused" for a few seconds The system has brought the vehicle to a complete stop and is holding it immobilised. The driver should accelerate to move off again. The cruise control remains paused until the driver reactivates it with the speed of the vehicle above 18 mph 30 km/h.

slide 247:

6 Driving 245 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Limits of operation The system cannot exceed the limits of the laws of physics. It is recommended that the system be deactivated when the "space-saver" spare wheel is in use. The system should not be activated when towing a trailer. In certain critical situations the system will encourage the driver to immediately take back control: - if the vehicle in front slows down too much or too suddenly and the driver does not brake - if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. As the radars field of detection is quite narrow it is possible that the system may not detect: - vehicles of reduced width motorcycles scooters... - vehicles not running in the middle of the lane - vehicles entering a corner - vehicles suddenly pulling out. The cruise control does not take account of: - pedestrians cyclists animals - stationary vehicles traffic jam red light breakdown... - vehicles crossing a junction - vehicles driving in the opposite direction.

slide 248:

Driving 246 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Operating fault Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. In the event of a fault with the cruise control you are alerted by the illumination of this warning lamp and the display of a message in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible signal. The cruise control operates by day and at night in fog or moderate rainfall. However it is strongly recommended that you always keep a safe distance from vehicles ahead according to the driving conditions the weather and the road surface. Use the cruise control only where the driving conditions allow running at a constant speed and at an adequate safe distance. Do not use the cruise control in urban areas heavy traffic on winding or steep roads or on slippery or flooded surfaces. In certain circumstances it may not be possible for the speed setting to be maintained or even attained: loaded vehicle ascending a steep hill ... The system is not intended for driving in the following situations: - the front end of the vehicle has been modified addition of driving lamps - driving on a racing circuit - running on a rolling road - use of snow chains or non-slip covers. As a safety measure do not use the system if the brake lamps are faulty. Do not use the system if the front bumper is damaged. The operation of the radar located in the front bumper may be disturbed in certain weather conditions for example: with accumulations of snow ice mud ... Clean the front bumper removing the snow mud ... The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of the cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: - ensure that mats are secured correctly - never fit one mat on top of another.

slide 249:

6 Driving 247 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Distance alert and Active Safety Brake This system includes three functions: - Distance alert alert if there is a risk of collision - Intelligent emergency braking assistance - Active Safety Brake automatic emergency braking. Points on the Active Safety Brake function The speed of the vehicle must be between 3 and 87 mph 5 and 140 km/h when a moving vehicle is detected. The speed of the vehicle must not be higher than 50 mph 80 km/h when a stationary vehicle is detected. The speed of the vehicle must not be higher than 36 mph 60 km/h when a pedestrian is detected. The DSC system must not be deactivated or faulty. All occupants must have fastened their seat belts. Driving at steady speed on roads with few bends is required. This system is designed to assist the driver and improve road safety. It is the drivers responsibility to continuously monitor the state of the traffic observing the driving regulations. This system does not avoid the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The vehicle is fitted with a radar located in the front bumper and a camera at the top of the windscreen. Conditions for activation and operation The system is active from about 4 mph 7 km/h and is deactivated below about 3 mph 5 km/h. It takes account of: - registered vehicles running in the same direction or stationary - pedestrians present in the traffic lane bicycles motorcycles animals and objects on the road are not necessarily detected. Distance alert: it warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian present in their traffic lane. Intelligent emergency braking assistance: it completes the braking action taken by the driver if this is inadequate. Active Safety Brake: it intervenes following the alert if the driver does not react quickly enough and does not operate the vehicles brakes. If the driver fails to act it contributes towards avoiding a collision or limiting its severity by reducing the speed of your vehicle. Following an impact the system is automatically disabled contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

slide 250:

Driving 248 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Depending on the degree of risk of collision detected by the system and the alert threshold chosen by the driver different levels of alert can be triggered and displayed in the instrument panel. Because of limits in the operation of the system it is possible that warnings are not given are given too late or seem unjustified. Consequently the driver must always remain attentive and able to react at any time to avoid an accident. Distance alert Level 1: visual alert only signalling to you that the vehicle in front is very close. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. Limits of operation In the following cases it is recommended that the system be deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu: - when towing a trailer or caravan - when carrying long objects on roof bars or a roof rack - before using an automatic car wash with the engine running - before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in a workshop - when the vehicle is being towed with the engine running - when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is fitted depending on version - following impact damage to the windscreen close to the detection camera - if the front bumper has been damaged - if the brake lamps are not working. This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle time between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. Level 2: visual and audible alert warning you that a collision is imminent. The message "Brake" is displayed. This level of alert is based on the time before collision. It takes account of the vehicle dynamics the speed of your vehicle and the one in front the environmental conditions the operation of the vehicle cornering pedals pressed etc. to trigger the alert at the best moment. Where the speed of your vehicle is too high approaching another vehicle the first level of alert may not be displayed: the level 2 alert may be displayed directly. Important: the level 1 alert is never displayed if the "Close" threshold has been selected.

slide 251:

6 Driving 249 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Modifying the alert trigger threshold This threshold determines how you wish to be warned of the presence of a vehicle moving or stationary in front of you or a pedestrian present in your traffic lane. The current threshold can be modified via the vehicle configuration menu in the screen. You can select one of three thresholds: - "Distant" - "Normal" - "Close". The last threshold selected is kept in memory when the ignition is switched off. Intelligent emergency braking assistance If the driver brakes but not sufficiently to avoid a collision this system will complete the braking within the limits of the laws of physics. This assistance will only be provided if you press the brake pedal.

slide 252:

Driving 250 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Active Safety Brake This function also called automatic emergency braking aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a frontal collision by your vehicle where the driver fails to react. Using a radar and a camera this function acts on the vehicles braking system. If the radar and the camera have confirmed the presence of a vehicle or a pedestrian this warning lamp flashes once the function is acting on the vehicles brakes. Important: if operation of the automatic emergency braking is triggered you should take back control of your vehicle and brake with the pedal to add to or finish the automatic braking action. The driver can take back control of the vehicle at any time by sharply turning the steering wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal. Operation of the function may be felt by slight vibration in the brake pedal. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop the automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 seconds. With a manual gearbox in the event of the automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop the engine may stall. With an automatic gearbox in the event of the automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop keep the brake pedal pressed to stop the vehicle moving off again. The point at which braking is triggered may be adjusted according to the reaction from the driver such as movement of the steering wheel or pressing the accelerator pedal.

slide 253:

6 Driving 251 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Deactivation / Activation Operating fault In the event of a fault you are alerted by the illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Clean the windscreen regularly particularly the area in front of the camera. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could mask the cameras view. Clean the front bumper removing mud snow ... If the front bumper is to be repainted contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Certain types of paint could interfere with the operation of the radar. Check that the sensors camera and radar are not covered by dirt mud frost snow... If the problem persists contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. By default the system is automatically activated at every engine start. The system can be deactivated or activated in the vehicle settings menu in the screen. Deactivation of the system is signalled by the illumination of this indicator lamp accompanied by the display of a message. There may be interference in the operation of the camera or it may not work at all in the following situations: - poor visibility inadequate street lighting falling snow heavy rain dense fog ... - dazzle headlamps of an approaching vehicle on the other side of the road low sun reflection on a wet road leaving a tunnel alternating between light and shade ... - camera or radar masked mud frost snow .... In these situations detection performance may be reduced.

slide 254:

Driving 252 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Fatigue detection system It is recommended that you take a break as soon as you feel tired or at least every two hours. Depending on version the function either has the "Driving time warning" only or this combined with the "Fatigue detection system". Driving time warning The system triggers an alert once it detects that the driver has not taken a break after two hours of driving at a speed above 40 mph 65 km/h. This alert takes the form of the display of a message encouraging you to take a break accompanied by an audible signal. If the driver does not follow this advice the alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. The system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Do not take the wheel if you are tired. As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops below 40 mph 65 km/h the system goes into standby. The driving time is counted again once the speed is above 40 mph 65 km/h. Activation / Deactivation The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu. For more information on the menu refer to the part covering your screen in the "Dashboard instruments" section. The state of the system stays in memory when the ignition is switched off. The system resets itself if one of the following conditions is met: - engine running the vehicle has been stationary for more than 15 minutes - the ignition has been switched off for a few minutes - the drivers seat belt is unfastened and their door is open.

slide 255:

6 Driving 253 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 After three first level alerts the system triggers a new alert with the message "Take a break" accompanied by a more pronounced audible signal. In certain driving conditions poor road surface or strong winds the system may give alerts independent of the drivers level of vigilance. The following situations may interfere with the operation of the system or prevent it working: - poor visibility inadequate lighting of the roadway falling snow heavy rain dense fog ... - dazzle headlamps of an oncoming vehicle low sun reflections on a damp road leaving a tunnel alternating shade and light ... - windscreen area located in front of the camera: dirty misted frost- covered snow-covered damaged or covered by a sticker - lane markings absent worn masked snow mud or multiple roadworks ... - close to the vehicle ahead lane markings not detected - roads that are narrow winding ... Once the system considers that the behaviour of the vehicle suggests a certain level of fatigue or inattention by the driver it triggers the first level of alert. The driver is then alerted by the message "Take care" accompanied by an audible signal. Fatigue detection system Depending on version the "Driving time warning" may be combined with the "Fatigue detection system". Using a camera placed at the top of the windscreen the system assesses the drivers level of vigilance by identifying variations in trajectory compared to the lane markings. This system is particularly suited to fast roads speed higher than 40 mph 65 km/h

slide 256:

Driving 254 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Lane Departure Warning System Activation / Deactivation Select the "Driving assistance" tab then "Lane departure detection assistance.". System which using a camera which recognises solid or broken lines detects the involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the ground. To provide safe driving the camera analyses the image then if the drivers attention drops and the speed is higher than 37 mph 60 km/h triggers a warning if there is an unexpected change of direction. This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads. This system is a driving aid that cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Activation and deactivation of the function is done via the Driving menu in the touch screen. The status of the system remains in memory when the ignition is switched off. Detection If an unexpected change of direction is detected you are alerted by this warning lamp flashing in the instrument panel and an audible signal. No warning is transmitted while the direction indicator is active and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicator is switched off. Operating fault In the event of a fault this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The detection may be impeded: - if the markings on the ground are worn - if there is little contrast between the markings on the ground and the road surface - if the windscreen is dirty - in certain weather conditions: fog heavy rain snow shade bright sunlight or direct exposure to the sun low sun leaving a tunnel ....

slide 257:

6 Driving 255 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Assisted Lane Departure Warning System Using a camera placed at the top of the windscreen to identify lane markings on the ground this system corrects the trajectory of the vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects a risk of involuntary crossing of a line. This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads. Conditions for operation The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 and 112 mph 65 and 180 km/h. The carriageway must have at least one lane marking solid or broken on the ground. The driver must hold the wheel with both hands. The change of trajectory is not accompanied by operation of the direction indicators. The ESC system must be activated. This system is a driving aid which cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver remains responsible for the vehicle in all circumstances. The system helps the driver only when there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily wandering from the lane it is being driven on. It does not manage the safe driving distance the speed of the vehicle or the brakes. The driver must hold the steering wheel in a way that allows control to be taken back in circumstances where the system is not able to intervene where there are no lane markings for example. It is necessary to observe the driving regulations and take a break every two hours.

slide 258:

Driving 256 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 While the direction indicators are on and for a few seconds after switching them off the system considers that any change of trajectory is voluntary and no correction is triggered during this period. However with the "Blind Spot Monitoring System" activated if the driver starts changing lane and another vehicle is detected in the vehicles blind spot the system will correct the trajectory of the vehicle even though the direction indicators are on. For more information on the Blind Spot Monitoring System refer to the corresponding section. If the system detects that the driver is not holding the wheel firmly enough during an automatic correction of trajectory it interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered to encourage the driver to take back control of the vehicle. If the driver wishes to maintain the trajectory of the vehicle they can prevent the correction by keeping a firm grip on the wheel during an avoiding manoeuvre for example. The correction is interrupted if the direction indicators are operated. Operation Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings detected it makes the correction to the trajectory necessary to return the vehicle to its initial path. The driver will then notice a turning movement of the steering wheel. This warning lamp flashes during trajectory correction.

slide 259:

6 Driving 257 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Driving situations and associated alerts To benefit from all of the information needed in the instrument panel you must first select the "DRIVING" display mode. The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed according to the driving situation. The display of these alerts is not sequential. State of the system Warning lamp Associated display and message Comment OFF System deactivated. ON System active conditions not met: - speed below 40 mph 65 km/h - no lane marking recognised - ESC deactivated or operation triggered - "sporty" driving. ON Automatic deactivation / standby of the system for example: detection of a trailer use of the "space-saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle. ON Detection of lane markings. Speed above 40 mph 65 km/h. ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side concerned or the risk of involuntary crossing is detected orange line. ON "Take back the wheel". - If during correction the system detects that the driver has not held the wheel for a few seconds it interrupts the correction and returns control to the driver. - During correction of the trajectory the system determines that the correction will not be enough and a solid line is crossed: the driver is warned that they must complete the correction of trajectory.

slide 260:

Driving 258 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Limits of operation The system goes into standby automatically in the following cases: - ESC deactivated or operation triggered - speed below 40 mph 65 km/h or above 112 mph 180 km/h - connected electrically to a trailer - use of the "space-saver" spare wheel detected as detection is not immediate deactivation of the system is recommended - dynamic driving style detected pressure on the brake or accelerator pedal - driving where there are no lane markings - operation of the direction indicators - driving in a tight corner - inactivity by the driver detected during correction. The system may not operate correctly or at all in the following situations: - conditions of poor visibility inadequate street lighting snowfall rain fog - dazzle headlamps of on oncoming vehicle low sun reflections on a wet road surface leaving a tunnel alternating light and shade - area of the windscreen in front of the camera dirty misted frosted snow-covered damaged or covered by a sticker - road markings absent worn hidden snow mud or multiple roadworks - running close to the vehicle in front the lane markings may not be detected - narrow twisty roads. Risk of undesirable operation Deactivation of the system is recommended in the following situations: - driving on a road surface in poor condition - unfavorable weather conditions - driving on slippery surfaces black ice. The system is not designed for the following driving situations: - driving on a speed circuit - driving with a trailer - driving on a rolling road - driving on unstable surfaces.

slide 261:

6 Driving 259 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Activation / Deactivation Activation / deactivation of the system is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. The state of the system stays in memory when the ignition is switched off. In the event of a fault with the system you are alerted by the illumination of these warning lamps in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Operating fault Select the "Driving assistance" tab then "Help staying in lane".

slide 262:

Driving 260 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Blind Spot Monitoring System This system warns the driver of the presence of another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their vehicle areas masked from the drivers field of vision as soon as this presents a potential danger. Activation / Deactivation Activation and deactivation of the system is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. Select the "Driving assistance" tab then "Blind spot monitoring". A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the side in question: - immediately when being overtaken - after a delay of about one second when overtaking a vehicle slowly. This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the drivers responsibility to constantly check the traffic to assess the distances and relative speeds of other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane. This system is a driving aid that cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel. To deactivate the system select "Blind spot monitoring" again in the "Driving assistance" tab. The indicator lamp goes off. Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers monitor the blind spots. The state of the system remains in memory on switching off the ignition. The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towbar approved by PEUGEOT.

slide 263:

6 Driving 261 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Operation The alert is given by a warning lamp which comes on in the door mirror on the side in question as soon as a vehicle - car lorry bicycle - is detected. The following conditions must be met for this: - all vehicles are moving in the same direction and in adjacent lanes - the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and 87 mph 12 and 140 km/h - you overtake a vehicle with a speed difference of less than 6 mph 10 km/h - a vehicle overtakes you with a speed difference of less than 15 mph 25 km/h - the traffic is flowing normally - in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre if this is prolonged and the vehicle being overtaken remains in the blind spot - you are driving on a straight or slightly curved road - your vehicle is not pulling a trailer a caravan... No alert will be given in the following situations: - in the presence of non-moving objects parked vehicles barriers street lamps road signs... - with vehicles moving in the opposite direction - driving on a winding road or a sharp corner - when overtaking or being overtaken by a very long vehicle lorry coach... which is at the same time detected at the rear in the blind spot angle and present in the drivers forward field of vision - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front and behind are confused with a lorry or a stationary object - when overtaking quickly.

slide 264:

Driving 262 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Operating fault High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the sensors. The system may suffer temporary interference in certain weather conditions rain hail.... In particular driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts for example the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle. In bad or wintry weather ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud ice or snow. Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects they may hamper the correct operation of the system. In the event of a fault this warning lamp flashes for a few moments in the instrument panel accompanied by illumination of the Service warning lamp and the display of a message. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door mirror on the side in question a correction of trajectory will be felt if you cross a lane marking with the direction indicators on to help you avoid a collision. Assisted Blind Spot Monitoring System Conditions for operation The following systems must be activated: - Blind Spot Monitoring System - Assisted Lane Departure Warning System. For more information on the Blind Spot Monitoring System and the Assisted Lane Departure Warning System refer to the corresponding sections.

slide 265:

6 Driving 263 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Parking sensors This system indicates the proximity of an obstacle examples: pedestrian vehicle tree gate which comes within the field of detection of sensors located in the bumper. Certain types of obstacle examples: stake roadworks cone detected initially will no longer be detected at the end of the manoeuvre if they are located in blind spots in the sensors field of detection. This system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Rear parking sensors The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear. This is confirmed by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you come out of reverse gear. Audible assistance The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. The sound emitted by the speaker right or left indicates the side on which the obstacle is located. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than approximately thirty centimetres the audible signal becomes continuous. Visual assistance This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars in the screen which move progressively nearer to the vehicle. When the obstacle is very close the "Danger" symbol is displayed in the screen.

slide 266:

Driving 264 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Front parking sensors The system will be deactivated automatically if a trailer is being towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on a towbar vehicle fitted with a towbar installed in line with the manufacturers recommendations. In bad or wintry weather ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged an audible signal long beep indicates that the sensors may be dirty. Certain sound sources motorcycle lorry pneumatic drill etc. may trigger the audible signals of the parking sensor system. The sound emitted by the speaker front or rear indicates whether the obstacle is in front or behind. Deactivation / Activation The deactivation or activation of the system is done in the vehicle parameters menu in the screen. The state of the system is held in memory when the ignition is switched off. The parking sensors are deactivated while the Park Assist system is measuring a space. For more information on Park Assist refer to the corresponding section. Operating fault High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle do not direct the lance within 30 cm of the sensors. In the event of a fault when reverse gear is engaged this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal short beep. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. In addition to the rear parking sensors the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is still below 6 mph 10 km/h. The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear if no further obstacles are detected or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph 10 km/h.

slide 267:

6 Driving 265 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Panoramic vision General points Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 With the engine running this system allows views of the vehicles surroundings to be displayed in the touch screen using one camera for Visiopark 1 and two cameras for Visiopark 2. The screen is divided into two parts: on the left a contextual view on the right a view from above the vehicle. The parking sensors complete the information on the view from above the vehicle. Different contextual views can be displayed in the left-hand part: - standard view - 180° view - reconstructed view. AUTO mode is activated by default. In this mode the system chooses the best view to display standard or zoom according to the information from the parking sensors. You can change the type of view at any time during a manoeuvre. F Press the button at the bottom left-hand corner of the touch screen. F Select the type of view: ● "Standard view" ● "180° view" ● "Zoom view" ● "AUTO view". The display is immediately updated with the type of view selected. The state of the system is not kept in memory when the ignition is switched off.

slide 268:

Driving 266 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 The images provided by the cameras may be distorted by the relief. In the presence of areas in shade or in conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate lighting the image may be darkened and with lower contrast. Maintenance In bad or wintry weather ensure that the sensors and camera lenses are not covered with mud ice or snow. Check the cleanliness of the camera lenses regularly. If necessary clean the camera lenses with a soft dry cloth. High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle keep the tip of the lance at least 30 cm from the cameras. This system is a visual aid that cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Principle of image reconstruction Using one or both cameras this system records the vehicles surroundings during the manoeuvre. An image from above your vehicle in its near surroundings is reconstructed in real time as you progress in the manoeuvre. This representation facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle to be seen. This reconstructed view is automatically deleted if the vehicle remains stationary for too long. With Visiopark 2 the view is reconstructed using both cameras when going forward and when reversing. On activation of the system it is possible that the central view is not reconstructed. If the system is activated after the vehicle has already been driven the central view may be completely reconstructed.

slide 269:

6 Driving 267 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Visiopark 1 Rear vision To activate the camera located in the tailgate engage reverse and keep the speed of the vehicle below 6 mph 10 km/h. The system is deactivated: - automatically above about 6 mph 10 km/h - automatically on opening the tailgate - when coming out of reverse the image remains displayed for 7 seconds - by pressing the red cross in the top left- hand corner of the touch screen. AUTO mode This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the rear bumper the automatic view changes from a rear view to a view from above as an obstacle is approached during a manoeuvre. Standard view The area behind the vehicle is displayed in the screen. The blue lines represent the width of your vehicle with the mirrors unfolded their direction changes with the position of the steering wheel. The red line represents a distance of 30 cm from the rear bumper and the two blue lines 1 m and 2 m respectively. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu.

slide 270:

Driving 268 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Zoom view The camera records the vehicles surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to reconstruct a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings allowing the vehicle to be manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. 180° view The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a parking bay making it possible to see the approach of vehicles pedestrians and cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. It is made up of 3 areas: left A centre B and right C. This view is available only from the view selection menu. Obstacles may appear further away than they actually are in reality. It is important to check the sides of the vehicle during the manoeuvre using the mirrors. The rear parking sensors also provide information on the vehicles surroundings.

slide 271:

6 Driving 269 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Visiopark 2 The vehicle has a camera at the front fitted in the grille and a camera at the rear located close to the tailgate opening control. Using these cameras the system displays the vehicles near surroundings in the touch screen offering views from the rear of the vehicle rear vision when reverse gear is engaged and views from the front of the vehicle front vision when the gearbox is in neutral or a gear is engaged. Rear vision The system is activated automatically on engaging reverse. The system is deactivated: - automatically above about 6 mph 10 km/h - when coming out of reverse the image remains displayed for 7 seconds - by pressing the red cross in the top left- hand corner of the touch screen. If a trailer is connected or a bicycle carrier fitted to the towball the area behind the vehicle in the view from above becomes black. Reconstruction of the surroundings is achieved by the front camera only.

slide 272:

Driving 270 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Front and rear vision AUTO mode This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the front bumper the automatic view changes from front view to the view from above as an obstacle is approached during a manoeuvre. Standard view The area in front of your vehicle is displayed in the screen. The blue lines represent the width of your vehicle with the mirrors unfolded their direction changes with the position of the steering wheel. The red line represents a distance of 30 cm from the front bumper and the two blue lines 1 m and 2 m respectively. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. With the engine running and the speed below 12 mph 20 km/h the system is activated in the Driving menu of the touch screen: F Select "Panoramic visual aid". AUTO mode is displayed by default with front vision if the gearbox is in neutral or with a gear engaged or with rear vision if reverse is engaged. The system is deactivated: - automatically above about 18 mph 30 km/h the image disappears temporarily from 12 mph 20 km/h - by pressing the red cross in the top left- hand corner of the touch screen.

slide 273:

6 Driving 271 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Zoom view The camera records the vehicles surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to reconstruct a view from above the front of the vehicle in its near surroundings allowing the vehicle to be manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. 180° view The 180° view facilitates the exit from of a parking bay in forward gear making it possible to see the approach of vehicles pedestrians and cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. It is made up of 3 areas: left A centre B and right C. This view is available only from the view selection menu. The rear vision views are similar to those for the Visiopark 1. For more information on Visiopark 1 refer to the corresponding section. Obstacles may appear further away than they actually are in reality. It is important to check the sides of the vehicle during the manoeuvre using the mirrors. The front and rear parking sensors also provide information on the vehicles surroundings.

slide 274:

Driving 272 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Park Assist This system provides active assistance with parking. It detects a parking space then operates the steering to park in the space. It operates the steering while the driver manages the accelerator brakes gears and clutch manual gearbox. During phases of entry into and exit from a parking space the system provides visual and audible information to the driver in order to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be necessary to move forwards and backwards more than once. During a manoeuvre the steering wheel turns quickly: do not hold the steering wheel do not place your hands between the spokes of the steering wheel and take care with loose and bulky clothing scarves ties handbags... - Risk of injury When Park Assist is activated it prevents a change to STOP mode of Stop Start. In STOP mode activation of Park Assist restarts the engine. This manoeuvring assistance system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must remain in control of their vehicle ensuring that the space remains clear throughout the manoeuvre. In some circumstances the sensors may not detect small obstacles located in their blind spots. The driver can take control at any time by gripping the steering wheel. The Park Assist system provides assistance for the following manoeuvres: A. Entry into a parallel parking space B. Exit from a parallel parking space C. Bay parking The Park Assist system cannot work with the engine off.

slide 275:

6 Driving 273 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 The Park Assist system takes control of the power steering for a maximum of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you think that your vehicle is not positioned correctly you should then take control of the steering to carry out the manoeuvre. The sequence of manoeuvres and the driving instructions are displayed in the instrument panel. You should always check the surroundings of your vehicle before starting a manoeuvre. The assistance is deactivated: the display of this symbol indicates that the steering manoeuvres are no longer controlled by the system: you must take control of the steering. The assistance is activated: the display of this symbol and a speed limit indicate that the steering manoeuvres are controlled by the system: do not touch the steering wheel. The parking sensors function is not available during parking space measurement. It intervenes later when manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle is approaching an obstacle: the audible signal becomes continuous when the obstacle is less than thirty centimetres away. If you have deactivated the parking sensors they are automatically reactivated during assisted parking manoeuvres. Activation of Park Assist deactivates the Blind Spot Monitoring System.

slide 276:

Driving 274 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Operation Assistance with parallel parking manoeuvres F Select "Park Assist" in the Driving menu of the touch screen to activate the function. To enter a parking space the system does not identify spaces that are clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle. This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm activation of the function. F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph 20 km/h and select "Enter parking slot" in the touch screen. F Operate the direction indicator on the parking side chosen to activate the measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles. F Drive slowly following the instructions until the system finds a free space. F When you have identified a parking space.

slide 277:

6 Driving 275 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 F Move forwards slowly until a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal asking you to engage reverse gear. F Select reverse release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 4 mph 7 km/h. F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 4 mph 7 km/h move forwards and backwards aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre. F At the end of the manoeuvre the indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.

slide 278:

Driving 276 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 Assistance in exiting from a parallel parking space F Select "Park Assist" in the "Driving" menu of the touch screen to activate the function. F Press on "Exit parking slot" in the touch screen. F Operate the direction indicator for the exit side chosen. F Engage reverse or forward gear and release the steering wheel. F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 3 mph 5 km/h move forwards and backwards aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre. F When you want to leave a parallel parking space start the engine. This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm the activation of the function. The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicles front wheels are clear of the parking space. At the end of the manoeuvre the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.

slide 279:

6 Driving 277 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 F Select "Park Assist" in the "Driving" menu of the touch screen to activate the function. Assistance with bay parking manoeuvres This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm the activation of the function. F Operate the direction indicator on the parking side chosen to activate the measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles. F Move forwards slowly until a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal asking you to engage reverse gear. F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph 20 km/h and select "Start parking in a bay" in the touch screen. When several successive bays are found the vehicle will be directed towards the last one. F Once you have identified a parking zone: F Drive slowly following the instructions until the system finds a free space.

slide 280:

Driving 278 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 F Select reverse release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 4 mph 7 km/h. F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 4 mph 7 km/h follow the instructions displayed in the instrument panel aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre. At the end of the manoeuvre the indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control. During parking and exit from parking manoeuvres the reversing camera and 360 Vision functions may come into operation. They facilitate monitoring of the surroundings of the vehicle by displaying additional information in the instrument panel. For more information on Panoramic vision refer to the corresponding section. During a bay parking manoeuvre the Park Assist system is automatically deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is within 50 cm of an obstacle.

slide 281:

6 Driving 279 3008-2_en_Chap06_conduite_ed01-2016 The system is deactivated by pressing the control. The system is deactivated automatically: - on switching off the ignition - if the engine stalls - if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes of selection of the type of manoeuvre - after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during a manoeuvre - if the road wheel anti-slip regulation ASR is triggered - if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the stated limit - when the driver interrupts movement of the steering wheel - after 4 manoeuvre cycles - on opening the drivers door - if one of the front wheels encounters an obstacle. The operation indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal. The driver should then take back control of the vehicles steering. Deactivation The system is switched off automatically: - when towing a trailer connected electrically - if the drivers door is opened - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph 70 km/h. To switch the system of for a prolonged period contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Operating faults In the event of a fault with the power steering this warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel accompanied by a message. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Switching off If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the space is too great the system may not be able to measure the space. Anything projecting beyond the envelope of the vehicle a ladder on the roof for example is not taken into account by the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre. In bad weather or in winter ensure that the sensors are not covered by road dirt ice or snow. In the event of a fault have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If the system is deactivated during a manoeuvre the drive should reactivate it to repeat the measurement. In the event of a fault this warning lamp flashes for a few seconds accompanied by an audible signal. If the fault occurs during the use of the system the warning lamp goes off. High pressure jet washing When washing your vehicle keep the lance at least 30 cm away from the sensors.

slide 282:

3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 RECOMMENDS PEUGEOT TOTAL A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER BETTER PERFORMANCE 2015 was marked by PEUGEOTs return to Rally-Raid one of the most difficult motorsport disciplines in the world. To obtain the best performance in these trials PEUGEOT Sport chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the PEUGEOT 2008 DKR a lubricant of high technology which protects the engine in the most severe conditions. TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL RD. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT vehicles its innovative technology significantly reduces CO 2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.

slide 283:

7 Practical information 281 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Fuel tank Fuel tank capacity: approximately 53 litres. When the low fuel level is reached in the fuel tank this warning lamp comes on on the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. When it first comes on there remains approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank. Low fuel level A label affixed to the inside of the flap reminds you of the type of fuel to be used depending on your engine. Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres in order to be registered by the fuel gauge. Opening the filler cap may create a noise a caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal resulting from the sealing of the fuel system. To fill the tank in complete safety: F the engine must be switched off F with the vehicle unlocked press the rear part of the filler flap F turn the filler cap to the left F remove the filler cap and hook it onto the clip located on the inside of the filler flap F fill the tank but do not continue after the 3rd cut-off of the pump this could cause malfunctions. If your vehicle is fitted with Stop Start never refuel with the engine in STOP mode you must switch off the ignition using the key or the START/ STOP button if your vehicle has Keyless Entry and Starting. Until sufficient fuel is added this warning lamp appears every time the ignition is switched on accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. When driving this message and audible signal are repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops towards "0". Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. For more information on Running out of fuel Diesel refer to the corresponding section. Refuelling When you have filled the tank: F put the filler cap back in place F turn it to the right F close the filler flap.

slide 284:

282 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Misfuel prevention Diesel Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel. Located in the filler neck the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed. When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type filler nozzle. Depending on the country of sale. It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device and pour slowly. Travelling abroad As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with misfuel protection so before travelling abroad we recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you intend to travel. Operation

slide 285:

7 Practical information 283 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Fuel used for petrol engines The petrol engines are compatible with bio-fuels that conform to current and future European standards and can be obtained from filling stations: Fuel used for Diesel engines The Diesel engines are compatible with biofuels that conform to current and future European standards and can be obtained from filling stations: - Diesel fuel that meets standard EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 possibly containing up to 7 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester - Petrol that meets the EN228 standard mixed with a bio- fuel meeting the EN15376 standard. The only petrol additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715001 standard. The use of any other type of bio fuel vegetable or animal oils pure or diluted domestic fuel... is strictly prohibited risk of damage to the engine and fuel system. The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard EN16709 is possible in your Diesel engine. However this use even occasional requires strict application of the special servicing conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". - Diesel fuel that meets standard EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 possibly containing up to 10 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester - Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 possibly containing up to 7 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester. The only Diesel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715000 standard. For more information contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 286:

284 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Towing a trailer Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage but it may also be used for towing a trailer. We recommend the use of genuine PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If the towbar is not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer it must still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturers instructions. Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care. For more information on Driving advice particularly when towing refer to the corresponding section. For more information on Weights and the towed loads which apply to your vehicle refer to the corresponding section. You must observe the maximum trailer weight indicated on the registration certificate or in the technical specification for your vehicle.

slide 287:

7 Practical information 285 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Towbar with quickly detachable towball Presentation A. Locked position The latch is positioned to the right. The trigger is facing toward the rear. B. Unlocked position The latch is positioned to the left. The trigger is facing toward the front. Observe the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. For information on the trailer weights for your vehicle refer to the "Technical data" section. For driving safely when Towing a trailer refer to the corresponding section. No tools are required to install or remove the towball on this genuine towbar system. 1. Carrier. 2. Protective plug. 3. Safety eye. 4. Trauiler wiring harness connection socket. 5. Detachable towball. 6. Locking / unlocking latch. 7. Locking / unlocking trigger. 8. Key-operated safety lock. 9. Safety lock protective cap. 10. Stowing bag.

slide 288:

286 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Before each use Check that the towball is correctly fitted verifying the follow points: - the towball is correctly engaged position A - the safety lock is on and the key removed the trigger can no longer be operated - the towball must not be able to move in its carrier test by shaking it with your hand. If the towball is not locked the trailer could separate - Risk of an accident During use Never release the locking system with a trailer or load carrier on the towball. Never exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle plus trailer - the Gross Train Weight or GTW. You must not exceed the maximum nose weight on the towbar: if exceeded this could result in detachment from the vehicle - Risk of an accident Check that the trailer lighting and signalling work correctly. Before setting off check the adjustment of the headlamp beam height. For more information on Adjusting the headlamp beam height refer to the corresponding section. Following use When travelling without a trailer or load on a towbar-mounted carrier the towball must be removed and the protective plug inserted in the carrier. This measure applies particularly where the towball might obscure visibility of the number plate or its lighting. Maintenance Correct operation is only possible if the towball and its carrier are kept clean. Before cleaning the vehicle with a high- pressure jet wash the towball must be removed and the protective plug fitted to the carrier. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for any work on the towbar system.

slide 289:

7 Practical information 287 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Fitting the towball F Below the rear bumper unclip and remove the protective plug from the carrier. F On the towball push the latch to the left and hold it in this position. F At the same time press the trigger forward to release the mechanism position B. F Insert the end of the towball into the carrier pushing it in as far as it will go. F Ensure that the two pins are in contact with the cut-outs in the carrier that the trigger has returned to rear and the latch to the right to secure the mechanism position A. F Insert the key in the lock and turn it to the right. F Remove the key from the lock. F Install and clip in place the protective cap by rotating it to the left.

slide 290:

288 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Removing the towball F Attach the trailer to the towball. F Attach the trailer safety cable to the eye provided on the towball carrier. F Raise the protective cover on the socket and connect the trailer wiring harness. F Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the socket on the carrier. F Detach the trailer safety cable from the eye on the carrier. F Detach the trailer from the towball. F Unclip and remove the protective cap by turning it to the right. F Insert the key in the lock and turn it to the left. F Remove the key from the lock.

slide 291:

7 Practical information 289 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 F On the towball push the latch to the left and hold it in this position. F At the same time push the trigger forward to release the mechanism position B. F Press the trigger fully in and remove the towball by pulling it toward you. F Install the protective plug on the carrier located below the rear bumper. F Stow the towball in its bag.

slide 292:

290 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Load reduction mode Energy economy mode Switching to economy mode A message appears in the instrument panel screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby. Exiting economy mode These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven. In order to restore the use of these functions immediately start the engine and let it run: - for less than ten minutes to use the equipment for approximately five minutes - for more than ten minutes to use the equipment for up to approximately thirty minutes. Let the engine run for the duration specified to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the engine in order to charge the battery. System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery. When the vehicle is being driven the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions such as the air conditioning the heated rear screen... The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit. System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery. After the engine has stopped you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system windscreen wipers dipped beam headlamps courtesy lamps etc. for a maximum combined duration of about forty minutes. A flat battery prevents the engine from starting. For more information on the 12 V battery refer to the corresponding section. If a telephone call is being made at this time it will be maintained for around 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands- free system of your audio system.

slide 293:

7 Practical information 291 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Very cold climate screens Removable protective screens which prevent the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan. Before fitting or removing a screen ensure that the engine is off and the cooling fan has stopped. Depending on the country of sale. It is recommended that the screens be fitted and removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Fitting The arrangement is of two symmetrical parts which are placed either side of the radar location in the front bumper. Removing F Insert a finger into the cut-out at the top of the screen. F Pull toward you to unclip the screen. Repeat these operations for the other screen. Do not forget to remove the very cold climate screens: - when the ambient temperature exceeds 10° C - when towing - for running at speeds above 75 mph 120 km/h. F Offer up the corresponding screen to the lower grille in the bumper. F First engage the two lower fixing lugs in the bumper. F Raise the screen until the three upper fixing lugs engage in the bumper. F Check that the screen is secure by pressing around its edge. Repeat these operations for the other screen.

slide 294:

292 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Snow chains In wintry conditions snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking. Advice on installation F If you have to fit the chains during a journey stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road. F Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle. F Fit the chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer. F Move off gently and drive for a few moments without exceeding 30 mph 50 km/h. F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened. Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to your vehicle: For more information on snow chains contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. It is strongly recommended that before you leave you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface. The snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels. Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum running speed authorised. Avoid driving with snow chains on roads that have been cleared of snow to avoid damaging your vehicles tyres and the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. Original tyre size Maximum link size 215/65 R17 9 mm 225/55 R18 9 mm 205/55 R19 9 mm 235/50 R19 cannot be fitted with chains

slide 295:

7 Practical information 293 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Fitting roof bars Fitting directly to the roof Maximum load on the roof bars evenly spread and with a load height not exceeding 40 cm except for bicycle carriers: 80 kg. For more information contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If the height exceeds 40 cm adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the vehicles anchorage points. For transporting objects which are longer than the vehicle refer to local legislation. Recommendations - Distribute the load evenly avoiding overloading on one side. - Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof. - Lash the load securely. - Drive gently: the vehicle will be more susceptible to the effects of side winds and the stability of the vehicle may be affected. - On a long journey check the security of the load at every stop. - Remove the roof bars once they are no longer needed. As a safety measure and to avoid damaging the roof it is essential to use the transverse bars approved for your vehicle. Observe the instructions on fitting and use contained in the guide supplied with the roof bars. You must attach the transverse bars only at the four anchorage points located at the edge of the roof. These points are hidden by the vehicles doors when closed. The roof bar fixings include a stud which must be fitted to the aperture at each of the anchorage points. Fitting on longitudinal bars You must attach the transverse bars at the engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.

slide 296:

294 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Bonnet F Pull the release lever located at the bottom of the door aperture towards you. Opening F Open the left hand front door. F Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet. Closing Before doing anything under the bonnet deactivate the Stop Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode. When the engine is hot handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with care risk of burns using the protected area. When the bonnet is open take care not to damage the safety catch. Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet it is recommended that exposure to water rain washing ... be limited. F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. F Take the stay out of its support slot. F Clip the stay back into its housing. F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its travel. F Pull on the bonnet to check that it has latched correctly. The location of the interior bonnet release lever prevents opening of the bonnet when the left hand front door is shut. Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions. The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.

slide 297:

7 Practical information 295 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Petrol engines 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid reservoir. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Remote earth point -. 6. Fusebox. 7. Air filter. 8. Engine oil dipstick. 9. Engine oil filler cap.

slide 298:

296 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Diesel engines 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid reservoir. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Remote earth point -. 6. Fusebox. 7. Air filter. 8. Engine oil dipstick. 9. Engine oil filler cap. The Diesel fuel system operates under very high pressure. All work on the system must only be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 299:

7 Practical information 297 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Checking levels The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel for vehicles so equipped or using the dipstick. Engine oil level Checking using the dipstick Check all of these levels regularly in line with the manufacturers service schedule. Top them up if necessary unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. It is normal to top-up the oil level between two services or oil changes. PEUGEOT recommends that you check the level and top- up if necessary every 3 000 miles 5 000 kms. A MAX B MIN If you find that the level is above the A mark or below the B mark do not start the engine. - If the level is above the MAX mark risk of damage to the engine contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. - If the level is below the MIN mark you must top-up the engine oil. Oil grade Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil check that the oil is the correct grade for your engine and conforms to the manufacturers recommendations. Take care when working under the bonnet as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot risk of burns and the cooling fan could start at any time even with the ignition off. To ensure that the reading is correct your vehicle must be parked on a level surface with the engine having been off for more than 30 minutes. The location of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and remove it completely. F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean non-fluffy cloth. F Refit the dipstick and push fully down then pull it out again to make the visual check: the correct level is between the marks A and B.

slide 300:

298 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Topping-up the engine oil level The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler aperture. F Add oil in small quantities avoiding any spills on engine components risk of fire. F Wait a few minutes before checking the level again using the dipstick. F Add more oil if necessary. F After checking the level carefully refit the oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube. After topping-up the oil the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel is not valid during the 30 minutes after topping-up. Engine oil change Refer to the manufacturers service schedule for details of the interval for this operation. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system never use additives in the engine oil. Brake fluid level Changing the fuid Refer to the manufacturers service schedule for details of the interval for this operation. Fluid specifcation The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturers recommendations. The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not check the brake pad wear.

slide 301:

7 Practical information 299 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Screenwash fluid level Top up the level when necessary. Fluid specifcation For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing this fluid must not be topped up or replaced with plain water. In wintry conditions it is recommended that you use an ethyl alcohol or methanol based fluid. Coolant level Check the coolant level regularly. It is normal to top-up this fluid between services. When the engine is hot the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan. In addition as the cooling system is pressurised wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work. To avoid the risk of scalding in the event of an urgent need to top-up with a cloth around the cap unscrew it by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped remove the cap and top-up the level. Once the pressure has dropped remove the cap and top-up the level. The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades. The check and top-up must only be done with the engine cold. A low coolant level presents a risk of serious damage to your engine. The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark it is essential to top-up. Fluid specifcation The coolant must conform to the manufacturers recommendations.

slide 302:

300 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Used products Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin. Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive. Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground. Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop France or to an authorised waste disposal site. Topping-up The reservoir must be topped-up without delay by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The additive reservoir low level is indicated by fixed illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by an audible signal and a message that the particle filter additive level is too low. Diesel fuel additive level Diesel with particle filter

slide 303:

7 Practical information 301 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Checks Particle filter Diesel illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen. As soon as the traffic conditions permit Versions equipped with Stop Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph 60 km/h until the warning lamp goes off. If the warning lamp stays on this indicates a low additive level. For more information on Checking levels refer to the corresponding section. Unless otherwise indicated check these components in accordance with the manufacturers service schedule and according to your engine. Otherwise have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Air filter and passenger compartment filter Refer to the manufacturers service schedule for details of the replacement intervals for these components. Oil filter Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed. Refer to the manufacturers service schedule for details of the replacement interval for this component. 12 V battery The battery does not require any maintenance. However check regularly that the terminals are correctly tightened versions without quick release terminals and that the connections are clean. For more information and the precautions to take before starting work on the 12 V battery refer to the corresponding section. Depending on the environment e.g. dusty atmosphere and the use of the vehicle e.g. city driving replace them twice as often if necessary. A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours. The start of saturation of the particle filter is indicated by the temporary On a new vehicle the first particle filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burning" smell which is perfectly normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle you may in exceptional circumstances notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

slide 304:

302 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Automatic gearbox The gearbox does not require any maintenance no oil change. Refer to the manufacturers service schedule for the checking interval for this component. Electric parking brake This system does not require any routine servicing. However in the event of a problem have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Brake pads Brake wear depends on the style of driving particularly in the case of vehicles used in town over short distances. It may be necessary to Brake disc wear For information on checking brake disc wear contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. For more information on the Electric parking brake refer to the corresponding section. Manual gearbox The gearbox does not require any maintenance no oil change. Refer to the manufacturers service schedule for the checking interval for this component. Only use products recommended by PEUGEOT or products of equivalent quality and specification. In order to optimise the operation of units as important as those in the braking system PEUGEOT selects and offers very specific products. After washing the vehicle dampness or in wintry conditions ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Make light brake applications to dry and defrost the brakes. have the condition of the brakes checked even between vehicle services. Unless there is a leak in the circuit a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

slide 305:

7 Practical information 303 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 AdBlue ® and SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel engines To assure respect for the environment and conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions standard without adversely affecting the performance or fuel consumption of Diesel engines PEUGEOT has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with an effective system that associates SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction with a particle filter FAP for the treatment of exhaust gases. SCR system Using a fluid called AdBlue ® containing urea a catalytic converter turns up to 85 of nitrogen oxides NOx into nitrogen and water which are harmless to health and the environment. The AdBlue ® is held in a special tank with a capacity of about 17 litres: this provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles 20 000 km. An alert is triggered automatically to warn you when the reserve level is reached: you can then drive about 1 500 miles 2 400 km before the tank is empty. During each scheduled service of your vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop the AdBlue ® tank is refilled in order to allow normal operation of the SCR system. If the estimated mileage of your vehicle between two services is greater than 12 500 miles 20 000 km it will be necessary to top-up the AdBlue ® . Once the AdBlue ® tank is empty a system required by regulations prevents starting of the engine. If the SCR system is faulty the level of emissions from your vehicle will no longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle becomes polluting. In the event of a confirmed fault with the SCR system you must go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible: after a running distance of 650 miles 1 100 km a system will be triggered automatically to prevent engine starting. In either case a range indicator gives you the distance you can travel before the vehicle is immobilised. Freezing of the AdBlue ® AdBlue ® freezes at temperatures below around -11°C. The SCR system includes a heater for the AdBlue ® tank allowing you to continue driving in all weather conditions.

slide 306:

304 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Topping-up the AdBlue ® Precautions in use Use only AdBlue ® fluid that meets the ISO 22241 standard. The supply in a non-drip container or bottle simplifies topping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre half a US gallon bottles or 5 litre containers from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of children in its original container or bottle. Never transfer AdBlue ® to another container: it would lose its purity. Never dilute AdBlue ® with water. Never pour AdBlue ® into the Diesel fuel tank. Never top-up from an AdBlue ® dispenser reserved for heavy goods vehicles. Filling the AdBlue ® tank is an operation included in every routine service on your vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Nevertheless given the capacity of the tank it may be necessary to top-up the fluid between services more particularly if an alert warning lamps and a message signals the requirement. You can go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If you envisage topping-up yourself please read the following warnings carefully. AdBlue ® is a urea-based solution. This liquid is non-flammable colourless and odourless kept in a cool area. In the event of contact with the skin wash the affected area with soap and water. In the event of contact with the eyes wash irrigate the eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If a burning sensation or irritation persists get medical attention. If swallowed immediately wash out the mouth with clean water and then drink plenty of water. In certain conditions high ambient temperature for example the risk of release of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on mucous membranes eyes nose and throat.

slide 307:

7 Practical information 305 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Recommendations on storage Procedure Park the vehicle F Before topping-up ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. F Switch off the ignition to stop the engine and remove the key from the switch. or F With Keyless Entry and Starting press the "START/STOP" button to stop the engine. Open the fller F With the vehicle unlocked open the fuel filler flap the blue filler cap for the AdBlue ® tank is located to the left of the black fuel filler cap. F Turn the blue cap a 6 th of a turn anti- clockwise. F Remove the blue cap downwards. Never store bottles of AdBlue ® in your vehicle. Before topping-up in wintry conditions ensure that the temperature is above -11°C. Otherwise the AdBlue ® may be frozen and so cannot be poured into its tank. Park your vehicle in a warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried out. AdBlue ® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended that bottles be stored in a cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Under these conditions the fluid can be kept for at least a year. If the additive has frozen it can be used once it has completely thawed out. Do not dispose of AdBlue ® bottles or containers in the household waste. Place them in a container provided for this purpose or take them to your dealer.

slide 308:

306 Practical information 3008-2_en_Chap07_infos-pratiques_ed01-2016 Top-up F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue ® . After first checking the use-by date read carefully the instructions on use on the label before pouring the contents of the bottle into your vehicles AdBlue ® tank. F After emptying the bottle wipe away any spillage around the tank filler using a damp cloth. Reft the fller cap F Refit the blue cap and turn it a 6 th of a turn clockwise to its stop. F Close the filler flap. Important: if your vehicles AdBlue ® tank is completely empty - which is confirmed by the alert messages and the impossibility of starting the engine - you must add at least 4 litres and no more than 10 litres. If any fluid is spilt or splashed wash immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the fluid has crystallised clean it off using a sponge and hot water. Important: when topping-up after running out of AdBlue signalled by the message "Top-up AdBlue: starting impossible" you must wait for about 5 minutes before switching the ignition on again without opening the drivers door unlocking the vehicle introducing the remote control key into the ignition switch or placing the Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key inside the vehicle. Switch on the ignition then wait for 10 seconds before starting the engine.

slide 309:

8 In the event of a breakdown 307 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Warning triangle As a safety precaution before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility vest. Storage compartment A compartment for stowing a warning triangle is provided in the tailgate interior trim. F Open the tailgate. F Release the cover by turning the fixing a quarter turn anti-clockwise. For other versions refer to the instructions provided with the triangle. Assembling the triangle For versions supplied with a triangle as original equipment: F remove the triangle from its case F unfold the legs F open out the two sides of the triangle F clip together to complete the assembly. Positioning the triangle F Place the triangle behind the vehicle as required by local legislation.

slide 310:

In the event of a breakdown 308 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Running out of fuel Diesel On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel. For more information on Misfuel prevention Diesel refer to the corresponding section. BlueHDi engines If the engine does not start first time dont keep trying but start the procedure again from the beginning. F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of Diesel. F Switch on the ignition without starting the engine. F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the ignition. F Repeat the operation 10 times. F Operate the starter to run the engine.

slide 311:

8 In the event of a breakdown 309 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Tool kit This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle. Its content depends on your vehicles equipment: - temporary puncture repair kit - spare wheel. Access to the tools The main tools are stowed in the boot under the floor. For access to them: F open the boot F place the adjustable boot floor in the high position F raise the floor past the two retractable stops F lay the floor on these two stops to hold it up. For versions with a temporary puncture repair kit: F unclip the two fixings to open its cover.

slide 312:

In the event of a breakdown 310 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 For versions with a spare wheel: F unclip the carrier box by pulling it up F unclip the two fixings to open its cover. All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to equipment. Do not use them for any other purposes. The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. Do not use any jack other than the one supplied with this vehicle. If the vehicle does not have its original jack contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain the correct jack for it. The jack meets European standards as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/CE. The jack does not require any maintenance.

slide 313:

8 In the event of a breakdown 311 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 List of tools 4. Temporary puncture repair kit. Includes a 12 V compressor and a cartridge of sealant to effect a temporary repair to a tyre and adjust the tyre pressure. For more information on Towing the vehicle and using the removable towing eye refer to the corresponding section. 1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle depending on equipment. 2. Socket for the security bolts located in the glove box depending on equipment. For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts. 3. Removable towing eye. For versions with a temporary puncture repair kit: For more information on the Temporary puncture repair kit refer to the corresponding section. For versions with a spare wheel: 5. Wheelbrace. For removing the wheel trim and removing the wheel bolts. 6. Jack with integral handle. For raising the vehicle. 7. Wheel bolt cover remover depending on equipment. For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on alloy wheels. For more information on the Spare wheel refer to the corresponding section.

slide 314:

In the event of a breakdown 312 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Temporary puncture repair kit Comprising a compressor and a sealant cartridge it allows the temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre located on the tyre tread or shoulder. Composition of the kit 1. 12 V compressor with integral pressure gauge. 2. Sealant cartridge with integral hose. 3. Speed limit sticker. The speed limit sticker must be secured to the interior of the vehicle in the drivers field of vision to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km/h when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit. The vehicles electric system allows the connection of the compressor for long enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture repair.

slide 315:

8 In the event of a breakdown 313 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Repair procedure F Switch off the ignition. F Secure the speed limit sticker inside the vehicle. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. F Connect the pipe from the compressor to the sealant cartridge. F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be repaired and place it in a clean area. F Connect the hose from the sealant cartridge to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly. F Turn the sealant cartridge and secure it in the cut-out provided on the compressor.

slide 316:

In the event of a breakdown 314 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained this indicates that the tyre is not repairable contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance. Take care the sealant product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children. The use-by date is marked on the cartridge. After use do not discard the cartridge by the roadside take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. Dont forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position. F Uncoil fully the electric cable stowed under the compressor. F Connect the compressors plug to the vehicles 12 V socket. F Switch on the ignition. F Start the compressor by placing the switch at the "I" position and leave it running until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bar. The sealant product is injected into the tyre under pressure do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation risk of splashing and stains. Only the 12 V sockets located at the front of the vehicle and in the boot can be used to power the compressor. The 12 V socket located at the back of the centre console is not suitable for this purpose.

slide 317:

8 In the event of a breakdown 315 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 F Place the switch in the "O" position. F Remove the kit. F Drive immediately for approximately three miles five kilometres at reduced speed between 15 and 35 mph 20 and 60 km/h to plug the puncture. F Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit. Checking / adjusting tyre pressures You can also use the compressor without injecting sealant to check and if necessary adjust the tyre pressures F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and place it in a clean area. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly. F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position. F Uncoil fully the electric cable stowed under the compressor. F Connect the compressors plug to the vehicles 12 V socket. F Switch on the ignition.

slide 318:

In the event of a breakdown 316 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 F Start the compressor by placing the switch at the "I" position and adjust the pressure to the value shown on the vehicles tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black button on the compressor pipe at the valve connector. F Once the correct pressure is reached put the switch to the "O" position. F Remove the kit then stow it. The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label. Should the pressure of one or more tyres be adjusted it is necessary to reinitialise the under-inflation detection system. For more information on Under- inflation detection refer to the corresponding section.

slide 319:

8 In the event of a breakdown 317 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Spare wheel Access to the spare wheel The spare wheel is installed in the boot under the floor. For access to the spare wheel first refer to section on Access to the tools. Depending on version the spare wheel is a standard size steel or alloy wheel. For some countries of sale it is the "space saver" type. Procedure for replacing a wheel with a punctured or damaged tyre by the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle. Removing the wheel F Slacken the central nut. F Remove the fixing parts nut and bolt. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the rear. F Take the wheel out of the boot.

slide 320:

In the event of a breakdown 318 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Putting the wheel back in place F Put the wheel back in its housing. F Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. F Position the fixing parts nut and bolt in the middle of the wheel. Tyre under-infation detection The spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor. The punctured tyre must be repaired or replaced by by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F Tighten fully until the central nut clicks to retain the wheel correctly. F Return the tool box to the middle of the wheel and clip it in place.

slide 321:

8 In the event of a breakdown 319 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Removing a wheel mode P for an automatic gearbox. List of operations Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level stable and non-slippery. Apply the parking brake unless it has been programmed to automatic mode switch off the ignition and engage first gear to lock the wheels. Check that the braking warning lamps in the instrument panel are on not flashing. The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. If necessary place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack use an axle stand. F Remove the bolt cover from each of the bolts using the tool 7 according to equipment. F Fit the security socket 2 on the wheelbrace 5 to slacken the security bolt. F Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only. Wheel with wheel trim When removing the wheel first remove the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture using the wheelbrace. When refitting the wheel after tightening the wheel bolts refit the wheel trim starting by placing its aperture in line with the valve and then pushing it into place all round its edge with the palm of your hand.

slide 322:

In the event of a breakdown 320 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 F Place the foot of the jack 6 on the ground and ensure that it is directly below the front A or rear B jacking point provided on the underbody whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed. Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose the jack may slip or drop - Risk of injury Take care to position the jack only at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle ensuring that the head of the jack is centred under the contact area of the vehicle. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or the jack dropping - Risk of injury F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place. F Remove the wheel. F Extend the jack 6 until its head comes into contact with the jacking point A or B used the contact area A or B on the vehicle must be engaged with the central part of the head of the jack. F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare not punctured wheel easily.

slide 323:

8 In the event of a breakdown 321 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 List of operations F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop. F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security socket 2. F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only. F Lower the vehicle fully. F Fold the jack 6 and detach it. Fitting a wheel Fitting a steel or "space- saver" spare wheel If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels when tightening the bolts on fitting it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the steel or "space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical contact of each bolt.

slide 324:

In the event of a breakdown 322 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 F Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only. F Refit the bolt covers to the bolts according to equipment. F Store the tools. F Tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 fitted with the security socket 2. After changing a wheel To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly first remove the central cover. When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel do not exceed 50 mph 80 km/h. Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. Have the punctured wheel repaired and replace it on the vehicle as soon as possible.

slide 325:

8 In the event of a breakdown 323 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Changing a bulb The headlamps have polycarbonate lenses with a protective coating: F do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth nor with a detergent or solvent product F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product F when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long so as not to damage their protective coating and seals. Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for several minutes risk of serious burns. F Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers use a lint-free cloth. It is imperative to use only anti- ultraviolet UV type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp. Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification. Front lamps Model with "Full LED" headlamps 1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps LEDs. 2. Main beam / dipped beam headlamps LEDs. 3. Direction indicators LEDs. 4. Foglamps LEDs. In some weather conditions e.g. low temperature or humidity the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes. Light-emitting diodes LEDs For the replacement of this type of lamp go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 326:

In the event of a breakdown 324 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Model with halogen headlamps 1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps LEDs. 2. Dipped beam headlamps H7. 3. Main beam headlamps HB3. 4. Direction indicators PWY24W. 5. Foglamps H11. For bulbs with lugs type H7... take care to observe their correct installation so as to ensure the best lighting performance. LEDs: light-emitting diodes. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps For the replacement of this type of LED lamp and lighting guides contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from PEUGEOT dealers. Changing direction indicator bulbs on models with halogen headlamps Rapid flashing of the direction indicator warning lamp right or left indicates the failure of a bulb on that side. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and pull it out. F Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it. For reassembly carry out these operations in reverse order.

slide 327:

8 In the event of a breakdown 325 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Amber coloured bulbs such as the direction indicators must be replaced with bulbs of identical specifications and colour. When refitting close the protective cover carefully to preserve the sealing of the headlamp. Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs on models with halogen headlamps F Remove the protective cover by pulling the tab. F Pull the connector toward the rear to disconnect it. F Pull the bulb toward the rear to extract it. F Change the bulb. To reassemble carry out these operations in reverse order. Changing main beam headlamp bulbs on models with halogen headlamps F Remove the protective cover by pulling the tab. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull it out. F Pull the bulb out and change it. To reassemble carry out these operations in reverse order.

slide 328:

In the event of a breakdown 326 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Changing foglamp bulbs on models with halogen headlamps F Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in the finisher. F Pull and lever to unclip the front bumper finisher. F Using a Torx screwdriver remove the two module fixing screws. F Remove the module from its housing. F Disconnect the bulb holder connector. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and pull it out. F Change the assembly. To refit carry out these operations in reverse order. To replace this type of bulb you can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 329:

8 In the event of a breakdown 327 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Changing the side spotlamps LEDs For the replacement of this type of light emitting diode lamp contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Changing direction indicator side repeaters LEDs For the replacement of this type of light- emitting diode lamp contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 330:

In the event of a breakdown 328 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Direction indicators on the wings F Open the tailgate then unclip the access cover on the side in question. F Slacken the lamp fixing nut using a 10 mm box spanner or socket. F To avoid losing the nut if it drops into the wing trim first place a cloth below it. F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp fixing nut. F Disengage the retaining clip while pushing the lamp out slightly. Rear lamps 1. Brake lamps LEDs. 2. Sidelamps / daytime running lamps LEDs. 3. Direction indicators WY16W amber. 4. Reversing lamps W16W. 5. Foglamp P21W. LEDs: light-emitting diodes. F From the outside carefully remove the lamp by pulling it to the rear then up. F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull it out using a standard pair of pliers. F Pull the bulb out and replace it. For reassembly carry out these operations in reverse order.

slide 331:

8 In the event of a breakdown 329 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Reversing lamp tailgate F Open the tailgate then introduce a flat screwdriver into the cut-out to unclip the access cover on the side in question. F Slacken the lamp fixing nut using a 10 mm box spanner or socket. F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp fixing nut. F Disengage the retaining clip while pushing the lamp out slightly. F From the outside carefully remove the lamp by pulling it to the rear. F Disconnect the lamp connector by pressing on each side. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull it out. F Pull the bulb out and replace it. For reassembly carry out these operations in reverse order. Changing foglamp bulbs These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear bumper: F pass your hand under the bumper F turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and remove it F turn the bulb a quarter turn pull it out and fit a new bulb. For reassembly carry out these operations in reverse order. Take care not to touch the silencer there is a risk of burns if changing a bulb within a few minutes of switching off the ignition.

slide 332:

In the event of a breakdown 330 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Third brake lamp light emitting diodes - LEDs Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop. Number plate lamps F Insert a thin screwdriver into the slot in the lens. F Push it outwards to unclip it. F Remove the lens. F Pull the bulb out and change it.

slide 333:

8 In the event of a breakdown 331 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Changing a fuse Before changing a fuse: F the cause of the failure must be identified and rectified F all electrical consumers must be switched off F the vehicle must be immobilised with the ignition off F identify the failed fuse using the allocation tables and layout diagrams available. Changing a fuse The fuse allocation tables and corresponding layout diagrams are available at the following website: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/ You can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. To change a fuse you must: F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse from its housing and check the condition of its filament. F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating same colour using a different rating could cause faults risk of fire. If the fuse fails again soon after replacement have the vehicles electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Good Failed Tweezer The replacement of a fuse not shown in the allocation tables may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with its instructions in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes. Installing electrical accessories Your vehicles electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment. Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 334:

In the event of a breakdown 332 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 12 V battery Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery. General points Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery. All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fire. Wash your hands afterwards. If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox do not try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle. Batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not in any circumstances be discarded with household waste. Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point. Lead-acid starter batteries Access to the battery The battery is located under the bonnet. For access to the + terminal: F release the bonnet using the interior lever then the exterior safety catch F raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay. + Positive terminal. It has a quick-release clamp. - Negative terminal. As the battery negative terminal is not accessible a remote earth point is located close to the battery.

slide 335:

8 In the event of a breakdown 333 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Starting using another battery F Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes. F Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run. If the engine does not start straight away switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again. F Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order. F Refit the plastic cover to the + terminal if your vehicle has one. F Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes by driving or with the vehicle stationary so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. When your vehicles battery is discharged the engine can be started using a slave battery external or on another vehicle and jump lead cables or a battery booster. Never try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger. Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact with each other. Switch off the electrical consumers on both vehicles audio system wipers lighting .... Ensure that the jump lead cables do not pass close to moving parts of the engine cooling fan belts .... Do not disconnect the + terminal when the engine is running. F Raise the plastic cover on the + terminal if your vehicle has one. F Connect the red cable to the positive terminal + of the flat battery A at the metal elbow then to the positive terminal + of the slave battery B or the booster. F Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal - of the slave battery B or the booster or earth point on the other vehicle. F Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle. Some functions including Stop Start are not available if the battery is not sufficiently charged.

slide 336:

In the event of a breakdown 334 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Charging the battery using a battery charger For optimum service life of the battery it is essential to maintain an adequate state of charge. In some circumstances it may be necessary to charge the battery: - if you use your vehicle essentially for short journeys - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for several weeks. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F Switch off the ignition. F Switch off all electrical consumers audio system lighting wipers .... F Switch off the charger B before connecting the cables to the battery so as to avoid any dangerous sparks. F Ensure that the charger cables are in good condition. F Raise the plastic cover if your vehicle has one on the + terminal. F Connect the charger B cables as follows: - the positive + red cable to the + terminal of the battery A - the negative - black cable to the earth point C on the vehicle. F At the end of the charging operation switch off the charger B before disconnecting the cables from the battery A. If you envisage charging your vehicles battery yourself use only a charger compatible with lead-acid batteries of a nominal voltage of 12 V. If this label is present it is essential to use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing irreversible damage to the electrical components related to the Stop Start system. Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger. Never reverse polarities. Never try to charge a frozen battery. If the battery has been frozen have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid. It is not necessary to disconnect the battery.

slide 337:

8 In the event of a breakdown 335 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Disconnecting the battery The Stop Start system may not be operational during the trip following the first engine start. In this case the system will only be available again after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle a period which depends on the ambient temperature and the state of charge of the battery up to about 8 hours. In order to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine it is recommended that the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long period. Before disconnecting the battery: F close all openings doors tailgate windows sunroof F switch off all electrical consumers audio system wipers lighting ... F switch off the ignition and wait for four minutes. At the battery it is only necessary to disconnect the + terminal. Following reconnection of the battery After reconnecting the battery switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to allow initialisation of the electronic systems. However if minor problems persist following this operation contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Referring to the corresponding section you must yourself initialise or reset certain systems such as: - the remote control or electronic key depending on version - the sunroof and its electric blind - the electric windows - the date and time - the radio preset stations. Quick-release terminal clamp Disconnecting the + terminal F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B. F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. Reconnecting the + terminal F Raise the lever A fully. F Refit the open clamp B on the + terminal. F Push the clamp B fully down. F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B. Do not force the lever as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly start the procedure again.

slide 338:

In the event of a breakdown 336 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 Towing the vehicle The towing eye is stowed in a tool box under the boot floor. For more information on access to the Tool kit refer to the corresponding section. Access to the tools General recommendations In the following cases you must always call on a professional recovery service: - vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road - four-wheel drive vehicle - when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral unlock the steering or release the parking brake - towing with only two wheels on the ground - where there is no approved towing arm available... Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye. Observe the legislation in force in your country. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground always use an approved towing arm rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently. When towing a vehicle with the engine off there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.

slide 339:

8 In the event of a breakdown 337 3008-2_en_Chap08_en cas-de-panne_ed01-2016 F On the front bumper unclip the cover by pressing at the top. F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. Towing your vehicle F On the rear bumper unclip the cover by pressing at the left. F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles. F Move off gently drive slowly and for a short distance. Towing another vehicle F Unlock the steering and release the parking brake. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles. F Move off gently drive slowly and for a short distance. F Place the gear lever in neutral position N on an automatic gearbox. Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components braking transmission... and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

slide 340:

Technical data 338 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 Petrol engines and gearboxes Petrol engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 SS 1.6 litre THP 150 1.6 litre THP 160 1.6 litre THP 165 SS Gearbox Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Model code: MR... M4... HNYH/S HNYH/1S HNYW/S HNYW/1S 5FEA 5FMA 5GZW/S Cubic capacity cc 1 199 1 598 1 598 1 598 Bore x stroke mm 75 x 90.5 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 Max power: EU standard kW 96 110 120 121 Max power speed rpm 5 500 6 050 6 000 6 000 Max torque: EU standard Nm 230 240 240 240 Max torque speed rpm 1 750 1 400 1 400 1 400 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes Engine oil capacity in litres with filter replacement 3.5 4.25 4.25 4.25 .../S: model fitted with Stop Start. .../1: model fitted with low rolling resistance tyres. The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed under conditions defined in European legislation Directive 1999/99/EC.

slide 341:

9 Technical data 339 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 Petrol weights and towed loads in kg The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. When towing the maximum authorised speed is reduced comply with the legislation in force in your country. High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C limit the towed load. Petrol engine 1.2 litre PureTech 130 SS 1.6 litre THP 150 1.6 litre THP 160 1.6 litre THP 165 SS Gearbox Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Model code: MR... M4... HNYH/S - HNYH/1S HNYW/S - HNYW/1S 5FEA 5FMA 5GZW/S Unladen weight 1 250 - 1 254 - - - 1 300 Kerb weight 1 325 - 1 329 - - - 1 375 Gross vehicle weight GVW 1 910 - - - 1 950 Gross train weight GTW on a 12 gradient 3 310 - 3 210 - - - 3 500 Braked trailer within the GTW limit on a 10 or 12 gradient 1 400 - 1 300 - - - 1 550 Unbraked trailer 660 - - - 685 Recommended nose weight 70 - - - 70 The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver 75 kg.

slide 342:

Technical data 340 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 Diesel engines and gearboxes The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed under conditions defined in European legislation Directive 1999/99/EC. Diesel engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 SS Gearbox Manual 5-speed Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Model code: MC... BHY6/S BHXH/S BHXH/1S BHXW/S BHXW/1S BHZH/S BHZH/1S BHZW/S BHZW/1S Cubic capacity cc 1 560 1 560 1 560 Bore x stroke mm 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 75 x 883 Max power: EU standard kW 73 85 88 Max power speed rpm 3 750 3 750 3 750 Max torque: UE standard Nm 254 300 300 Max torque speed rpm 1 750 1 750 1 750 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Particle filter Yes Yes Yes Engine oil capacity in litres with filter replacement 3.75 3.75 3.75 .../S: model fitted with Stop Start. .../1: model fitted with low rolling resistance tyres.

slide 343:

9 Technical data 341 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 .../S: model fitted with Stop Start. .../1: model fitted with low rolling resistance tyres. Diesel engine 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 SS 2.0 litre BlueHDi 180 SS Gearbox Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Model code: MJ... - - AHRH/S AHSH/S AHXH/S AHWW/S Cubic capacity cc - - 1 997 1 997 Bore x stroke mm - - 85 x 88 85 x 88 Max power: EU standard kW - - 110 132 Max power speed rpm - - 4 000 3 750 Max torque: EU standard Nm - - 370 400 Max torque speed rpm - - 2 000 2 000 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes Particle filter Yes Yes Yes Yes Engine oil capacity in litres with filter replacement - - 6.1 5.1 The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed under conditions defined in European legislation Directive 1999/99/EC. Diesel engines and gearboxes

slide 344:

Technical data 342 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 Diesel weights and towed loads in kg The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. When towing the maximum authorised speed is reduced comply with the legislation in force in your country. High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C limit the towed load. Diesel engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 SS Gearbox Manual 5-speed Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Model code: MC... BHY6/S BHXH/S - BHXH/1S BHXW/S BHZH/S - BHZH/1S BHZW/S Unladen weight - 1 300 - 1 304 1 315 1 300 - 1 304 1 315 Kerb weight - 1 375 - 1 379 1 390 1 375 - 1 379 1 390 Gross vehicle weight GVW - 1 970 - 1 980 1 990 1 970 - 1 980 1 990 Gross train weight GTW on a 12 gradient - 3 470 - 3 380 3 290 3 470 - 3 380 3 290 Braked trailer within the GTW limit on a 10 or 12 gradient - 1 500 - 1 400 1 300 1 500 - 1 400 1 300 Unbraked trailer - 685 695 685 695 Recommended nose weight - 70 70 70 70 The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver 75 kg.

slide 345:

9 Technical data 343 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. When towing the maximum authorised speed is reduced comply with the legislation in force in your country. High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C limit the towed load. Diesel engine 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 SS 2.0 litre BlueHDi 180 SS Gearbox Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Manual 6-speed EAT6 automatic 6-speed Model code: MJ... - - AHRH/S AHSH/S AHXH/S AHWW/S Unladen weight - - 1 425 1 465 Kerb weight - - 1 500 1 540 Gross vehicle weight GVW - - 2 050 2 090 Gross train weight GTW on a 12 gradient - - 3 700 3 730 Braked trailer within the GTW limit on a 10 or 12 gradient - - 1 650 1 640 Unbraked trailer - - 745 750 Recommended nose weight - - 70 70 The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver 75 kg. Diesel weights and towed loads in kg

slide 346:

Technical data 344 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 Dimensions in mm These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

slide 347:

9 Technical data 345 3008-2_en_Chap09_caracteristiques_ed01-2016 Identifcation markings A. Vehicle identification number VIN under the bonnet. The number is engraved on the body structure. D. Tyres / paint code label. This label is affixed to the drivers door aperture. It bears the following information on the tyres: - the tyre pressures unladen and laden - the reference size type load index and speed rating - the spare tyre pressure. It also indicates the paint colour code. B. Vehicle identification number VIN on the dashboard. The number is on a label visible through the windscreen. Never reduce the pressure of a warm tyre. Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption. Different visible markings for the identification of your vehicle. Checking tyre pressures The tyre pressures should be checked when cold at least monthly. The pressures given on the label are valid for cold tyres. If you have driven for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles 10 kilometres at more than 30 mph 50 km/h the tyres will be warm in this case 0.3 bar 30 kPa should be added to the pressures given on the label. C. Manufacturers label. This self-destructing label is affixed to the right- hand door aperture. It bears the following information: - the name of the manufacturer - the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval number - the vehicle identification number VIN - the maximum authorised vehicle weight the Gross Vehicle Weight or GVW - the maximum authorised vehicle + trailer weight the Gross Train Weight or GTW - the maximum weight on the front axle - the maximum weight on the rear axle.

slide 348:

Alphabetical index 346 3008-2_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016 180° rear vision .............................................267 Air intake ....................................................... 111 Air vents ........................................................104 Alarm ...............................................................70 Amplifier audio .............................................122 Anti-lock braking system ABS ......................................160 161 Anti-theft .......................................................197 Armrest front ................................................124 Armrest rear .................................................134 Assistance call ..............................................158 Assistance emergency braking ................................................160 249 Audio system radio ............................................................45 C Capacity fuel tank ........................................281 Cartridge fragrance .............................125 126 Central locking ..........................................60 68 Changing a bulb ........................... 323 328 330 Changing a fuse ............................................331 Changing a wheel .........................................309 Changing a wiper blade ................................154 Changing the remote control battery ...........................................................66 Charger induction .........................................122 Charger wireless ..........................................122 CHECK ............................................................40 Checking the engine oil level ..........................................................36 Checking the levels ............................... 297-300 Checking tyre pressures using the kit ..............................................312 Checks ................................. 295 296 301 302 Checks routine .....................................301 302 Child lock ............................... ................193 194 Children ................................. 184 186-188 190 Children safety ....................................193 194 Backrest folding .............................................92 Battery ...................................290 301 332-335 Battery charging ...........................................334 Battery remote control .............................63 66 Blanking screen snow shield ...............................................291 Blind ................................................................84 Blind spot monitoring system ......... 20 260 262 Blind spot monitoring system active.....................................................20 262 Blind spot sensors ..................................20 260 BlueHDi .....................................37 40 303 308 Bonnet ...........................................................294 Boot .....................................................75 76 79 Brake discs ....................................................302 Brake lamps ..................................................328 B Brakes .....................................................26 302 Braking assistance system .........................................................160 Braking automatic emergency .............................. 21 26 247 250 Braking dynamic emergency ......................................... 203 208 Bulbs changing .......................... 323 328 330 Accessories ..........................................156 201 Active Safety Brake................... 21 26 247 250 AdBlue ® .....................................30 37 303 304 Additive Diesel .............................................301 Adjusting headlamps ....................................145 Adjusting head restraints ................................93 Adjusting seat .....................................90 91 94 Adjusting the air distribution ......................... 111 Adjusting the air flow ..................................... 111 Adjusting the date ...........................................45 Adjusting the height and reach of the steering wheel ....................................99 Adjusting the lumbar support ..............90 91 94 Adjusting the seat belt height .......................168 Adjusting the temperature ............................ 111 Adjusting the time ...........................................45 Advanced Grip Control .................................164 Advice on driving ..................................195 196 Airbags ....................................................28 172 Airbags curtain ..................................... 175 176 Airbags front.........................................173 176 Airbags lateral ...................................... 175 176 Air conditioning ................................10 107 110 Air conditioning automatic ...........................105 Air conditioning digital ..........................111 116 Air conditioning dual-zone automatic .............................................111 116 Air conditioning manual ...............105 106 116 Air conditioning mono-zone .................108 116 A

slide 349:

. Alphabetical index 347 3008-2_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016 Demisting ...................................................... 116 Demisting front ............................................. 116 Demisting rear .............................................. 118 Demisting rear screen ................................. 118 Dials and gauges ............................................12 Dimensions ...................................................344 Dipstick ................ ....................................36 297 Direction indicators .............. 144 323 324 328 Display screen instrument panel .........................................218 Distance alert ............................ 21 26 247 248 Door pockets ................................................. 119 Doors ...............................................................74 Doors rear ....................................................194 Driver’s attention warning .......................................................253 Driving .............................................................88 Driving abroad...............................................143 Driving economically.......................................10 Driving positions storing ...............................96 Driving time warning .....................................252 Dynamic pack ...............................................217 Dynamic stability control DSC ................................... 26 160 162 164 Emergency switching off ...............................202 Emergency warning lamps ................... 157 307 Emissions control system SCR ..............................................................31 Energy economy mode .................................290 Engine compartment ........................... 295 296 Engine Diesel ......................283 296 308 340 Engine petrol ............................... 283 295 338 Engines ................................................ 338 340 Environment ..............................................10 63 Child seats .............171 177 178 182-184 192 Child seats conventional ......................183 184 Child seats i-Size .........................................190 Child seats ISOFIX ...................... 186-188 190 Cigarette lighter.............................................120 Closing the boot ............................56 61 62 75 Closing the doors ..........................56 60-62 74 Configuration vehicle ........................ 45 48 50 Control emergency boot release ..................................................81 Control emergency door ................................64 Control heated seats ......................................97 Controls steering mounted .......................... 211 Control stalk lighting .......................17 141 144 Control stalk wipers .....................152 153 155 Courtesy lamps .............................................128 Cover load space .........................................136 Cruise control .......................226 229 234 238 Cruise control by speed limit recognition ..........................................229 Cruise control dynamic with Stop function .............................. 229 238 Cup holder ..................................................... 119 F Fatigue detection ..................................252 253 Filling the fuel tank .................................281-283 Filter air ........................................................301 Filter Diesel fuel ...........................................296 Filter oil .........................................................301 Filter particle ....................................... 300 301 Filter passenger compartment ..............................................301 Fitting a wheel ...............................................319 Fitting roof bars .............................................293 Fittings boot .................................................135 Fittings interior ..................................... 119 120 Fittings rear ..................................................133 Flap fuel filler ............................... .........281 282 Flashing indicators ................................144 324 Floor boot adjustable ..................................138 Foglamps ......................................................142 Foglamps front .............142 151 323 324 326 Foglamps rear ......................................142 329 Folding the rear seats ...................................130 D Date setting ...................................................45 Daytime running lamps .................143 323 324 Deactivating the passenger airbag ..........................................................173 Deadlocking ..............................................56 62 Defrosting .............................................. 116 118 Defrosting front ............................................ 116 E Eco-driving advice ........................................10 Economy mode .............................................290 Electronic brake force distribution EBFD ................................................160 161 Emergency braking assistance EBA ..........160 Emergency call .............................................158

slide 350:

Alphabetical index 348 3008-2_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016 Headlamps automatic dipping ............... 17 149 Headlamps automatic illumination .................................. 141 146 147 Headlamps dipped beam ................17 323-325 Headlamps halogen .....................................324 Headlamps main beam ...................17 323-325 Head restraints front ......................................93 Head restraints rear .....................................130 Heating ....................................10 104 106 108 Hi-Fi system ..................................................122 Hill Assist Descent Control ..................................................20 166 Hill start assist ...............................................216 Horn...............................................................157 Inflating tyres ..........................................10 345 Inflating tyres and accessories using the kit ..........................312 Instrument panel .....................12 13 40 42 43 Intelligent Traction Control ........................................................161 ISOFIX ..........................................................187 Isofix mountings ............................................186 i-Cockpit amplify function .................................98 102 125 217 Ignition ...................................................199 201 Immobiliser electronic ............................63 197 Indicator AdBlue ® range .......................................................30 37 Indicator coolant temperature ..................................................32 Indicator engine oil level ....................................................36 40 Indicator lamps operation ........................................... 17 19 21 Indicator lamps status ............................................................19 Indicators direction ..............................144 324 Jack ...............................................................310 Jump starting ................................................333 I J Key ..................................................... 54 63 64 Key electronic .....................................58 60-62 Keyless Entry and Starting ...................... 58 61-63 197 200 Key not recognised .......................................202 Key with remote control .........................................................197 Kit temporary puncture repair ...................................................309 312 K Fuel..........................................................10 283 Fuel consumption ............................................10 Fuel tank................................................281 282 Fuses .............................................................331 Gauge fuel....................................................281 Gearbox automatic .......10 211 216 217 219 302 332 Gearbox manual .... 10 210 216 217 219 302 Gear lever .......................................................10 Gear lever automatic gearbox ....................................................... 211 Gear lever manual gearbox .......................................................210 Gear shift indicator .......................................218 Glove box ......................................................120 Grab handles ................................................ 119 G Hands-free access ..........................................78 Hands-free tailgate .............................76 78 79 Hazard warning lamps .......................... 157 307 Headlamp adjustment ...................................145 H

slide 351:

. Alphabetical index 349 3008-2_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016 Labels identification .....................................345 Lamp boot ....................................................140 Lamps parking .............................................144 Lamps rear ...................................................328 Lamps with "Full LED" technology ..........................................151 323 Lane departure warning active.......................................21 27 255 262 Lane Departure Warning System LDWS ....................................27 254 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes ................................ 143 323 324 328 Level brake fluid ...........................................298 Level Diesel additive ........................... 300 301 Level engine coolant ..............................32 299 Level engine oil ......................................36 297 Levels and checks ................................295-300 Level screenwash fluid .....................................................154 299 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs .................... 143 323 324 328 Lighting ............................................................17 Lighting cornering ........................................ 151 Lighting dimmer ..............................................42 Lighting exterior ........................................... 141 Lighting guide-me home ..............................................57 146-148 Lighting interior ....................................128 129 Lighting mood ........................................42 129 Lighting welcome .........................................147 Loading ........................................... 10 137 293 Load reduction mode ....................................290 Locating your vehicle ......................................56 Locking ................................................55 61 63 Locking from the inside ......................................................68 Long objects transporting ............................134 Low fuel level ................................................281 L Maintenance routine ......................................10 Map reading lamps .......................................128 Markings identification .................................345 Massage function ............................... ............98 Massage multi-point ......................................98 Mat ................................................................127 Memorising a speed .....................................226 Mirror rear view ............................................101 Mirrors door............................99 100 118 260 Mirror vanity .................................................120 Misfuel prevention .........................................282 Motorised tailgate ...............................76 77 79 Mountings Isofix ...........................................186 M Net high load retaining .................................137 Number plate lamps ......................................330 N Opening the boot ......................................58 75 Opening the doors ....................................58 74 Opening the fuel filler flap .............................281 Opening the windows .....................................55 Pads brake ...................................................302 Paint ..............................................................345 Paint colour code ..........................................345 Parcel shelf rear ...........................................136 Park Assist ............................................272 274 Parking brake ................................................302 Parking brake electric ................... 25 203 208 Parking sensors front ...................................264 Parking sensors rear....................................263 Personalisation ...............................................13 PEUGEOT Connect Assistance ..................................................158 PEUGEOT Connect Packs ...........................158 PEUGEOT Connect SOS .............................158 Plates identification......................................345 Player USB ...................................................121 Port USB ......................................................121 Pre-heater Diesel ...........................................18 Pressures tyres ....................................316 345 Pre-tensioning seat belts ............................................................ 171 Priming the fuel system ................................308 Protecting children ........................173 177 178 182 184 186-188 190 Puncture ........................................................312 P Oil change .....................................................297 Oil consumption ............................................297 OIl engine .....................................................297 On-board tools ......................................139 309 Opening the bonnet ......................................294 O

slide 352:

Alphabetical index 350 3008-2_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016 Range AdBlue ....................................30 37 38 Rear screen demisting ................................. 118 Recharging the battery .................................334 Reduction of electrical load ..........................290 Regeneration of the particle filter ..........................................301 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation detection system .................................224 225 Reinitialising the remote control ...........................................................67 Reminder key in ignition ...............................199 Remote control ........................54-56 60 62 63 Removing a wheel ........................................319 Removing the mat .........................................127 Replacing bulbs ........................... 323 328 330 Replacing fuses ............................................331 Replacing the air filter ...................................301 Replacing the oil filter ...................................301 Replacing the passenger compartment filter ......................................301 Reservoir screenwash .................................299 Resetting the service indicator .......................35 Resetting the trip recorder ..............................41 Reset trip .........................................................43 Rev counter .....................................................12 Reversing lamps ...........................................328 Roof bars .......................................................293 Running out of fuel Diesel ..........................308 Table of weights ....................................339 342 Table position ..................................................92 Tables of engines ................................. 338 340 Tailgate ............................................................75 Tank fuel ...............................................281 282 Technical data ...............................338-340 342 Telephone .....................................................122 Temperature coolant ......................................32 Third brake lamp ...........................................330 Three flashes direction indicators ...................................144 T Starting using another battery ................................................ 202 333 Stay bonnet ..................................................294 Steering wheel adjustment ....................................................99 Stopping the vehicle ..................... 197 200 211 Stop Start ........................ 18 21 44 105 116 219 281 294 301 335 Storage .......................... 119 120 124 134 135 Storage box ...................................................139 Storage compartments ................................. 119 Storage wells ........................................135 139 Storing driving positions .................................96 Stowing rings ................................................135 Sunroof panoramic ........................................84 Sun visor .......................................................120 Switching off the engine ...............................197 Synchronising the remote control ...........................................................67 Saturation of the particle filter Diesel ...............................................301 Scented air freshener ...........................125 126 Screen monochrome .....................................45 Screens very cold conditions ..................................................291 Screenwash front .........................................153 Screenwash rear ..........................................153 SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction ............................................31 303 SCR system ............................................31 303 Seat belts .......................................168-171 183 Seat belts rear ......................................169 170 Seats electric .................................................96 Seats front ................................................90 96 Seats heated ..................................................97 Seats rear .....................................................130 Selector gear ................................................ 211 Serial number vehicle ..................................345 Service indicator .......................................33 40 Servicing ...................................................10 33 Settings equipment ........................... 45 48 50 Sidelamps .................... 143 144 323 324 328 Side repeater ................................................327 Ski flap ..........................................................134 Snow chains ......................................... 223 292 Snow screen .................................................291 Socket 12V ...................................................314 Socket 12 V accessory ........120 133 136 314 Socket 230 V ................................................133 Speakers .......................................................122 Speed limiter ................................ 226 229 231 Speed limit recognition .................................227 Speedometer ..................................................12 Spotlamps side ....................................148 327 Stability control ESC...................160 163 164 Starting the vehicle ....................... 197 200 211 R Safety children .....................173 177 178 182 184 186-188 190 S

slide 353:

. Alphabetical index 351 3008-2_en_Chap11_index-alpha_ed01-2016 U Under-inflation detection ...................................................223 Unlocking ..................................................55 58 Unlocking from the inside ...............................68 Unlocking the boot ....................................57 59 Unlocking the tailgate ...............................57 59 Ticket holder ................................................. 119 Time setting ..................................................45 Tool box .........................................................139 Tools ..............................................................309 Total distance recorder ...................................41 Touch screen.......................42 48 50 102 121 Towball quickly detachable ..................................................285 Towbar .......................................... 163 196 284 Towbar with quickly detachable towball ......................................285 Towed loads ..........................................339 342 Towing another vehicle .................................336 Traction control ASR ........... 26 160 162 164 Trailer ........................................... 163 196 284 Trailer stability assist TSA ..................160 163 Trajectory control systems ............................160 Triangle warning...........................................307 Trip computer ............................................43 44 Trip distance recorder .....................................41 Tyres ........................................................10 345 Tyre under-inflation detection .............................................223 316 V Ventilation ............................... 10 104-106 108 Visibility ......................................................... 116 Vision 180° forward .....................................269 Vision panoramic .........................................265 Visio Park ......................................265 267 269 W Warning and indicator lamps ................................................16 21 22 Warning lamp braking system ...........................................................26 Warning lamp Diesel engine pre-heater .........................................18 Warning lamps ..............................19 22 25 40 Warning lamp Service....................................23 Weights .................................................339 342 Welcome lighting..................................... 57 148 Wheel spare .................................309 317 345 Window controls .............................................82 Windscreen heated ...................................... 117 Wiper blades changing ...............................154 Wiper rear.....................................................153 Wipers .............................................20 152 155 Wipers automatic rain sensitive .......................................152 155

slide 359:

04-16 3008-2_en_Chap12_Couverture_ed01-2016 - Copie Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT. Automobiles PEUGEOT declares by application of the provisions of the European legislation Directive 2000/53 relating to End of Life Vehicles that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells. Printed in the EU Anglais

slide 360:

www.peugeot.com 3008-2_en_Chap12_Couverture_ed01-2016 - Copie Anglais 16P84.0040 16P84.0040

slide 361:

1 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P E U G E O T C o n n e c t N a v GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth ® GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth ® GPS satellite navigation - Applications - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth t el ep h on e ® t el ep h on e ® C o nt e nt s First steps 2 Steering mounted controls 5 Menus 6 Voice commands 8 Navigation 14 Connected navigation 30 Applications 40 Radio Media 56 Telephone 68 Settings 80 Frequently asked questions 90 The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. Displaying of the Energy Economy Mode message signals that a change to standby is imminent. The different functions and settings described vary according to the version and configuration of your vehicle. The link below gives access to OSS Open Source Software codes for the system. h t t p : / / w w w . p s a - pe u ge o t - c i t r o e n . c om / os s As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands- free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

slide 362:

2 FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 F i r st st e p s With the engine running a press mutes the sound. With the ignition off a press turns the s y s t e m o n . Vo l u m e . Use the buttons either side of or below the touch screen for access to the menus then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. Press the cross to go back a level. Press "OK" to confirm. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" type. To clean the screen use a soft non- abrasive cloth spectacles cloth with no additional product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet han d s .

slide 363:

3 . 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Select the audio source depending on version: - F M / D A B / A M r a d i o s t a t i o n s . - U S B m e m o r y s t i c k . - C D p l a ye r . - Media player connected via the auxiliary socket Jack cable not supplied. - T e l e p h o n e c o n n e c t e d b y B l u e t o o t h u s i n g B l u e t o o t h a u d i o s t r e a m i n g . D ep end i ng o n e q u i p m en t . Certain information is displayed permanently in the upper band of the touch screen: - R e m i n d e r o f t h e a i r c o n d i t i o n i n g information and direct access to the corresponding menu. - Go directly to the selection of the audio source to the list of radio stations or list of titles depending on the source. - Go to the message notifications emails map updates and depending on the services the navigation notifications. - Go to the settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel. In very hot conditions the volume may be limited to protect the system. It may go into standby screen and sound off for at least 5 minutes. The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger c om p a r t m e n t h a s d r op ped . In the "Settings" menu you can create a profile for just one person or a group of people with common points with the possibility of entering a multitude of settings radio presets audio settings navigation history contact favourites ... these settings are taken into account automatically.

slide 365:

5 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Steering mounted controls Media short press: change the multimedia source. Telephone short press: call. Call in progress short press: access to telephone menu. Telephone long press: reject an incoming call end call access to t e le pho n e me n u . D e c r e a s e v o l u m e . Voice commands : Short press system voice commands. Long press smartphone voice commands via the system. Mute / Restore the sound. O r Mute by pressing the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons. Radio rotate: automatic search for the previous / next station. Media rotate: previous / next track move in a list. Short press : confirm a selection other than selection access to p r e s e t s . Radio : display the list of stations. Media : display the list of tracks. Radio press and hold: update the list of stations received. I n c r e a s e v o l u m e .

slide 366:

6 12:13 185 215 23 °C 215 185 12:13 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 C o n n e c t e d n a v i g at io n D r ivin g A p p l i c at io n s Enter navigation settings and choose a destination. Use services available in real time depending o n e q u i p m e n t . Activate deactivate and configure certain v e h i c l e f u n c t i o n s . Operate certain applications on a smartphone connected via CarPlay ® or MirrorLink ® or MirrorLink ® TM . Check the state of the Bluetooth ® and Wi-Fi ® and Wi-Fi ® c on n ec t i on s . M e nu s A ir c ondi t ion i ng Manage the various temperature and air flow se t t i ngs . A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n

slide 367:

7 . FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 S e t t in g s R ad io M e d i a T el ep h on e Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound balance ambience ... and the display language units date time .... Select an audio source a radio station display pho t o g r a ph s . Connect a telephone by Bluetooth ® r e a d messages and emails and send quick m es sa g es .

slide 368:

8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 V o i c e c o mma n d s F i r s t s t ep s S t e e r i ng mo u nt e d c ont r ol s I n f o r mat io n - U s i n g t h e s y s t e m Press the Push To Talk button and tell me what youd like after the tone. Remember you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this button. If you press it again while Im waiting for you to speak itll end the conversation. If you need to start over say "cancel". If you want to undo something say "undo". And to get information and tips at any time just say "help". If you ask to me do something and theres some information missing that I need Ill give you some examples or take you through it step by step. Theres more information available in "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to "expert" when you feel comfortable. To ensure that voice commands are always recognised by the system please observe the following recommendations: - speak in a normal tone without breaking up words or raising your voice. - always wait for the "beep" audible signal before speaking. - for best operation it is recommended that the windows and opening roof be closed to avoid extraneous interference according to version. - before making a voice command ask other passengers to not speak. The voice commands with a choice of 12 languages English French Italian Spanish German Dutch Portuguese Polish Turkish Russian Arabic Brazilian are made using the language previously chosen and set in t h e s y s t e m . The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate to address" and "Display POI in the city" are not available. Alternative synonyms can be used for some voice commands. E.g. Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ... Example of a "voice command" for navigation: "Navigate to address 11 Regent Street London" . Example of a "voice command" for the radio and media: "Play artist Madonna" . Example of a "voice command" for the telephone: "Call David Miller" . Pressing this button activates the voice commands function.

slide 369:

9 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 G lo b a l v oi c e c o m man d s These commands can be made from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button located on the steering wheel as long as there is no telephone call in progress. "Voice command" Help message Help There are lots of topics I can help you with. You can say: "help with phone" "help with navigation" "help with media" or "help with radio". For an overview on how to use voice controls you can say "help with voice controls". Voice command help Navigation help Radio help Media help Telephone help Set dialogue mode as ... Select "beginner" or "expert" mode. Select profile ... Select profile 1 2 or 3. Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise say "no" and well start that again. No

slide 370:

10 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 " N a v i g at io n " v oi c e c o m man d s These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button on the steering wheel as long as there is no telephone call in progress. Depending on the country give the destination instructions address in the language used by the system. "Voice command" Help message Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover say "navigate to" and then the address or contact name. For example "navigate to address 11 Regent Street London" or "navigate to contact John Miller". You can specify if its a preferred or recent destination. For example "navigate to preferred address Tennis club" "navigate to recent destination 11 Regent Street London". Otherwise just say "navigate home". To see points of interest on a map you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury" or "show nearby petrol station". For more information you can ask for "help with route guidance". Navigate to work Navigate to preferred address ... Navigate to contact ... Navigate to address ... Show nearby POI ... Remaining distance To get information about your current route you can say "tell me the remaining time" "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help with navigation" to learn more commands. Remaining time Arrival time Stop route guidance

slide 371:

11 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 " R ad io M e d i a " v oi c e c o m man d s These commands can be issued from any screen page after pressing the "Voice command" or "Telephone" button on the steering wheel as long as there is no telephone call in progress. "Voice command" Help message Tune to channel ... You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" and the station name or frequency. For example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station say "tune to preset number". For example "tune to preset number five". Whats playing To display the details of the current "track" "artist" and "album" you can say "Whats playing" Play song ... Use the command "play" to select the type of music youd like to hear. You can pick by "song" "artist" or "album". Just say something like "play artist Madonna" "play song Hey Jude" or "play album Thriller". Play artist ... Play album ... Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection.

slide 372:

12 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 "Voice command" Help message Call contact ... To make a phone call say "call" followed by the contact name for example: "Call David Miller". You can also include the phone type for example: "Call David Miller at home". To make a call by number say "dial" followed by the phone number for example "Dial 107776 835 417". You can check your voicemail by saying "call voicemail". To send a text say "send quick message to" followed by the contact and then the name of the quick message youd like to send. For example "send quick message to David Miller Ill be late". To display the list of calls say "display calls". For more information on SMS you can say "help with texting". D i a l . . . Display contacts Display calls Call message box | voicemail This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has b e e n d o n e . " T e l ep h o n e " v oi c e c o m man d s If a telephone is connected to the system these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the "Telephone" button on the steering wheel as long as there is no telephone call in progress. If there is no telephone connected by Bluetooth a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be c los ed .

slide 373:

13 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 "Voice command" Help message Send text to ... To hear your messages you can say "listen to most recent message". When you want to send a text theres a set of quick messages ready for you to use. Just use the quick message name and say something like "send quick message to Bill Carter Ill be late". Check the phone menu for the names of the supported messages. Please say "call" or "send quick message to" and then select a line from the list. To move around a list shown on the display you can say "go to start" "go to end" "next page" or "previous page". To undo your selection say "undo". To cancel the current action and start again say "cancel". Listen to most recent message " T e s t m e s s a g e " v oi c e c o m man d s If a telephone is connected to the system these voice commands can be issued from any main screen page after pressing the "Telephone" button on the steering wheel as long as there is no telephone call in progress. If no telephone has been connected by Bluetooth a voice message announces: "Please first connect a telephone" and the voice session will be c los ed . This function is only available if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and if the download has b e e n d o n e . The system only sends pre-recorded "Quick messages".

slide 374:

14 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C 1 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 N a v ig a ti o n A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 375:

15 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Navigation Select the orientation of the map north up vehicle direction up or perspective. Navigation Display the traffic information available. Navigation W o r l d m a p Manually locate an area on the world map or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. Around the vehicle Display the location criteria selected. A ro u n d ho me Around the destination 2 D m o d e Switch to a 2D map. Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen. Start navigation to the current address. Save the current address. Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen.

slide 376:

16 12:13 185 215 23 °C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 377:

17 . 7 2 3 4 5 6 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Navigation Stations Activate or deactivate the content available stations car parks risk areas and danger areas. Car park Danger area Map color Select day or night mode for display of the map. POI on map T ra v el Select the POIs available. A c t i v e l i f e C o mm e rc ia l P ub li c G e o g r a ph ic Sel ec t a l l Select or deselect all. Save your choice or selection. View map M o d i f y c i t y Select or modify a city. W ea t her Display on the map the content available in non- connected mode. Pe t r o l S t a t i o n C ar par k Tr a f f i c D a ng er a r ea Sel ec t PO I Select from the POIs available. Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen.

slide 378:

18 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

slide 379:

19 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Comments Z o o m i n Zoom in around the city selected. Around the vehicle Select a location option. On the route At the destination W ea t her Weather information transmitted in TMC mode. F i l l i n g s t a t i o n s Filling stations around the vehicle Display the list of POIs. Filling stations on the route Filling stations at the destination C ar par k Car parks around the vehicle Car parks on the route Car parks at the destination Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen.

slide 380:

20 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

slide 381:

21 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Comments Tr a f f i c T ra f f i c ob s e r v ed Traffic information sent in real time. D a ng er a r ea List of danger areas Display the list of danger areas roadworks breakdowns accidents .... Sel ec t PO I Configure a category of POI to display.

slide 382:

22 1 17 18 8 11 9 12 10 13 16 14 15 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

slide 383:

23 . 1 1 1 1 17 18 8 11 9 12 10 13 16 14 15 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Comments Navigation MENU Enter address Select the country. Save the current address. Confirm the current address. Navigation MENU My destinations Recent Display the lists of destinations and start navigation. Preferred My ho me M y w o r k Contact Delete one or more destinations. Navigation MENU Points of interest Travel List of categories available. After selection of category select the point of interest. Active life Commercial Public Geographic Search Search for a point of interest. Navigation MENU Search Point of interest Enter a point of interest. Address Enter the address of a point of interest. Local / Connected Enter settings for the POI search mode in a local or connected database depending on the services subscribed to. Confirm the entry.

slide 384:

24 1 19 21 20 22 23 24 25 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

slide 385:

25 . 1 1 1 19 21 20 23 22 24 25 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Comments Navigation MENU Guidance criteria Fast Select the guidance criteria motorways tolls and how traffic is taken into account. Short Compromise Ecological See on map Display the route selected using the criteria. Save your selections. Navigation MENU Routes / waypoints Waypoints Display the waypoints saved. Route Display details of the route. Add waypoint Add a waypoint Add a waypoint from a list offered. Preview Display the map. Finish Press to calculate the route. Delete one or more waypoints. Move a waypoint in the list. Navigation MENU Settings Aspects Enter choices and select the volume for the voice and stating the names of streets. Options Alerts Vocal Mapping Save the selections adopted.

slide 386:

26 1 1 8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Choosing a new destination Sel ec t " Enter address ". Sel ec t " See on map " to select the " Guidance criteria ". Sel ec t t h e " Country ". P r e s s " OK " to select the " Guidance criteria ". P r e s s " OK " to start navigation. P r e s s " OK " to start navigation. A n d / O r P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " MENU " button to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . T o w a r d s a n ew d e s t i n a t i o n T o w a r d s a re c e n t d e s t i n at io n Sel ec t " My destinations ". P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " MENU " button to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . E n t e r t h e " City " the " Street " and the " Number " and confirm by pressing on the suggestions displayed. Sel ec t t h e " Recent " t a b . Select the address chosen in the list to display the " Guidance criteria ". To use the navigation system it is necessary to enter the " City " t h e " Street " and the " Number " using the virtual keypad or to take them from the list of " Contacts " or from the " History " o f a d d r e s s e s . Without confirmation of the street number you will be guided to one end o f t h e s t r e e t . Sel ec t " Position " to see the point of ar r i v al g e o g r ap h i c all y .

slide 387:

27 . 1 10 1 1 9 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 O r T o w a r d s a c o n t a c t Sel ec t " My destinations ". Sel ec t t h e " Contact " t a b . P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " MENU " button to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . Select a contact in the list offered to start n a v ig a ti o n . P r e s s " OK " to start calculation of the r o u t e . T o w a r d s p o i n t s o f i n t e r e s t P O I Points of Interest POI are listed in different c a t egor i es . P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " MENU " button to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . Sel ec t " Points of interest ". Sel ec t " Search " to enter the name and address of a POI. Sel ec t t h e " Travel " or " Leisure " or " Commercial " or " Public " o r " Geographic " t a b . O r O r Towards "My home" or "My wo r k " Sel ec t " My destinations ". P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " MENU " button to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . Sel ec t t h e " Preferred " t a b . Sel ec t " My home ". Sel ec t " My work ". Select a previously saved favourite destination.

slide 388:

28 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 T o w a r d s G P S c o o r d i n a t e s Towards a point on the map P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . Explore the map by sliding a finger on the sc re e n . Explore the map by sliding a finger on the sc re e n . Tap the screen to place a marker and display the sub-menu. O r O r O r A n d Select the destination by pressing on the map. Press this button to start navigation. Press this button to start navigation. Press this button to display the world map. Using the grid select by zoom the desired country or region. Press this button to save the address d i s p l a ye d Press this button to save the address d i s p l a ye d . Press this button to enter the GPS c o o r d i n at e s . Press this button to enter the value for " Latitude " using the virtual ke y p a d . Press this button to enter the value for " Longitude " using the virtual ke y p a d . A marker is displayed in the middle of the screen with the " Latitude " a n d " Longitude " c o o r d i n a t e s . A long press on a point opens a list of P O I s n e a r b y .

slide 389:

29 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 T MC T r a f f i c M e s s a g e Channel TMC Traffic Message Channel messages are linked to a European standard on the broadcasting of traffic information via the RDS system on FM radio transmitting traffic information in real time. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS Navigation system map and taken into account straight away during navigation so as to avoid accidents traffic jams and closed roads. The display of danger areas depends on the legislation in force and subscription to the service.

slide 390:

30 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 C on n ec t ed n a v i g a t i on Network connection provided by the vehicle OR Network connection provided by the user Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n

slide 391:

31 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary C o n n e c t e d n a v i g at io n c o n n e c t io n The principles and standards are constantly changing. For communication between your smartphone and the system to operate correctly we recommend that you keep your smartphones operating system up to date and the time and date on your smartphone and the system correct. The services offered with connected navigation are as follows. A Connected Services pack: - W ea t her - F i l l i n g s t a t i o n s - C a r p a r k - T r a f f i c - P O I l o c a l s e a r c h . A Danger area pack option. Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is visible to all see the "Connect-App" s ec t i on . Connect the USB cable. The smartphone is in charge mode when connected by USB cable. The system is automatically connected to the modem included for the "Emergency or assistance calls" services and does not require a connection provided by the user via t h e ir sm ar t p h o n e . On the arrival of "TOMTOM TRAFFIC" the services are a v a i lab l e . For access to connected navigation you can use the connection provided by the vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance call" services or use your smartphone as a modem. Activate and enter settings for sharing the smartphone connection. R e s t r i c t i o n s o f u s e : - W it h C ar P la y ® connection sharing is only with a Wi-Fi connection. - W it h M ir r o r L in k TM c on n ec t i on sharing is only with a USB c on n ec t i on . The quality of services depends on the quality of the network connection. Select a Wi-Fi connection found by the system and connect to it see the " C on n ec t - A p p " s ec t i on . USB connection Network connection provided by t h e v e h i c l e Network connection provided by t h e u s e r Bluetooth connection Wi-Fi connection

slide 392:

32 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185215 23 °C 12:13 185215 23 °C 1 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C 7 27 28 26 29 30 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 393:

33 . 7 28 27 26 29 30 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Navigation Select the orientation of the map north up vehicle direction up or perspective. Navigation TOMTOM TRAFFIC On connection of the system to a network "TOMTOM TRAFFIC" is displayed instead of "TMC" for use of all of the options available in real time. Navigation Weather Select the options. The map display the route chosen depending on options. Stations Car park Traffic Danger area Map color Select the display mode for the map. POI on map C o mm e rc ia l Select the POIs available. G e o g r a ph ic L ei s u r e P ub li c T ra v el Save the options. View map M o d i f y c i t y Select or change a city. Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen.

slide 394:

34 31 32 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

slide 395:

35 . 31 32 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Comments Sel ec t c i t y Select or change a city. Around the vehicle Select or change a city. On the route At the destination W ea t her Weather information Display the weather forecast for the day or the following days. F i l l i n g s t a t i o n s Filling stations around the vehicle Display the list of filling stations and the associated information address prices fuels .... Filling stations on the route Filling stations at the destination By distance By price C ar par k Car parks around the vehicle Display the list of car parks and the associated information address distance spaces available price .... Car parks on the route Car parks at the destination Sort by distance Sort by spaces Sort by price Zoom out / zoom in using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen.

slide 396:

36 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

slide 397:

37 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Comments Tr a f f i c T ra f f i c ob s e r v ed Display traffic information in real time: type description and duration in minutes. D a ng er a r ea s List of danger areas Display danger areas roadworks breakdowns accidents ... in real time. Points of interest P o i n t s o f interest Sel ec t PO I Display the list of POIs for the location selected.

slide 398:

38 22 23 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 S e t t i n g s s p e ci f i c t o connected navigation For access to connected navigation you have to select the option: " Authorise sending information ". Sel ec t " Options ". Sel ec t " Alerts ". - " Allow declaration of danger areas " - " Guidance to final destination on foot " - " Authorise sending information " A c t i v at e o r d e a c t i v at e : Activate or deactivate " Warn of danger zones ". The display of danger zones is conditioned by the legislation in force and subscription to the service. The temperature displayed at 6 oclock in the morning will be the maximum temperature for the day. The temperature displayed at 6 oclock in the evening will be the minimum temperature for the night. Sel ec t " Settings ". P r e s s N a v i g at io n to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " MENU " button to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . D i s p l a y t h e w e at h e r Sel ec t " Weather ". Press this button to display the first level of information. Press this button to display the detailed weather information. Sel ec t " View map ". P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . Press this button to display the list of ser v i c e s .

slide 399:

39 . 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 To distribute information on the declaration of danger zones you should check the option: " Allow declaration of danger areas ". D e cl a r at io n o f " D an g e r areas" P r e s s Navigation to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " Declare a new danger area " button located in the upper bar of the touch screen. Select the option " Type " to choose the type of "Danger area". Sel ec t t h e " Speed " option and enter it using the virtual keypad. P r e s s " OK " to save and distribute the i n f or m a ti o n . You can download the system and map updates from the Brands website. The update procedure can also be found on the website. " D an g e r a re a s " p a c k updates P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " System settings ". Sel ec t " View " to view the version of the various modules installed in the s y s t e m . Sel ec t " Updates due ". Sel ec t t h e " System info " t a b .

slide 400:

40 12:13 185 215 23 °C 3 2 1 12:13 185 215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 A ppl ic a t i o n s A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n / a c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 401:

41 . 2 2 3 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 I n t e r n e t B r o ws e r C o n n e c t iv i t y A p p l i c at io n s P r e s s " Internet Browser " to display the browser home page. Select your country of residence. P r e s s " Connectivity " to go to the CarPlay ® or ® or ® MirrorLink TM f u n c ti o n . P r e s s " Connectivity " to go to the " Internet Browser " f u n c t i o n . P r e s s " Applications " to display the a ppl ic a t i o n s ho me p a g e . Connection to the internet is via one of the network connections provided by the vehicle or the user. P r e s s Applications to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Applications to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Applications to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " OK " to save and start the b r o w ser .

slide 402:

42 12:13 185 215 23 °C 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 C a r Pl a y ® C a r Pl a y ® C a r Pl a y smartphone connection ® smartphone connection ®

slide 403:

43 . 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. Operation must be with the vehicle stationary . stationary . stationary The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the CarPlay ® t ec h n o lo g y ® t ec h n o lo g y ® to be displayed in the vehicles screen having first activated the CarPlay ® function in the smartphone. As the principles and standards are constantly changing it is recommended that you keep your smartphones operating system updated . For the list of eligible smartphones go to the Brands internet website in your coun tr y. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connecte d by a USB cable. P r e s s " Telephone " to display the CarPlay ® i n t e r f a c e . ® i n t e r f a c e . ® P r e s s " CarPlay " to display the CarPlay ® i n t e r f a c e ® i n t e r f a c e ® On connecting the USB cable the CarPlay ® function deactivates the ® function deactivates the ® systems Bluetooth ® m o d e . ® m o d e . ® In the system press " Applications " to display the primary page. O r P r e s s " Connectivity " to go to the CarPlay ® f u n c ti o n . ® f u n c ti o n . ®

slide 404:

44 12:13 185 215 23 °C 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M ir r o r L i nk TM s ma r t p h o n e c o n n e c t io n

slide 405:

45 . 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. Operation must be with the vehicle stationary . stationary . stationary The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the MirrorLink TM technology to be displayed in the vehicles screen. The principles and standards are constantly evolving. For the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work correctly the smartphone must be unlocked update the operating system of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the system. For the list of eligible smartphones connect to the Brands internet website in your country. T h e " MirrorLink TM " function requires the use of a compatible smartphone a n d a ppl ic a t i o n s . There may be a wait for the availability of applications depending on the quality of your network. When connecting a smartphone to the system it is recommended that Bluetooth ® be started on the smartphone ® be started on the smartphone ® Depending on the smartphone it may be necessary to activate the " MirrorLink TM " f u n c ti o n . During the procedure several screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. Accept to start and end the c on n ec t i on . Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. P r e s s " MirrorLink TM " to start the s y s t e m s a p p l i c a t i o n . Once connection is established a page is displayed with the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLink TM t ec h n o lo g y . Access to the different audio sources remains accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink TM display using touch buttons in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons From the system press on " Applications " to display the primary pag e . As a safety measure applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving. P r e s s " Connectivity " to go to the MirrorLink TM f u n c ti o n .

slide 406:

46 12:13 185215 23 °C Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 407:

47 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Applications MirrorLink TM Go to or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLink TM t ec h n o lo g y . Go to a menu list depending on the application chosen. "Back": abandon the current operation go up one level. "Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on your smartphone. Go to the primary page of the "Applications" menu.

slide 408:

48 12:13 185 215 23 °C 7 7 8 8 3 3 2 1 4 6 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 A c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t Level 2 Level 3

slide 409:

49 . 4 5 6 7 7 8 8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Applications Scented air freshener Select the fragrance. Off Switch off the scented air freshener. Low Adjust the intensity of diffusion of the fragrance. Medium High Confirm the selection and settings. Applications Trip computer Instant System providing information about the current journey range fuel consumption…. Trip 1 Trip 2 Back to the Applications page. Applications i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Select an ambience combining each of the equipment presets and/or save it in a user profile. Boost Profile management i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Select an ambience combining each of the equipment presets and/or save it in a user profile. Boost Profile management

slide 410:

50 9 13 12 11 10 14 7 7 8 8 3 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 A c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

slide 411:

51 . 13 12 10 11 9 14 7 7 8 8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Comments Applications i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Boost O R i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Boost Settings Lighting Adjust the intensity of the ambience lighting. Ambience Adjust the sound ambience. Dynamic Set the driving mode. Fragrance Select a fragrance. Driver massage Select and configure the driver massage. Passenger Massage Select and configure the passenger massage. Save settings Save the settings. Reset the mode Reset the parameters of the ambience. Confirm the selections and settings. Deactivate Deactivate the "i-Cockpit Amplify" function. Profile management Profile 1 Configure the profiles. Profile 2 Profile 3 Common profile Save the settings. Confirm the selections and settings.

slide 412:

52 12:13 185 215 23 °C 15 20 16 21 17 19 18 1 3 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 413:

53 . 1 1 1 1 19 20 21 15 16 17 18 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Applications OPTIONS Bluetooth connection All Display all telephones detected and saved. Connected Display all telephones connected. Search Start the search for a device to be connected. Applications OPTIONS Wi-Fi network connection Secured Display the secured Wi-Fi networks. Not secured Display the not secured Wi-Fi networks. Stored Display the stored Wi-Fi networks. Applications OPTIONS Manage connection Display the status of the subscription to the connected services the status of the network connection and the connection mode. Applications OPTIONS Share Wi-Fi connection Activation Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi connection sharing. Settings Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and connect. Save the settings.

slide 414:

54 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 B l u eto ot h ® connection ® connection ® P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e s y s t e m C o n n e c t io n s h a r i ng P r e s s o n " Connect-App " to display the primary page. P r e s s o n " Bluetooth connection ". Sel ec t " Search ". The list of detected telephones is d i s p l a ye d . If the pairing procedure fails it is recommended that you deactivate and then reactivate the "Bluetooth" function in your telephone. T h e " Mobile internet data " pro f i le must be activated for connected navigation where the vehicle does not have "Emergency and assistance call" services having first activated sharing of this connection on your smartphone. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: - " Telephone " hands-free kit telephone only - " Streaming " wireless play of audio files on the telephone - " Mobile internet data ". Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . Select one or more profiles. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands- free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e t e l e p h o n e Select the name of the system in the list of devices detected. In the system accept the connection request from the telephone. Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is "visible to all" telephone configuration. To complete the pairing whichever procedure used from the telephone or from the system ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the t e le pho n e . Depending on the type of telephone you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and messages.

slide 415:

55 . 1 1 1 20 21 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 W i - F i c o n n e c t io n Sharing the Wi-Fi connection M ana g i ng c on n e c t ion s To protect from any piracy and provide maximum security for your systems it is recommended that you use a security code or a complex password. The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . P r e s s " OK " to start the connection. P r e s s " Connect-App " to display the p r im ar y pag e . Network connection by the smartphone Wi-Fi. Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the s y s t e m . P r e s s Connect-App to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Connect-App to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Wi-Fi network connection ". Sel ec t " Share Wi-Fi connection ". Sel ec t " Manage connection ". A n d / O r Sel ec t t h e " Secured " " Not secured " or " Stored " t a b . Sel ec t t h e " Activation " tab to activate or deactivate sharing of the W i - F i c on n ec t i on . Sel ec t t h e " Settings " to change the name of the system network and the p a s s w o r d . With this function you can view the access to connected services the availability of connected services and modify the connection m o d e . Using the virtual keypad enter the " Key " for the Wi-Fi network and the " Password ". S e l e c t a n e t w o r k .

slide 416:

56 FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz 12:13 185 215 23 °C 2 1 4 3 FM/87.5 MHz 87.5MHz 12:13 185 215 23 °C AM/531 kHz PO kHz 12:13 185 215 23 °C 2 1 3 4 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 R a d i o M e di a A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Level 1 Level 2

slide 417:

57 . 3 2 4 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Comments Radio Media Source Radio Select change of source. USB iPod CD AUX Bluetooth Radio Media Frequency / Presets Frequency Carry out an automatic or manual search for radio stations. Presets Make a long press on an empty location to preset a station. Radio Media Band FM Press the Band button to change waveband. DAB AM Radio Media List Radio stations Open the list and press a radio station to select it.

slide 418:

58 1 9 6 7 8 5 10 11 13 14 15 12 9 9 6 6 7 7 8 8 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3

slide 419:

59 . 5 12 8 6 13 14 15 9 7 10 11 1 1 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Radio Media OPTIONS Audio settings Ambience Select the sound ambience. Distribution Sound distribution by the Arkamys ® s y s t e m . ® s y s t e m . ® Sound Adjust the volume or activate volume linked to speed. Voice Adjust the voice volume. Ringtone Adjust the ringtone volume. S a v e se t t i ngs . Radio Media OPTIONS Radio settings General Activate or deactivate settings. Announcements S a v e se t t i ngs . Radio Media OPTIONS Radio stations FM Display the list of radio stations for the band selected. DAB AM Presets Select a preset radio station. Frequency Enter a frequency manually. Change the screen display mode. Update the list according to reception.

slide 420:

60 21 1 17 18 19 20 16 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3

slide 421:

61 . 17 20 18 21 19 1 1 16 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Radio Media OPTIONS Music files Albums Choose a selection mode. Artists Genres Playlists Folders Radio Media OPTIONS Managing photos USB D i s pl a y pho t o s . The system supports the following image formats: .gif .jpg .jpeg .bmp .png .raw and .tiff with a maximum file size of 10 Mb per image.

slide 423:

63 . 1 2 2 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Radio Media to display the m e n u . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s " Frequency ". P r e s s " Frequency ". Enter the values using the virtual keypad. First enter the units then click on the decimals zone to enter the figures after the decimal point. Press one of the buttons for an automatic search for radio stations. P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . R ad io S e l e c t i ng a s t at ion Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved by the Brand such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment hills buildings tunnel car park below ground... may prevent reception even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio s y s t e m . Sel ec t " Radio stations " in the s e c o n d ar y pag e . O r O r Move the cursor for a manual search for frequencies up or down. Select a radio station or frequency. refer to the corresponding section P r e s s " Presets ". Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. P re s e t a s t at ion P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m .

slide 424:

64 1 1 10 10 11 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Radio settings ". Sel ec t " Radio settings ". Sel ec t " General ". Sel ec t " General ". Sel ec t " Announcements ". A c t i v at e / d e a c t i v at e " Station follow ". Activate / Deactivate " Display radio text ". Activate / Deactivate " Traffic announcement ". A c t i v a te/ D e a c t i v a te R D S RDS if activated allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However in certain conditions coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . The "Radio Text" function allows information transmitted by the radio station relating to the station or the song playing to be displayed. D i s p l a y t e x t i n f o r m a t i o n P l a y T A m e s s a g e s The TA Traffic Announcement function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate this function needs good reception of a radio station that carries this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast the current media is automatically interrupted so that the TA message can be heard. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message.

slide 425:

65 . 1 10 3 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 S e l e c t t h e a u d i o s o u r c e . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " Band " to select the " DAB " w a v eb a nd . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. D A B - F M a u t o t r a c k i n g "DAB" does not cover 100 of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor "DAB-FM auto tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatically switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station if there is one. If "DAB-FM auto tracking" is activated there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. Once the digital signal is restored the system automatically changes back to " D A B ". Digital radio provides higher quality reception. The different multiplexes offer a choice of radio stations arranged in al p hab e t i c al o r d e r . If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM" " DAB-FM " option greyed out or "DAB/FM auto tracking" is not activated the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too w ea k. Sel ec t " Radio settings ". Sel ec t " General ". Activate / Deactivate " Station follow ". P r e s s " OK ". D A B r ad io D i g i t a l A u d io B r o ad c a s t i n g T e r re s t r i al D i g i t al R a d io

slide 426:

66 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M ed ia US B p o r t S e l e c t i n g t h e so u r c e Sel ec t " Source ". P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . The system builds playlists in temporary memory an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified the subsequent loading time w i l l b e s h o r t e r . Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable not supplied. A u x i l i a r y A UX so c k e t First adjust the volume of your portable device to a high level. Then adjust the volume of your audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" has been checked in the audio settings. d ep end i ng o n e q u i p m en t Connect the portable device MP3 player… to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable n o t sup p li e d . C h o o s e t h e s o u r c e . Bl u eto ot h ® Bl u eto ot h ® Bl u eto ot h a u di o s t r ea mi n g ® a u di o s t r ea mi n g ® Streaming allows you to listen to music from y o u r t e le pho n e . The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on your portable device to a high level. Then adjust the volume of your audio system. If play does not start automatically it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone. Control is from the portable device or by using the systems touch buttons. Once connected in streaming mode the telephone is considered to be a m e d i a s o u r c e . To protect the system do not use a U S B h u b . C D p l a y e r d ep end i ng o n e q u i p m en t Insert the CD in the player.

slide 427:

67 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 C o n n e c t i ng A p p l e ® C o n n e c t i ng A p p l e ® C o n n e c t i ng A p p l e p la y er s ® p la y er s ® C o n n e c t t h e A pple ® player to the USB port ® player to the USB port ® using a suitable cable not supplied. P l a y s t a r t s a u t o m a t i c a l l y . Control is via the audio system. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts. The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification playlists for example and confirm to go down through the menu to the de si re d t r a c k . The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple ® p l a ye r . ® p l a ye r . ® The audio equipment will only play audio files with ".wma .aac .flac .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR Variable Bit Rate mode. No other type of file .mp4... can be played. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. The sampling rates supported are 32 44 and 4 8 K H z . In order to be able to play a burned CDR or CDRW when burning it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1 2 or Joliet. If the disc is burned in another format it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same burning standard is always used on an individual disc with as low a speed as possible 4x maximum for the best sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD the Joliet standard is recommended. It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using of special characters e.g.: " " ù to avoid any playing and displaying problems. I n f o r m at io n a nd a d v ic e Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 file allocation table. The system supports USB mass storage devices BlackBerry ® d e vic e s ® d e vic e s ® or Apple ® players via USB ports. The ® players via USB ports. The ® adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals not recognised on connection must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable not supplied or via Bluetooth streaming depending on compatibility. It is recommended that the original USB cable for the portable device is used. To protect the system do not use a U S B h u b .

slide 428:

68 12:13 185 215 23 °C 12:13 185 215 23 °C 4 1 1 8 14 5 3 9 12 6 2 10 7 11 13 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 T e le pho n e A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 429:

69 . 14 12 13 3 2 5 6 7 4 8 9 10 11 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Telephone Bluetooth Contact All View contacts according to presentation choices. Select a contact or a favourite saved in the system via the profile selected to start the call. Telephone Address Favourites Sort the contacts by Surname-First name or First name-Surname. Update the contacts from the telephone. Search Search for a contact in the directory. Create T e le pho n e Create a new contact in the system. A d d r e s s E m a i l Telephone Bluetooth Calls All View calls according to choice of presentation. Select a contact to start the call. Incoming Outgoing Missed View details for the contact.

slide 430:

70 19 20 21 22 1 15 16 17 18 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3

slide 431:

71 . 1 1 1 19 20 21 22 15 16 17 18 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Telephone OPTIONS Bluetooth connection All Display all telephones detected and saved. Connected Display all connected telephones. Search Start the search for a device to connect. Telephone OPTIONS Messages All Display messages according to the choice made. Received Sent Telephone OPTIONS Email Received Display emails according to the choice made. Sent Not read Mailbox

slide 432:

72 23 27 24 28 25 29 26 30 1 23 24 25 26 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3

slide 433:

73 . 1 1 27 28 29 30 23 24 25 26 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Telephone OPTIONS Settings Security Make driving safe. Voicemail Enter and save the number for the telephone voicemail. Ringtone Adjust the ringtone volume. Statistics Display data for the telephone connected. Save the options. Telephone OPTIONS Quick messages Delayed Select a quick message from the categories as required. My arrival Not available Other

slide 434:

74 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P a i r i n g a B l u etoot h ® P a i r i n g a B l u etoot h ® P a i r i n g a B l u etoot h t el ep h on e ® t el ep h on e ® As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with theBluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary a n d the ignition on. P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e t e l e p h o n e Select the system name in the list of d e v i c e s d e t e c t e d . In the system accept the connection request from the telephone. P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e s y s t e m P r e s s o n Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s o n " Bluetooth search ". Sel ec t " Search ". The list of telephones detected is d i s p l a ye d . If the pairing procedure fails it is recommended that you deactivate and then reactivate the "Bluetooth" function in your telephone. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: - Telephone hands-free kit telephone only - Streaming wireless play of audio files on the telephone - Mobile internet data . Depending on the type of telephone you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and m es sa g es . Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . Select one or more profiles. O r Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is "visible to all" telephone configuration. To complete the pairing whichever procedure used from the telephone or from the system ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the t e le pho n e . T h e " Mobile internet data " pro f i le must be activated for connected navigation having first activated sharing of the connection on your sm ar t p h o n e . C o n n e c t io n s h a r i ng

slide 435:

75 . 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Sel ec t " Bluetooth connection " t o display the list of paired devices. On return to the vehicle if the last telephone connected is present again it is automatically recognised and within about 30 seconds of switching on the ignition the connection is established without any action on your part Bluetooth activated. The services available depend on the network the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Check in your telephones manual and with your service provider for the services available to you. The ability of the system to connect with just one profile depends on the telephone. All three profiles may connect by default. Go to the Brands website for more information compatibility additional help .... To modify the connection profile : A u t o m at ic re c on n e c t io n P r e s s t h e " d e t a i l s " b u t t o n . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . Select one or more profiles. The profiles compatible with the system are HFP OPP PBAP A2DP AVRCP MAP and PAN.

slide 436:

76 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Re c e i v i n g a c a l l An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen. Make a short press on the steering mounted TEL button to accept an inc o m in g c all . M a k e a l o n g p r e s s on the steering mounted TEL b u t t o n to reject the call. O r A n d Sel ec t " End call ". Press on the name of the telephone chosen in the list to disconnect it. P r e s s a g a i n t o c o n n e c t i t . Select the basket at top right of the screen to display a basket alongside the telephone chosen. Press the basket alongside the telephone chosen to delete it. M a n a g i ng p ai re d t e l ep h o n e s This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing. P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Bluetooth connection " t o display the list of paired peripheral d e vic e s . D e l e t i n g a t e l e p h o n e

slide 437:

77 . 2 3 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 on the steering mounted button. Using the telephone is not recommended while driving. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering m o u n t e d c o n t r o l s . M a k i n g a c a l l C a l l i n g a n ew n u m b e r P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Enter the phone number using the d i git al k e y pa d . P r e s s " Call " to start the call. C a l l i n g a c o n t a c t P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Or make a long press on the steering mounted TEL b u t t o n . Sel ec t " Contact ". Select the desired contact from the list offered. Sel ec t " Call ". C a l l i n g a r e c e n t l y u s e d n u m b e r P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . M a k e a l o n g p r e s s Sel ec t " Calls ". Select the desired contact from the list offered. It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone as a safety measure first park the vehicle. O r

slide 438:

78 2 12 13 14 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 The access to " Messages " depends on the compatibility of the smartphone and the integral system. Depending on the smartphone access to your messages or email may be s l o w. M a n a g i n g m e s s a g e s T h e " Email " function allows email addresses to be entered for a contact but the system is not able to send e m a ils . M a n a g i n g c o n t a c t s / e n t r i e s P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Sel ec t " Contact ". Sel ec t " Create " to add a new contact. I n t h e " Telephone " tab enter the telephone numbers for the contact. I n t h e " Address " tab enter the addresses for the contact. I n t h e " Email " tab enter the email addresses for the contact. P r e s s " Answer " to send a quick message stored in the system. P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Messages " to display the list o f m es sa g es . Sel ec t t h e " All " or " Received " o r " Sent " t a b . Select the detail of the message chosen in one of the lists P r e s s " Call " to start the call. P r e s s " Play " to hear the message. The services available depend on the network the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Check in the manual for your smartphone and with your service provider for the services available to y o u .

slide 439:

79 . 1 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M a n a g i ng e m ai l P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Email " to display the list of m es sa g es . Sel ec t t h e " Received " or " Sent " o r " Not read " t a b . Select the email chosen in the list. P r e s s " Play " to start playing the ema i l . A c c e s s t o " Email " depends on the compatibility of the smartphone and the i n t e g r a l s y s t e m . M a n a g i ng qu ic k m e s s a g e s P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Press on the " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Quick messages " to display the list of messages. Sel ec t t h e " Delayed " or " My arrival " or " Not available " or " Other " t a b with the possibility of creating new m es sa g es . Select the message chosen in one of t h e l i s t s . P r e s s " Create " to write a new m es sa g e . P r e s s " Transfer " to select the a dd r e s se e s . P r e s s " Play " to start playing the m es sa g e .

slide 440:

80 12:13 185 215 23 °C 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 3 4 5 6 7 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 S et t i n g s A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Level 1 Level 2

slide 441:

81 . 2 5 6 7 3 4 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Comments Settings Color schemes Color schemes: 123 ... Having chosen the color scheme save the setting. Settings Audio settings Ambience Select the sound ambience. Distribution Sound distribution by the Arkamys © s y s t e m . © s y s t e m . © Sound Adjust the volume or activate linked to speed. Voice Adjust the voice volume. Ringtone Adjust the ringtone volume. Save the settings. Settings Turn off screen Function allowing the display to be switched off. Pressing the screen reactivates it. Settings Profile 1 2 3 Activate the profile selected.

slide 442:

82 1 15 16 15 16 9 8 10 11 12 13 14 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

slide 443:

83 . 1 15 16 1 1 11 12 13 14 9 8 10 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Comments Settings OPTIONS System settings Units Distance and fuel consumption Set the units used for distance fuel consumption and temperature. T e mp e r a t u re Factory settings R e in it i al i z e Restore the factory settings. System info V i e w View the versions of the different modules system mapping risk areas installed in the system as well as the updates available. Save the settings. Settings OPTIONS Languages All Select the language then confirm. Europe Asia America Having selected the language save the setting. Settings OPTIONS Screen configuration Animation Activate or deactivate settings. Brightness Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or of the instrument panel. Save the settings.

slide 444:

84 1 17 18 19 20 21 22 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

slide 445:

85 . 1 17 18 1 1 20 19 21 22 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Comments Settings OPTIONS Setting the time-date Date D at e Enter the date and select the date format. D at e f o r m at : Time T i m e Set the time. T i m e Z o n e Define the time zone. T im e fo r m a t: Select the time format: 12h / 24h. S yn c h r o n i sa ti o n wi t h GPS UTC: Activate or deactivate synchronisation with the satellites. Save the settings. Settings OPTIONS Setting of the profiles Profile 1 Enter settings for the profiles. Profile 2 Profile 3 Common profile Save the settings. Settings OPTIONS Driver screen configuration Personalisation of the dashboard Choose and select the display information required on the dashboard. Confirm the selections.

slide 446:

86 3 4 5 6 7 1 19 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r o f il e s e t t in g s A u d io s e t t i n g s P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . Sel ec t " Audio settings ". Sel ec t " Ambience " O r " Position " O r " Sound " O r " Voice " O r " Ringtone ". O n - b o a r d a u d i o : A r k a m y s © S ou nd © S ou nd © Staging optimises the distribution of sound in the passenger compartment. The settings for " Position " A l l passengers Driver and Front only are common to all sources. Activate or Deactivate " Touch tones " " Volume linked to speed " a n d " Auxiliary input ". The sound distribution or spatialisation with the Arkamys © system is audio processing that allows the quality of the sound to be adapted according to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the front and rear s pe a k e r s c on f i g u ra t i on . T h e a u d i o Ambience se t t i ngs 6 ambiences available as well as the Bass Medium and Treble se t t i ngs are different and independent for each sound source. Activate or Deactivate " Loudness ". P r e s s " OK " to save the settings. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Profile 1 " " Profile 2 " " Profile 3 " or " Common profile ". Sel ec t " Setting of the profiles ". Press this button to enter a name for the profile using the virtual keypad. As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver changes to settings must only be done with the vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary

slide 447:

87 . 3 2 4 5 6 7 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Sel ec t a " Profile " 1 or 2 or 3 to associate the " Audio settings " w i t h i t . Sel ec t " Audio settings ". Sel ec t " Ambience ". O r " Distribution ". O r " Sound ". O r " Voice ". O r " Ringtone ". The location for the photograph is square the system deforms the original photograph if in another format. Initialisation of the profile selected activates the English language by default. P r e s s " OK " to save the settings. P r e s s " OK " to accept the transfer of t h e pho t o g r a ph . P r e s s " OK " again to save the se t t i ngs . Press this button to add a photograph to the profile. Insert a USB memory stick containing the photograph in the USB port. Select the photograph. Press this button to initialise the pro f i le s e le c t e d .

slide 448:

88 1 1 1 8 9 10 15 16 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " System settings ". Sel ec t " Screen configuration ". Sel ec t " Units " to change the units for distance fuel consumption and t e mp e r a t u re . Sel ec t " Languages " to change the lan g uag e . Activate or deactivate " Automatic scrolling ". Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or of the in s t r u m e n t pan e l . Sel ec t " Factory settings " to return to the initial settings. Sel ec t " System info " to display the versions of the different modules installed in the system. M o di f y i ng s y s t e m s e t t i ng s Returning the system to factory settings activates the English language by d e f a ult . Sel ec t " Animation ". Sel ec t " Brightness ". S e l e c t t h e l an g u a g e P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Setting the time-date ". S e t t i n g t h e d at e

slide 449:

89 . 1 17 18 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t " Date ". Sel ec t " Time ". Sel ec t " Setting the time-date ". Adjustment of the time and date is only available if "GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. The change between winter and summer time is done by changing the t i m e z o n e . The system does not automatically manage the change between winter and summer time depending on c o u n t r y . S e t t i n g t h e t i m e Press this button to define the date. Press this button to adjust the time using the virtual keypad. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . Press this button to define the time z o n e . Select the display format of the date. Select the display format for the time 12h / 24h. A c t i v at e o r d e a c t i v at e synchronisation with the satellites U T C . Every time the color scheme is changed the system restarts temporarily displaying a black screen. As a safety measure the procedure for changing the color scheme is only possible with the vehicle stationary. P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . Sel ec t " Color schemes ". Select a color scheme in the list then press " OK " t o c o n f i r m . C olo r s ch e m e s

slide 450:

90 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system. QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The route calculation is not successful. The route settings may conflict with the current location exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway. Check the route settings in the "Navigation" menu. The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs. The audible warning of "Danger areas" does not work. The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings without the possibility of adjusting the volume in the "Navigation" menu. The system does not suggest a detour around an incident on the route. The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select setting for the "Traffic info" function in the list of route settings Without Manual or Automatic. I receive a "Danger area" alert which is not on my route. Other than guidance the system announces all "Danger areas" positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on nearby or parallel roads. Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the "Danger area". Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement. Frequently asked questions N a v i g at io n

slide 451:

91 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time. On starting it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traffic information. Wait until the traffic information is being received correctly display of the traffic information icons on the map. In certain countries only major routes motorways... are listed for the traffic information. This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available. The altitude is not displayed. On starting the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Wait until the system has started up completely so that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites. Depending on the geographical environment tunnel... or the weather the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.

slide 452:

92 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 R ad io QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed.... The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling. Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area. The environment hills buildings tunnels basement car parks... block reception including in RDS mode. This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system. The aerial is absent or has been damaged for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park. Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received. The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio stations" secondary menu. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name the title of the song for example. The system interprets this information as the name of the station. The name of the radio station changes.

slide 453:

93 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M ed ia QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait around 2 to 3 minutes. Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time. Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick. The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player. The CD is inserted upside down is unplayable does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player does not recognise. Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too badly damaged. Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section. The audio systems CD player does not play DVDs. Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system because they are not of adequate quality. The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player udf .... The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system. There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD or connection of a USB memory stick. When a new medium is inserted the system reads a certain amount of data directory title artist etc.. This may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. This phenomenon is normal. The CD player sound is poor. The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions. The audio equipment settings bass treble ambiences are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0 without selecting an ambience.

slide 454:

94 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephones Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Check that your telephones Bluetooth function is switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all". The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone at the Brands website services. The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible. The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system to maximum if required and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary. The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone communication. Reduce the ambient noise level close the windows reduce the booster fan speed slow down .... T el e p h on e QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing. The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders. Playing of streaming files does not start. The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

slide 455:

95 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card the contacts on the telephone or both. When both synchronizations are selected some contacts may be duplicated. Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts". Contacts are not shown in alphabetical order. Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen contacts can be transferred in a specific order. Modify the display setting in the telephone directory. The system does not receive SMS text messages. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the system. QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected. The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble and bass and vice-versa. Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. In changing the equalizer setting treble and bass return to zero. When changing the balance settings the distribution setting is deselected. The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings and vice-versa. Modify the balance or distribution settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When changing an distribution setting the balance setting is deselected. S e t t in g s

slide 456:

96 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap01_NAC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources. For optimum sound quality the audio settings can be adapted to the different sound sources which may result in audible differences when changing source. Check that the audio settings are adapted to the sources listened to. Adjust Balance Treble Bass to the middle position select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode. With the engine off the system switches off after a few minutes of use. When the engine is switched off the systems operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicles battery. Start the vehicles engine to increase the battery charge. The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available if the synchronisation with the satellites is deactivated. Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting. Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS synchronisation" UTC.

slide 457:

97 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P E UG E O T C o n ne c t Ra d i o Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth ® Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth ® Multimedia audio system - Applications - Bluetooth t el ep h on e ® t el ep h on e ® C o nt e nt s First steps 98 Steering mounted controls - Type 1 100 Steering mounted controls - Type 2 101 Menus 102 Applications 104 Radio Media 112 Telephone 124 Settings 138 Frequently asked questions 149 The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. The display of the Energy Economy Mode message signals that a change to standby is imminent. The different functions and settings described vary according to the version and configuration of your vehicle. The link below gives access to OSS Open Source Software codes for the system. h t t p : / / w w w . p s a - pe u ge o t - c i t r o e n . c om / os s As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands- free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

slide 458:

98 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 F i r st st e p s With the engine running a press mutes the sound. With the ignition off a press turns the s y s t e m o n . Vo l u m e . Use the buttons either side of or below the touch screen for access to the menus then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. Press in the grey zone to go back a level or confirm. Press the back arrow to go back a level or c o nf i r m. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" type. To clean the screen use a soft non- abrasive cloth spectacles cloth with no additional product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet han d s .

slide 459:

99 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Select the audio source depending on version: - F M / D A B / A M s t a t i o n s . - T e l e p h o n e c o n n e c t e d b y B l u e t o o t h a n d using Bluetooth audio streaming. - C D p l a ye r . - U S B m e m o r y s t i c k . - Media player connected to the auxiliary socket Jack cable not supplied. D ep end i ng o n e q u i p m en t . Certain information is displayed permanently in the upper band of the touch screen: - R e m i n d e r o f t h e a i r c o n d i t i o n i n g information and direct access to the corresponding menu. - Reminder of the Radio Media and Telephone menu information. - Access to the Settings of the touch screen and digital instrument panel. In very hot conditions the volume may be limited to protect the system. It may go into standby screen and sound off for at least 5 minutes The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger c om p a r t m e n t h a s d r op ped . In the "Settings" menu you can create a profile for just one person or a group of people with common points with the possibility of entering a multitude of settings radio presets audio settings ambiences ... these settings are taken into account automatically.

slide 460:

100 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Steering mounted controls - Type 1 Radio : Short press: display the list of radio stations. Long press: update the list. Media : Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the sorting op t i on s . D e c r e a s e v o l u m e . Radio : Select the previous / next preset radio station. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Media : Select of the previous / next track Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Mute / Restore sound by simultaneously pressing the increase and decrease volume buttons. Change audio source Radio USB AUX if a device is connected CD S t r e am in g C on f i r m a s el ec t i on . I n c r e a s e v o l u m e .

slide 461:

101 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Media short press: change the multimedia source. Telephone short press: call. Call in progress short press: access to telephone menu. Telephone long press: reject an incoming call end call access to t e le pho n e me n u . D e c r e a s e v o l u m e . Voice commands : Short press smartphone voice commands via the system. Mute/ Restore the sound. O r Mute by pressing the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons. Radio rotate: previous / next preset. Media rotate: previous / next track move in a list. Short press : confirm a selection other than selection access to p r e s e t s . Radio : display the list of stations. Media : display the list of tracks. Radio press and hold: update the list of stations received. I n c r e a s e v o l u m e . Steering mounted controls - Type 2

slide 462:

102 215 185 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M e nu s R ad io M e d i a A p p l i c at io n s Select an audio source or radio station. A c c e s s c o n f i g u r a ble e q u i pme n t . A ir c ondi t ion i ng Manage the different temperature and air flow se t t i ngs . N a v i g at io n Configure the guidance and select your destination via MirrorLink TM or CarPlay ® . A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n .

slide 463:

103 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 S e t t in g s D r ivin g T el e p h on e Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound balance ambience ... and the display language units date time .... Activate deactivate or configure certain vehicle f un c t i o n s . Connect a telephone by Bluetooth ® . Operate certain applications on a smartphone connected via MirrorLink TM or CarPlay ® .

slide 464:

104 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 A ppl ic a t i o n s A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n / a c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t .

slide 465:

105 . 2 3 4 4 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Comments Applications Scented air freshener Select the fragrance. OFF Deactivate the scented air freshener. Low Adjust the intensity of diffusion of the fragrance. Medium High Confirm the selection and the settings. Applications Temperature conditioning State Activate/deactivate the temperature conditioning. Settings Configure the pre-conditioning Save the parameters. Confirm the settings. Applications i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Select an ambience combining each of the equipment pre-sets and/or save it in a user profile. Boost Profile management i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Select an ambience combining each of the equipment pre-sets and/or save it in a user profile. Boost Profile management

slide 466:

106 1 7 8 6 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 467:

107 . 1 6 7 8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Applications Trip computer Instant System providing information about the current journey range consumption…. Trip 1 Trip 2 Go to the Applications page. Applications Photos Photo gallery Photos Go to the photo gallery. Go back a level. Applications OPTIONS Bluetooth connection Search Start the search for a device to be connected. Delete Delete one or more devices.

slide 468:

108 9 13 12 11 10 14 4 4 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 A c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t

slide 469:

109 . 13 12 10 11 9 14 4 4 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Applications i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Boost O R i-Cockpit Amplify Relax Boost Settings Fragrance Select a fragrance. Lighting Adjust the intensity of the ambience lighting. Ambience Adjust the sound ambience. Driver massage Select and configure the driver massage. Passenger Massage Select and configure the passenger massage. Dynamic Set the driving mode. Save settings Save the settings. Reset the mode Reset the ambience parameters. Confirm the selections and settings. Deactivate Deactivate the "i-Cockpit Amplify function. Profile management Profile 1 Configure the profiles. Profile 2 Profile 3 Common profile Save the settings. Confirm the selections and settings.

slide 471:

111 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. The system can read folders and image files in the formats: .tiff .gif .jpg/jpeg .bmp .png. V i e w i n g p hotos P r e s s Applications to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " Photos ". Sel ec t a f o ld e r . Press this button to display the details of the photo. Press the back arrow to go back a l ev e l . Select an image to view. To protect the system do not use a U S B h u b .

slide 472:

112 2 1 3 4 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 R a d i o M e di a A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Level 1 Level 2

slide 473:

113 . 1 2 3 4 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Comments Radio Media SOURCES Radio Select change of source. Bluetooth CD AUX USB iPod Radio Media Frequency FM / DAB / AM Display the current radio station. Radio Media List Update the list according to the stations received. Preset Make a short press to preset the station. Radio Media Preset Select a preset station or preset a station. Radio Media OPTIONS A M b a n d / D A B b a n d / F M b a n d Press the Band button to change waveband. Audio settings Configure the audio settings. News Activate or deactivate the options. TA RDS FM-DAB Follow-up Radio Media 87.5 MHz Enter a frequency of the FM and AM bands on the virtual keypad.

slide 474:

114 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 475:

115 . 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Radio Media SOURCES Radio Frequency Display the current radio station. List Display the list of stations received. Preset Select a preset station or preset a station. OPTIONS FM band / DAB band / AM band Press the band button to change band. Audio settings Configure the audio settings. News Activate or deactivate the options. TA RDS FM-DAB Follow-up Radio Media SOURCES Bluetooth OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings. Radio Media SOURCES CD Display the details of the music being played. OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings.

slide 476:

116 1 5 5 6 7 8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 477:

117 . 1 1 6 7 5 5 8 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Radio Media SOURCES AUX OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings. Radio Media SOURCES USB Player Display the details of the music being played. Tracks list Display the current selection. Library Display the music library. OPTIONS Audio settings Configure the audio settings.

slide 478:

118 4 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Radio Media to display the m e n u . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e f r e q u e n c y . Enter the FM and AM waveband values using the virtual keypad. Press one of the buttons for an automatic search for radio stations. R ad io S e l e c t i ng a s t at ion Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved by the Brand such as a USB charger connected to the 12V socket. The exterior environment hills buildings tunnel car park below ground... may prevent reception even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio s y s t e m . O r O r O r Move the cursor for a manual search for frequencies up or down. Select a radio station or frequency. Select a radio station or frequency. P r e s s " Preset ". P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Make a short press on the star outline. If the star is solid the radio station is already preset. Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. P r e s s " Band " to change waveband. Press in the grey zone to confirm. P re s e t a s t at ion C ha ng i ng w a v e b and P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m .

slide 479:

119 . 5 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press in the grey zone to confirm. P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. A c t i v at e / d e a c t i v at e " RDS ". Activate / Deactivate " News ". Activate / Deactivate " TA ". TA ". TA A c t i v a t e / D e a c t i v a t e R D S RDS if activated allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However in certain conditions coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey. The "Radio Text" function allows information transmitted by the radio station and related to the station or the song playing to be displayed. D i s p l a y t e x t i n f o r m a t i o n P l a y T A m e s s a g e s The TA Traffic Announcement function gives priority to TAalert messages. To operate this function needs good reception of a radio station that carries this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast the current media is automatically interrupted so that the TA message can be heard. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message.

slide 480:

120 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 A u d io s e t t i n g s P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " Audio settings ". O n - b o a r d a u d i o : A r k a m y s © S ou nd © S ou nd © Staging optimises the distribution of sound in the passenger compartment. The sound distribution or spatialisation with the Arkamys © system is audio © system is audio © processing that allows the quality of the sound to be adapted according to the number of passengers in the vehicle. O n t h e " Tone " tab the Ambience a u d i o settings and Bass Medium and Treble are different and independent for each a u d i o s o u r c e . O n t h e " Balance " tab the All passengers Driver and Driver and Driver Front only settings are common to all sources. O n t h e " Sound " tab activate or deactivate " Volume linked to speed " " Auxiliary input " and " Touch tones ". P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. Sel ec t t h e "Tone " o r "Balance " or " Sound " o r "Ringtones " tab to configure the audio settings. Press the back arrow to confirm.

slide 481:

121 . 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 D A B r ad io D i g i t a l A u d io B r o ad c a s t i n g P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. F M - D A B F o l l o w - u p T e r re s t r i al D i g i t al R a d io "DAB" does not cover 100 of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor the "FM-DAB Follow-up" allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatically switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station if there is one. If the "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. Once the digital signal is restored the system automatically changes back to " D A B ". Digital radio provides higher quality reception. The different multiplexes offer a choice of radio stations arranged in al p hab e t i c al o r d e r . If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM" or if the "FM-DAB Follow-up" is not activated the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak. Activate / Deactivate " FM-DAB Follow-up ". P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s " Band " to select " DAB band ". Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press in the grey zone to confirm.

slide 482:

122 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M ed ia US B p o r t S e l e c t i n g t h e so u r c e P r e s s t h e " SOURCES " b u t t o n . P r e s s Radio Media to display the p r im ar y pag e . The system builds playlists in temporary memory an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified the subsequent loading time w i l l b e s h o r t e r . Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable not supplied. A u x i l i a r y so c k e t A UX First adjust the volume of your portable device to a high level. Then adjust the volume of your audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" has been checked in the audio settings. Connect the portable device MP3 player… to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable n o t sup p li e d . C h o o s e t h e s o u r c e . Bl u eto ot h St r e a m i n g ® Bl u eto ot h St r e a m i n g ® Bl u eto ot h St r e a m i n g Streaming allows you to listen to music from y o u r t e le pho n e . The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on your portable device to a high level. Then adjust the volume of your system. If play does not start automatically it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the smartphone. Control is from the portable device or by using the systems touch buttons. Once connected in Streaming mode the smartphone is considered to be a m e d i a s o u r c e . To protect the system do not use a U S B h u b .

slide 483:

123 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 C o n n e c t i ng A p p l e ® C o n n e c t i ng A p p l e ® C o n n e c t i ng A p p l e p la y er s ® p la y er s ® C o n n e c t t h e A pple ® player to the USB port ® player to the USB port ® using a suitable cable not supplied. P l a y s t a r t s a u t o m a t i c a l l y . Control is via the audio system. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts you can also use a classification structured in the form of a library. The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification playlists for example and confirm to go down through the menu to the de si re d t r a c k . The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple ® p l a ye r . ® p l a ye r . ® The audio equipment will only play audio files with ".wav .wma .aac .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR Variable Bit Rate mode. No other type of file .mp4 ... can be played. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. The sampling rates supported are 11 22 44 and 48 KHz. It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using of special characters e.g.: " " ù to avoid any playing and displaying problems. In order to be able to play a burned CDR or CDRW select standards ISO 9660 level 1 2 or Joliet if possible when burning the CD. If the disc is burned in another format it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same burning standard is always used on an individual disc with the lowest speed possible 4x maximum for the best acoustic quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD the Joliet standard is recommended. I n f o r m at io n a nd a d v ic e Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 file allocation table. The system supports USB Mass Storage devices BlackBerry ® d e vic e s ® d e vic e s ® or Apple ® players via USB ports. The ® players via USB ports. The ® adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals not recognised on connection must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable not supplied or via Bluetooth streaming depending on compatibility. It is recommended that the original USB cable for the portable device is used. To protect the system do not use a U S B h u b .

slide 484:

124 4 4 4 1 1 1 5 5 5 3 3 3 2 2 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 T e le pho n e A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 485:

125 . 1 2 3 4 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Telephone Bluetooth search PHONE Bluetooth connection Search Start the search for a device to be connected. Delete Delete one or more devices. MirrorLink Open the MirrorLink function. CarPlay Open the CarPlay function. Telephone Bluetooth search Keypad Enter a telephone number. Telephone Bluetooth search Recent calls All View the calls according to the presentation selected. Select a contact to make the call. Outgoing Missed Incoming Telephone Bluetooth search Contacts Search Confirm Search for a contact in the contacts directory. Telephone Go to the details of the contact sheet.

slide 486:

126 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2

slide 487:

127 . 5 5 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Comments Telephone OPTIONS On hold auto ON - OFF Activate or deactivate the automatic placing on hold of the current conversation. Telephone OPTIONS Sort contacts by name Sort contacts by first name Sort the contacts by Surname-first name or First name-surname. Telephone OPTIONS Ring volume Adjust the volume of the ringtone.

slide 488:

128 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M ir r o r L i nk TM s ma r t p h o n e c o n n e c t io n

slide 489:

129 . 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. Operation must be with the vehicle stationary . stationary . stationary The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the MirrorLink TM technology to be displayed in the vehicles screen. The principles and standards are constantly evolving. For the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work correctly the smartphone must be unlocked update the operating system of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the system. For the list of eligible smartphones connect to the Brands internet website in your country. T h e " M i r r o r Li n k TM " function requires a compatible smartphone and a ppl ic a t i o n s . There may be a wait for the availability of applications depending on the quality of your network. When connecting a smartphone to the system it is recommended that "Bluetooth ® " be started on the smartphone Depending on the smartphone it may be necessary to activate the " MirrorLink TM MirrorLink TM MirrorLink " f u n c ti o n . During the procedure several screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. Accept to start and end the c on n ec t i on . Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. P r e s s " MirrorLink TM " to start the application in the system. Once connection is established a page is displayed with the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to the MirrorLink TM t ec h n o lo g y . Access to the different audio sources remains accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink TM display using touch buttons in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons Telephone not connected by Bluetooth ® Bluetooth ® Bluetooth Telephone connected by Bluetooth ® Telephone connected by Bluetooth ® Telephone connected by Bluetooth From the system press " Telephone " to display the primary page. From the system press " Telephone " to display the primary page. As a safety measure applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving. P r e s s t h e " PHONE " button to display the secondary page. P r e s s " MirrorLink TM " to start the application in the system.

slide 490:

130 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 491:

131 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Telephone MirrorLink TM Go to or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to the MirrorLink TM t ec h n o lo g y . Go to a menu list depending on the application chosen. "Back": abandon the current operation go up one level. "Home": go to or return to the "Car mode" page on your smartphone. Go to the primary page of the "Telephone" menu.

slide 492:

132 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 C a r Pl a y ® C a r Pl a y ® C a r Pl a y smartphone connection ® smartphone connection ®

slide 493:

133 . 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. Operation must be with the vehicle stationary . stationary . stationary The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the CarPlay ® t ec h n o lo g y ® t ec h n o lo g y ® to be displayed in the vehicles screen having first activated the CarPlay ® function in the smartphone. As the principles and standards are constantly changing it is recommended that you keep your smartphones operating system updated . For the list of eligible smartphones go to the Brands internet website in your coun tr y. Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system press Telephone to display the CarPlay ® i n t e r f a c e . ® i n t e r f a c e . ® P r e s s " CarPlay " to display the CarPlay ® i n t e r f a c e . ® i n t e r f a c e . ® On connecting the USB cable the CarPlay ® function deactivates the ® function deactivates the ® systems Bluetooth ® m o d e . ® m o d e . ® From the system press Telephone to display the primary page. P r e s s t h e " PHONE " button to go to the secondary page. O r If the smartphone is already connected by Bluetooth ® . You can go to the CarPlay ® navigation at any time by pressing the systems Navigation b u t t o n .

slide 494:

134 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P a i r i n g a B l u etoot h ® P a i r i n g a B l u etoot h ® P a i r i n g a B l u etoot h t el ep h on e ® t el ep h on e ® As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands- free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on. P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e t e l e p h o n e Select the name of the system in the list of devices detected. In the system accept the connection request from the telephone. P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e s y s t e m P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " Bluetooth search ". The list of telephones detected is d i s p l a ye d . If the pairing procedure fails it is recommended that you deactivate and then reactivate the Bluetooth function in your telephone. Depending on the type of telephone you may be asked to accept or not the transfer of your contacts and m es sa g es . Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list. Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is "visible to all" telephone configuration. To complete the pairing whichever procedure used from the telephone or from the system ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the t e le pho n e .

slide 495:

135 . 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " Bluetooth connection " t o display the list of paired devices. On return to the vehicle if the last telephone connected is present again it is automatically recognised and within about 30 seconds of switching on the ignition the connection is established without any action on your part Bluetooth activated. The services available depend on the network the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Check in your telephones manual and with your service provider for the services available to you. The ability of the system to connect with just one profile depends on the telephone. All three profiles may connect by d e f a ult . Go to the Brands website for more information compatibility additional help .... T o m o d i f y t h e c o n n e c t i o n p r o f i l e : A u t o m at ic re c on n e c t io n Press the "details" button of a paired d e vic e . P r e s s t h e " PHONE " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s " OK " t o c o n f i r m . Select one or more profiles. The profiles compatible with the system are HFP OPP PBAP A2DP AVRCP MAP and PAN. The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: - " Telephone " hands-free kit telephone only - " Streaming " wireless playing of the audio files on the telephone - " Internet data ".

slide 496:

136 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Re c e i v i n g a c a l l An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen. Make a short press on the steering mounted PHONE button to accept an inc o m in g c all . M a k e a l o n g p r e s s on the steering mounted PHONE button to reject the call. O r A n d P r e s s " End call ". Press on the name of the telephone chosen in the list to disconnect it. P r e s s a g a i n t o c o n n e c t i t . Press the basket at the top right of the screen to display a basket alongside the telephone chosen. Press the basket alongside the telephone chosen to delete it. M a n a g i ng p ai re d t e l ep h o n e s This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing. P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s t h e " PHONE " button to go to the secondary page. P r e s s " Bluetooth connection " t o display the list of paired peripheral d e vic e s . D e l e t i n g a t e l e p h o n e Using the telephone is not recommended while driving. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering m o u n t e d c o n t r o l s . M a k i n g a c a l l C a l l i n g a n ew n u m b e r P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Enter the phone number using the d i git al k e y pa d . P r e s s " Call " to start the call.

slide 497:

137 . 4 3 5 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 on the steering mounted button. C a l l i n g a c o n t a c t S e t t i ng t h e r i ng t on e P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . Or make a long press on the steering mounted PHONE b u t t o n . P r e s s " Contacts ". Select the desired contact from the list offered. P r e s s " Call ". C a l l i n g a r e c e n t l y u s e d n u m b e r P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . M a k e a l o n g p r e s s P r e s s " Recent calls ". Select the desired contact from the list offered. It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone as a safety measure first park the vehicle. O r P r e s s Telephone to display the p r im ar y pag e . P r e s s " Ring volume " to display the v o l u m e b a r . Press the arrows or move the cursor to set the ring volume. P r e s s t h e " OPTIONS " button to go to the secondary page.

slide 498:

138 3 4 1 2 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 S et t i n g s A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n / a c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 499:

139 . 1 2 3 4 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Settings Brightness Ambience Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or of the instrument panel. Settings Profiles Profile 1 Select a profile. Profile 2 Profile 3 Common profile Name: Profile name modification Configure the profiles. Reset the profile Yes / No Profile activated Activate/deactivate the profile selected. Save the settings. Settings Dark Function which switches off the lit display. Pressing the screen reactivates it.

slide 500:

140 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 A c c o r d i n g t o e q u i p m e n t Level 1 Level 2

slide 501:

141 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Comments Settings Configuration System configuration Configure certain system parameters. Ambience Select an ambience for the screen integrated in the system. Language Select the display language for the the screen and/or the instrument panel. Screen configuration Set the configuration of the screen and/or the instrument panel. Customization Configure the instrument panel for a personalised display. Date and time Set the date and time and select the display format.

slide 502:

142 6 5 7 8 9 10 11 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 503:

143 . 6 5 7 8 9 10 11 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Settings Configuration System configuration Units Distance and fuel consumption Configure the display units for the distance consumption and temperature. Temperatures Factory settings Reset Restore the original settings. System info View Consult the version of the different modules installed in the system. Save the parameters. Settings Configuration Ambience Select an ambience for the screen integrated in the system. Confirm the selection and start the change of ambience. Settings Configuration Language All Select the display language for the screen and/or the instrument panel. Europe Asia America Save the parameter.

slide 504:

144 14 15 14 15 12 13 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

slide 505:

145 . 12 13 14 15 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Settings Configuration Screen configuration Brightness Select the display brightness level. Animation Automatic scrolling Activate or deactivate the parameters. Animated transitions Save the parameters. Settings Configuration Temperature conditioning Customization Choose and select the display information required. Confirm Confirm the selections. Settings Configuration Date and time Time Time Set the time. Time Zone Set the time zone. AM Select the display format. 12h GPS Synchronisation Activate or deactivate the synchronisation with the satellites. Save the settings. Date Date Set the date and select the display format. Setting the date Save the settings.

slide 506:

146 1 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r o f il e s e t t in g s A d j u s t t h e b r i g h t n e s s P r e s s " OK " t o s a v e . Sel ec t " Profile 1 " or " Profile 2 " o r " Profile 3 " or " Common profile ". P r e s s " Profiles ". Press this button to enter a name for the profile using the virtual keypad As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver changes to settings must only be done with the vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary . vehicle stationary Press this button to activate the pro f i le . Press this button to initialise the pro f i le s e le c t e d . P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . Move the cursor to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or of the instrument panel according to version. P r e s s Brightness . Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow again to c o nf i r m.

slide 507:

147 . 5 6 7 12 13 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s " Configuration " to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . P r e s s " Configuration " to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . P r e s s " Configuration " to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . P r e s s " System configuration ". P r e s s " Screen configuration ". P r e s s " Units " to change the units for distance fuel consumption and t e mp e r a t u re . Sel ec t " Language " to change the lan g uag e . Activate or deactivate: " Automatic scrolling ". Sel ec t " Animated transitions ". Move the cursor to set the brightness of the screen and/or instrument panel according to version. P r e s s " Factory settings " to return to the initial settings. P r e s s " System info " to display the versions of the different modules installed in the system. M o di f y i ng s y s t e m s e t t i ng s Returning the system to factory settings activates the English language by default according to version. P r e s s " Animation ". P r e s s " Brightness ". S e l e c t t h e l an g u a g e Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to confirm.

slide 508:

148 15 14 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . Sel ec t " Date ". Sel ec t " Time ". P r e s s " Date and time ". Adjustment of the time and date is only available if "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. The change between winter and summer time is done by changing the t i m e z o n e . The system does not automatically manage the change between winter and summer time depending on the c o u n t r y o f s a l e . S e t t i n g t h e t i m e Press this button to define the date. Press this button to adjust the time using the virtual keypad. Press the back arrow to save the d at e . Press this button to define the time z o n e . Select the display format of the date. Select the display format for the time 12h / 24h. A c t i v at e o r d e a c t i v at e synchronisation with satellites UTC. P r e s s Settings to display the primary pag e . P r e s s " Date and time ". S e t t i n g t h e d at e P r e s s " Configuration " to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . P r e s s " Configuration " to go to the s e c o n d ar y pag e . P r e s s " OK " to save the time. Press the back arrow to save the se t t i ngs . Press the back arrow again to c o nf i r m.

slide 509:

149 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 R ad io QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed.... The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling. Activate the "RDS" function by means of the upper band to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area. The environment hills buildings tunnels basement car parks... block reception including in RDS mode. This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system. The aerial is absent or has been damaged for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park. Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received. The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the "Radio" page. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name the title of the song for example. The system interprets this information as the name of the station. The name of the radio station changes. Frequently asked questions The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

slide 510:

150 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 M ed ia QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait around 2 to 3 minutes. Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time. Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick. Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing. The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders. Playing of streaming files does not start. The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

slide 511:

151 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephones Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Check that your telephones Bluetooth function is switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all". The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone at the Brands website services. The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible. The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system to maximum if required and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary. The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone communication. Reduce the ambient noise level close the windows reduce the booster fan speed slow down .... Contacts are not shown in alphabetical order. Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen contacts can be transferred in a specific order. Modify the display setting in the telephone directory. T el ep h on e

slide 512:

152 Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap02_RCC-2-2-0_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected. The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the settings for treble and bass and vice-versa. Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. In changing the equalizer setting treble and bass return to zero. When changing the balance settings the distribution setting is deselected. The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings and vice-versa. Modify the balance or distribution settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When changing a distribution setting the balance setting is deselected. There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources. For optimum sound quality the audio settings can be adapted to the different sound sources which may result in audible differences when changing source. Check that the audio settings are adapted to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio functions to the middle position. With the engine off the system switches off after a few minutes of use. When the engine is switched off the systems operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicles battery. Start the vehicles engine to increase the battery charge. S e t t in g s

slide 515:

153 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 Bluetooth ® a ud i o s y s t em C o nt e nt s First steps 154 Steering mounted controls - Type 1 155 Steering mounted controls - Type 2 156 Menus 157 Radio 158 DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting radio 160 Media 162 Telephone 167 Frequently asked questions 172 Your audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. All work on the system must be carried out exclusively by a dealer or qualified workshop to avoid any risk of electrocution fire or mechanical faults. To avoid discharging the battery the audio system may switch off after a few minutes if the engine is not running. The different functions and adjustments described vary according to the version and configuration of your vehicle. As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver the pairing of your Bluetooth telephone to the Bluetooth hands-free audio system must only be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ig n i ti o n o n .

slide 516:

154 Audio and Telematics F i r st st e p s P r e s s : O n / O f f R o t a t e : a d j u s t v o l u m e . Short press: change audio source Radio USB AUX if a device is connected CD Streaming. Long press: display the Telephone menu if a telephone is connected. Radio : Short press: display the list of radio stations. Long press: update the list. Media: Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the sorting op t i on s . Select the screen display mode between: Date Audio functions Trip computer T e le pho n e . A d j u s t a ud i o se t t i ngs : Front/rear fader left/right balance bass/treble loudness audio ambience. Activation / Deactivation of automatic volume adjustment linked to the speed of the vehicle. Radio : Manual step by step search up / down for radio stations. Select previous / next MP3 track. Media: Select previous / next folder / genre / artist / playlist on the USB device. Scroll in a list. Abandon the current operation. Go up one level menu or folder. Confirm or display contextual menu. Buttons 1 to 6. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a station. Radio: Automatic step by step search up / down for radio stations. Media: Select previous / next CD USB streaming track. Scroll in a list. A c c e s s t o m a i n m e n u . Activate / Deactivate TA traffic announcements Long press: select type of announcement. Select waveband: FM / DAB / AM.

slide 517:

155 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 Steering mounted controls - Type 1 Radio : Short press: display the list of radio stations. Long press: update the list. Media : Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the sorting op t i on s . D e c r e a s e v o l u m e . Radio : Select the previous / next preset radio station. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Media: Select of the previous / next track. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Mute / Restore sound by simultaneously pressing the increase and decrease volume buttons. Other than telephone calls : Short press: change audio source Radio USB AUX if a device is connected CD Streaming confirm if the " Telephone " menu is open. Long press: open the " Telephone " menu. In the event of a telephone call : Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call. During a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual telephone menu. Long press: end the call. C on f i r m a s el ec t i on . I n c r e a s e v o l u m e .

slide 518:

156 Audio and Telematics Steering mounted controls - Type 2 D e c r e a s e v o l u m e . M u t e / R e s t o r e s o u n d . Other than telephone call : Short press: change audio source Radio USB AUX if a device is connected CD Streaming confirm if the " Telephone " menu is open. Long press: open the " Telephone " menu. In the event of a telephone call: Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call. During a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual telephone menu. Long press: end the call. I n c r e a s e v o l u m e . Access to the main menu. Start voice recognition of your smartphone via the system. R a d i o : Short press: display the list of radio stations. Long press: update the list. Media: Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the sorting op t i on s . Radio: Select the previous / next preset radio station. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Media: Select the previous / next track. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. P r e s s t h e t h u m b w h e e l : c o n f i r m .

slide 519:

157 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 M e nu s "Multimedia ": Media settings Radio se t t i ngs . Depending on version. Move from one menu to another. E n t e r a m e n u . " Trip computer ". " Maintenance ": Diagnosis Warning log ... . "Connections " : M anag e connections search for devices. " Telephone ": Call Directory management Telephone management End call. " Personalisation-configuration ": Define the vehicle settings Choice of language Display configuration Choice of units Date and time adj u s t m e n t . P r e s s t h e " MENU " b u t t o n .

slide 520:

158 Audio and Telematics RDS S h o r t p r o c e d u r e L ong p r o c e du re The external environment hills buildings tunnels basement car parks ... may block reception including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio system. P r e s s t h e " MENU " b u t t o n . Sel ec t " Audio functions ". P r e s s OK . Sel ec t t h e " FM waveband preferences " f u n c t i o n . P r e s s OK . Sel ec t " RDS ". P r e s s OK RDS is displayed in the sc re e n . I n " Radio " mode press the OK button to activate or deactivate RDS directly. RDS if activated enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However in certain conditions coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of a station that can occur during a journey. If RDS is not available the RDS symbol appears barred in the screen. R a d i o S e l e c t i n g a s t at io n P r e s s t h e SOURCE b u t t o n repeatedly and select the radio. Press this button to select a waveband FM / AM / DAB. Press one of the buttons to carry out an automatic search for radio s t a ti o n s . Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search up / down for radio f r e q u e n c i e s . Press this button to display the list of stations received locally. To update this list press for more than two seconds. The sound is cut w h i l e u p d a t i n g .

slide 521:

159 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 Receiving TA messages P r e s s t h e TA button to activate or d e a c ti v a t e t r a f f i c m es sa g es . The TA Traffic Announcement function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted the current audio source Radio CD ... is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message. Take care when increasing the volume while listening to TA messages. The volume may prove too high on return to the original audio source. Sel ec t " RadioText TXT display " and confirm OK t o s a v e . Sel ec t o r d e s el ec t c a t e g o r ie s . With the radio displayed on the screen press OK to display the c o n t e x t u a l m e n u . Make a long press on this button to display the list of categories. Receiving INFO messages The INFO function gives priority to TA traffic announcements. To be active this function needs good reception of a radio station that transmits this type of message. When a message is transmitted the current audio source Radio CD USB ... is interrupted automatically to receive the INFO message. Normal play resumes at the end of the message transmission. Radio text is information transmitted by the radio station related to the current programme or song. D i s p l a y R A D I O T E X T Activate or deactivate the reception of th e c or r es p o n d i n g m es sa g es .

slide 522:

160 1 3 5 2 4 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 Audio and Telematics Long press: select the desired categories of announcements from Transport News Entertainment and Flash special availability according to the station. Change of station within the same " m u l t i ple x s e r vic e " . Starting of a search for the previous / next "multiplex service". Change of band FM1 FM2 DAB ... Digital radio provides a superior audio quality and also additional categories of traffic announcements TA INFO. The different "multiplex services" offer a choice of radio stations in al p hab e t i c al o r d e r . Terrestrial digital radio DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting radio D i s p l ay o p t i o n s: if active but not available the display will be struck out. A c c o r d i n g t o v e r s i o n Preset radio station buttons 1 to 6. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a radio station. Display the name of the multiplex service being used. Display the list of all radio stations an d " m u l t ip l e x e s " . Represents the signal strength for the band being listened to. Display RadioText TXT for the current radio station. Display the name of the current radio s t a ti o n . If the current "DAB" radio station is not available on "FM" "DAB FM" is struck o u t . When changing region an update of the list of preset radio stations is a d vis a ble .

slide 523:

161 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 Sel ec t " Multimedia " a n d c o n f i r m . Sel ec t " DAB / FM auto tracking " a n d c o n f i r m . P r e s s t h e " MENU " b u t t o n . When the radio station is displayed in the screen press on " OK " to display the contextual menu. Frequency search RDS DAB / FM auto tracking RadioText TXT display Information on the station ... DAB / FM tracking "DAB" does not have 100 coverage of the country. When the digital signal is weak "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatically switching to the corresponding analogue "FM" station if there is one. When "DAB / FM auto tracking" is active the DAB station will be selected au to m a t i c a l l y . If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is activated there will be a difference of a few seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue "FM" radio with sometimes a variation in volume. If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM" " DAB/FM " option barred or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not on the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.

slide 524:

162 Audio and Telematics M e di a USB port This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary Jack socket depending on version. Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB port using a suitable cable not supplied. The system changes automatically to "USB" s o u r c e . The system creates playlists temporary memory which can take from a few seconds to several minutes on the first connection. Reducing the number of non-music files and the number of folders reduces this waiting time. Playlists are updated every time a new USB memory stick is connected. Press this button to display the contextual menu for the Media f u n c ti o n . Press this button to select the play m o d e . Press this button to confirm. P l a y m o d e The play modes available are: - Normal : the tracks are played in order depending on the classification of the selected files. - Random : the tracks in an album or folder are played in a random order. - Random on all media : all of the tracks saved in the media are played in random order. - Repeat : the tracks played are only those from the current album or folder. The choice made is displayed at the top of the sc re e n . While connected by USB the portable device may be charged automatically. To protect the system do not use a U S B h u b . Any additional equipment connected to the system must conform to the standard of the product or standard IEC 60950-1.

slide 525:

163 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 Choosing a track to play File classifi cation Playing fi les Make a long press on this button to display the different classifications. C h o o s e b y " Folder " / " Artist " / " Genre " / " Playlist " . P r e s s OK to select the desired classification then press OK ag a in to c o nf i r m. Make a long press on this button to display the chosen classification. Navigate in the list using the left / right and up / down buttons. Confirm the selection by pressing OK . Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next track in the list. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or fast back. Press one of these buttons to go to the next " Folder " / " Artist " / " Genre " / " Playlist " i n t h e l i s t . Depending on availability and the type of device used. Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next track. Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next folder.

slide 526:

164 Audio and Telematics Jack auxiliary AUX socket Connect the portable device MP3 player … to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable n o t sup p li e d . P r e s s t h e SOURCE button several times in succession and select " AUX ". First adjust the volume on your portable device to a high level. Then adjust the volume on your audio system. Operation of controls is via the portable device. Do not connect a device to both the Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port at the same time. CD player Insert circular compact discs only. Some anti-pirating systems on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder may cause faults which are no reflection on the quality of the vehicles player. Insert a CD in the player play begins au to m a t i c a l l y . To play a disc which has already been inserted press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD . Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD. P r e s s t h e LIST button to display the list of tracks on the CD. Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or fast back. Playing an MP3 compilation Insert an MP3 CD compilation in the player. The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds before play begins. On a single disc the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 folder levels. However it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played. While the CD is being played the folder structure is not followed. All of the files are displayed on a single l ev e l . External CD players connected via the USB port are not recognised by the s y s t e m . Any additional equipment connected to the system must conform to the standard of the product or standard IEC 6 0 9 5 0 -1 .

slide 527:

165 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 To play a disc which has already been inserted press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD . Press one of the buttons to select a folder on the CD. Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD. P r e s s t h e LIST button to display the list of directories of the MP3 c o mp il a t i o n . Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play. Bluetooth ® Bluetooth ® Bluetooth audio streaming ® audio streaming ® Streaming allows music files on the telephone to be played via the audio system. C on n ec t t h e t el e p h on e . Refer to the " Pairing a telephone " s e c t i o n . Audio files can be selected using the buttons on the audio system control panel and the steering mounted controls . Contextual information may be displayed in the screen. Activate the streaming source by pressing the SOURCE b u t t o n . Connecting Apple ® Connecting Apple ® Connecting Apple p la y er s ® p la y er s ® C o n n e c t t h e A pple ® player to the USB port ® player to the USB port ® using a suitable cable not supplied. P l a y s t a r t s a u t o m a t i c a l l y . Control is via the audio system. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected artists / albums / genres / playlists. The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple ® p l a ye r . ® p l a ye r . ® In certain cases play of the audio files must be initiated from the keypad. If the telephone supports the function. The audio quality depends on the quality of transmission by the telephone.

slide 528:

166 Audio and Telematics The CD player can play files with .mp3 .wma .wav and .aac file extensions with a bit rate of of 32 to 320 Kbps. It also supports TAG mode ID3 tag WMA TAG. Other file types mp4 ... may be played. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma9 standard. The sampling rates supported are 11 22 44 and 48 KHz. Via the USB port the system can play audio files with the extension ".mp3 .wma .wav .cbr .vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. No other file types .mp4 ... can be played. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma9 standard. The sampling rates supported are 11 22 44 and 48 KHz. File names should have less than 20 characters avoiding special characters e.g.: " ù so as to avoid any reading or display problems. In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is recommended when recording. If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording format is always used for an individual disc with as low a speed as possible 4x maximum for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD the Joliet format is recommended. I n f o r mat io n an d ad v i c e To protect the system do not use a USB hub. It is recommended that you use genuine Apple ® USB cables for correct ® USB cables for correct ® ope ra t i on . Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 File Allocation Table.

slide 529:

167 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 T e le pho n e Pairing a Bluetooth ® Pairing a Bluetooth ® Pairing a Bluetooth t el ep h on e ® t el ep h on e ® As a safety measure and because it requires the sustained attention of the driver the pairing of your a Bluetooth telephone to the Bluetooth hands-free audio system must only be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ig n i ti o n o n The services available depend on the network the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Refer to the instructions for your telephone and to your service provider for the services available to you. Activate the telephones Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" telephone configuration. Go to the Brands website for more information compatibility more h e l p ... . If your telephone is fully compatible. T h e " Telephone " menu gives access to the following functions in particular: " Directory " " Calls list " " View paired devices ". Depending on the type of telephone you may be asked to accept or confirm access by the system to each of these functions. If pairing fails the number of attempts is not restricted. A message appears in the screen confirming t h e pa ir in g . P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e t e l e p h o n e C o mp l e t i ng t h e p ai r i ng P r o c e d u r e f r o m t h e s y s t e m Select the name of the system in the list of devices detected. To complete the pairing whichever procedure is used from the telephone or from the system check that the code displayed in the system and the telephone is the same and confirm. P r e s s t h e MENU b u t t o n . Sel ec t t h e " Connections " m e n u . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . A window is displayed with a search in progress m es sa g e . In the list of devices detected select a telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be paired at a time. C o n f i r m w i t h OK . Sel ec t " Search for a Bluetooth device ". I n f o r m at io n a nd a d v ic e

slide 530:

168 Audio and Telematics C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . T h e t el e p h on e c on n ec t i on automatically includes hands-free operation and audio streaming. The ability of the system to connect to just one profile depends on the telephone. Both profiles may connect b y d e f a u l t . A number indicates the profile of the connection with the system: - 1 for media or 1 for telephone. - 2 f o r m e d i a a n d t e l e p h o n e . When you delete a pairing in the system remember to delete it from your telephone as well. Indicates that a device is connected. Indicates the audio streaming profile. Indicates the hands-free telephone pro f i le . P r e s s t h e MENU b u t t o n . Managing connections Sel ec t " Connections ". Sel ec t " Connections management " and confirm. The list of paired devices is displayed. Sel ec t a t el e p h on e . Then select and confirm: - " Connect telephone " / " Disconnect telephone ": to connect / disconnect the telephone or the hands-free kit only. - " Connect media player " / " Disconnect media player ": to connect / disconnect streaming only. - " Connect telephone + media player " / " Disconnect telephone + media player ": to connect / disconnect the telephone hands-free kit and streaming. - " Delete connection ": to delete t h e pa ir in g .

slide 531:

169 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 R e c e iv i n g a c a l l An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen. Sel ec t t h e " YES Sel ec t t h e " YES Sel ec t t h e " " tab in the screen using the buttons. C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . Press this button at the steering mounted controls to accept the call. M a k i n g a c a l l I n t h e " Telephone " m e n u . Sel ec t " Call ". Sel ec t " Calls list ". Sel ec t " Dial ". O r O r Sel ec t " Directory ". Press this button for more than two seconds for access to your directory then navigate using the thumb wheel. I n t h e " Telephone " m e n u . Sel ec t " End call ". E ndi ng a c al l During a call press one of the buttons for more than 2 seconds. C o n f i r m w i t h OK to end the call. The system accesses the telephones contacts directory depending on its compatibility and while it is connected b y B l u e t o o t h With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the directory of the audio system. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all whatever the telephone connected. The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.

slide 532:

170 Audio and Telematics During a call press OK to display the c o n t e x t u a l m e n u . In the contextual menu select " End call " to end the call. Managing calls H a n g u p so that the caller cannot hear In the contextual menu: - s e l e c t " Micro OFF " to switch off the microphone. - d e s e l e c t " Micro OFF " to switch t h e m ic ro pho n e o n . In the contextual menu: - s e l e c t " Telephone mode " t o transfer the call to the telephone for example to leave the vehicle while continuing a conversation. - d e s e l e c t " Telephone mode " t o transfer the call to the vehicle. Mic r o p h o n e o f f T e l ep h o n e mo d e If the contact has been cut off when you reconnect on returning to the vehicle the Bluetooth connection will be restored automatically and sound returned to the system depending on the compatibility of the telephone. In some cases telephone mode must be activated from the telephone. From the contextual menu select " DTMF tones " and confirm to use the digital keypad to navigate in the interactive voice response menu. From the contextual menu select " Switch " and confirm to return to a call left on hold. I n t e r a c t i v e v oic e re s p on s e D u a l c a l l C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK . C o n f i r m w i t h OK .

slide 533:

171 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 To modify the contacts saved in the system press MENU then select " Telephone " and confirm. Sel ec t " Directory management " and confirm. Y o u c a n : - " Consult an entry " - " Delete an entry " - " Delete all entries ". Make a long press on SRC/TEL . The system accesses the telephones contacts directory depending on its compatibility and while it is connected by Bluetooth. With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the directory of the audio system. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all whatever the telephone connected. The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty. Sel ec t " Directory " to see the list of c o n ta ct s . D i re c t o r y C o n f i r m w i t h OK . O R Voice recognition This function allows you to use your smartphones voice recognition via the system. To start voice recognition depending on the type of steering mounted controls: Make a long press on the end of the lighting c o n t r o l s t a l k . P r e s s t h i s b u t t o n . Voice recognition requires the use of a compatible smartphone first connected to the vehicle by Bluetooth.

slide 534:

172 Audio and Telematics The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system. QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION With the engine off the audio system switches off after a few minutes of use. When the engine is switched off the audio system operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicles battery. Start the vehicles engine to increase the battery charge. The message "the audio system is overheated" appears on the display. In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play stopping. Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool. Frequently asked questions QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources radio CD.... For optimum sound quality the audio settings Volume Bass Treble Ambience and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources which may result in audible differences when changing source radio CD.... Check that the audio settings Volume Bass Treble Ambience and Loudness are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the audio functions Bass Treble Front-Rear Balance and Left-Right Balance to the middle position select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode. R ad io

slide 535:

173 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The preset stations do not function no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed.... An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the waveband FM FM2 DAB AM on which the stations are preset. The traffic announcement TA is displayed. I do not receive any traffic information. The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information. The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function no sound 87.5 Mhz is displayed.... The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling. Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area. The environment hills buildings tunnels underground car parks... block reception including in RDS mode. This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault in the audio system. The aerial is absent or has been damaged for example when going through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park. Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer. Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio mode. During this brief sound cut-out the RDS searches for another frequency giving better reception of the station. Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.

slide 536:

174 Audio and Telematics M ed ia QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The Bluetooth connection is broken. The state of charge of the device may be too low. Charge the battery of the portable device. The message "USB device error" is displayed in the screen. The USB memory stick is not recognised. The USB memory stick may be corrupt. Reformat the USB memory stick. The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down cannot be read does not contain audio files or contains audio files of a format not recognised by the audio system. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system not recognised by the audio system. - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged. - Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section. - Due to their quality level certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system. The sound from the CD is poor. The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert a good quality CD and store them in suitable conditions. The audio settings base treble ambience are unsuitable. Return bass and treble settings to 0 without selecting an ambience. I am unable to play the music files on my smartphone via the USB port. Depending on the smartphone access by the audio system to music on the smartphone may have to be approved on the latter. Manual activate the MTP profile on the smartphone USB settings menu.

slide 537:

175 . Audio and Telematics Transversal-Peugeot_en_Chap03_RD6_ed01-2016 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION I am unable to access my voicemail. Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function. Call your voicemail box via the telephone menu using the number supplied by your service provider. I am unable to access my directory of contacts. Check the compatibility of your telephone. You did not give access to your contacts when pairing the telephone. Accept or confirm access by the system to the contacts on your telephone. I am unable to continue a conversation when getting into my vehicle. Telephone mode is activated. Deselect telephone mode to transfer the call to the vehicle. I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones models versions of operating systems have their own specific aspects in the pairing procedure and some telephones are not compatible. Before starting the pairing procedure delete the pairing of the telephone from the system and of the system from the telephone so as to see the compatibility of the telephones. T el ep h on e

slide 539:

PEUGEOT 3008 ADDENDUM TO USER GUIDE

slide 540:

On-line user guide Select one of the following means of access to view your user guide online... Visiting the user guide online also gives you access to the latest information available easily identified by the bookmark associated with this symbol: If the "MyPeugeot" section is not available on the Peugeot website for your country you can find your user guide at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/ - the language - the vehicle its body style - the publication period of your user guide corresponding to the date your vehicle went into circulation. Select: Find your user guide on the Peugeot website under "MyPeugeot". Scan this QR code to access your user guide directly. This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care and maintenance of your vehicle.

slide 541:

. Overview 1 Interior Boot fittings 135-140 - Luggage space - 12 V point - Boot lighting - Mobile boot floor - Tie-down rings - Retaining net for high loads Warning triangle 307 Tool kit 309-311 Temporary tyre repair kit 312-316 Spare wheel 317-322 Rear seats 130-132 Rear equipment 133-134 - 12 V point - 230 V / 50 Hz point - Rear armrest - Ski door Child seats 177-192 ISOFIX fastenings 186-189 i-Size child seats 190-191 front seats 90-97 Multipoint massages 98 Seatbelts 168-171 Airbags 172-176 Front equipment 119-127 - USB point - 12 V point - Front armrest - Floor mat Wireless charger 122-123 Fragrance diffuser 125-126 Glove box 120 Front passenger airbag disabling 174 178-181

slide 542:

Overview 2 Drivers cab Digital instrument panel 12-15 Warning lamps 16-31 Indicators 32-40 Control knobs 40-42 - Daily odometer/CHECK - Dimmer control/ambient lighting Outside mirrors 99-100 Window winder 82-83 Changing / Replacing a fuse 331 Opening the bonnet 294 Privacy drape / Sunroof 84-87 Ceiling lights 128 Ambient lighting 129 Emergency or assistance call 158-159 Belt indicator display / front passenger airbag 169-170 174 Inside mirror 101 Manual gearbox 210 Automatic gearbox 211-215 Electric parking brake 203-209 Touch screen 48-53 Function i-Cockpit Amplify 102-103 Distress signal 157 Heating / Ventilation 104-105 Monozone semi- automatic air conditioning 108-110 Bizone automatic air conditioning 111-115 Front demisting/defrosting 116 Rear demisting/defrosting 118 Heated seats 97 Intruder detection alarm/ Starting with knob START/STOP 200-202 Advanced Grip Control 164-165 Hill Assist Descent Control 166-167

slide 543:

. Overview 3 Drivers cab Embedded command steering wheel Lighting controls 141-144 146-150 Speed memorisation 226 Speed limit recognition 227-230 Speed limiting device 231-233 Speed regulator 234-237 Dynamic cruise control with Stop function 238-246 Steering wheel adjustment 99 Wiper controls 152-155 Trip computer 43-44 Dynamic pack 217 Horn 157 Lateral control bar Unlocking system - Opening/closing of the hands free hatchback 76-81 Programmable heating Addition Headlamp main beam setting 145 Interior monitoring alarm 70-73 Childproof locks 194

slide 544:

Access 4 Hands-free tailgate General points Activation and deactivation of the motorised tailgate function is done in the vehicle settings menu. Movement requests of the tailgate should only be carried out with the vehicle stationary. Safety anti-pinch The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection system that automatically interrupts and reverses its movement by a few degrees to allow the obstacle to be cleared. Please note that this anti-pinch system is not active at the end of the closing travel around 1 cm from completely closed. Check that there is enough space to allow for the movement of the motorised tailgate. Do not insert your finger in the motorised tailgate locking system - Risk of serious injury To avoid the risk of injury through pinching or trapping before and during operation of the motorised tailgate: - ensure that there is no person close to the rear of the vehicle - watch the activity of your passengers particularly any children. Bicycle carrier / Towbar The motorised tailgate is not designed to support a bicycle carrier. When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar with connection of a cable to the towbar socket the motorised operation of the tailgate will be automatically deactivated. If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not recommended by PEUGEOT it is essential to deactivate the motorised operation of the tailgate.

slide 545:

2 Access 5 Opening / Closing F Press and hold the central button A of the electronic key. or F Press the exterior control B of the tailgate with the electronic key on your person. or F Press the interior tailgate control C closing only. or F Press control D on the dashboard twice repeatedly. or F With the electronic key on you use the "hands-free" access E by performing a "kicking" movement below the rear bumper. The command is confirmed by an audible signal. The tailgate opens either completely by Activation / deactivation of the motorised operation of the tailgate is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. This function is deactivated by default. Motorised operation There are several ways of operating the motorised tailgate: A. using the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and Starting system B. using the exterior control on the tailgate C. using the interior tailgate control D. using the control on the dashboard E. using the "hands-free access" procedure below the rear bumper.

slide 546:

Access 6 Hands-Free Access Activation and deactivation of the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" system is done in the Driving menu of the touch screen. This function is deactivated by default. default or to the position memorised beforehand. If motorised operation is not activated these actions release the tailgate. The request to open the tailgate with one of the controls A B or E enables you to unlock the vehicle or the tailgate alone beforehand if selective unlocking of the boot is activated. Closing the tailgate with the "hands-free" access function enables you to lock the vehicle. At any point It is possible to interrupt the operation of the tailgate. Pressing one of these controls again interrupts the movement in progress. Following the interruption of a movement pressing one of these controls again resumes the movement. Ensure that you are steady on your feet before performing the quick foot movement. Take care not to touch the exhaust system which may be hot - Risk of burns Automatic locking using "Hands- Free Tailgate Access" function To activate automatic locking of the vehicle when closing the tailgate using the Hands-Free Tailgate Access function: F Press this button. The indicator lamp will light up. Pressing this button again deactivates the function. The indicator lamp turns off.

slide 547:

2 Access 7 Reinitialising the motorised tailgate This operation is necessary where there is no movement - after detection of an obstacle connecting or recharging the battery etc. F Open the tailgate manually if necessary. F Fully close the tailgate manually. If the problem persists contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Memorising an opening position To limit the motorised tailgate opening angle: F open the tailgate to the desired position F press button C or the exterior control B for more than 3 seconds. Memorisation of the maximum opening position of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal. Manual operation The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand even with motorised operation activated. The tailgate must be immobile. When opening and closing a motorised tailgate manually there is no assistance from gas struts. Resistance to opening and closing is therefore entirely normal. Repeatedly opening and closing of the motorised tailgate can cause overheating of its electric motor after which opening and closing will not be possible. Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric motor to cool down before operating the tailgate again. If you are unable to wait operate it manually. To cancel the memorised position: F stop the tailgate in an intermediate position F press button C or the exterior control B for more than 3 seconds. Cancellation of the memorised position is confirmed by an audible signal.

slide 548:

Access 8 Precautions in use In wintry conditions In the event of an accumulation of snow on the tailgate clear the snow before commanding a motorised opening of the tailgate. The formation of ice can block the tailgate and prevent its opening: wait until the ice melts with the heating of the passenger compartment. When washing When washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash dont forget to lock your vehicle to avoid the risk of unexpected opening. Recommendations related to the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function If several kicking movements to operate the tailgate have no effect wait a few seconds before trying again. The function automatically deactivates in heavy rain or following a build-up of snow. If it does not work check that the electronic key is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic pollution smartphone etc.. The function may not work correctly with a prosthetic leg. The function may not work correctly if your vehicle is fitted with a towbar. In some circumstances the tailgate may open or close by itself particularly if: - you hitch or unhitch a trailer - you fit or remove a bicycle carrier - you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle carrier - you place or lift something behind the vehicle - an animal approaches the rear bumper - you are washing your vehicle - your vehicle is being serviced - you are accessing the spare wheel depending on version. To avoid such operating problems keep the electronic key away from the sensor zone or deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate Access" function.

slide 549:

3 Ease of use and comfort 9 The programmable heating operates independently from the engine. With the engine off it preheats the coolant circuit to ensure optimal engine operating temperature as soon as it is started up. The programmable heating is switched on by the long range remote control. It may be immediate or deferred thanks to a programming function. Programmable heating Always switch off the programmable heating when refuelling to avoid any risk of fire or explosion. The programmable heating is powered by the vehicle fuel tank. Before use ensure that the remaining quantity of fuel is sufficient. If the fuel tank is in its reserve we strongly recommend you do not programme the heating. To avoid the risks of intoxication or asphyxia the programmable heating must not be used even for short periods in a closed environment such as a garage or workshop which are not equipped with an exhaust gas extraction system. Do not park the vehicle on a flammable surface dry grass dead leaves paper etc. - risk of fire The volumetric alarm movement detector may be disrupted by the programmable heating air flows when it is operating. To avoid any untimely triggering of the alarm when using the programmable heating it is advisable that the volumetric monitoring is deactivated. Adapting the programmable heating enables you to use it to preheat the passenger compartment of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Presentation The heating programming remote control has the following buttons and displays: 1. Buttons for functions scroll-down menu. Remote control 2. Function symbols: clock temperature operating time programmed time heater operation heating management. 3. Digital displays: time temperature operating time programmed time or heating level. 4. Off button. 5. On button.

slide 550:

10 Ease of use and comfort lit up: deferred programmed start-up. flashing: heating on. turned off: heating off. Operating indicator light F Press button 1 several times to display the functions. The first press on the left or right button displays the time. Then the left button is used to scroll to the programmed time then the heating level "C1" to "C5". The right button is used to scroll to the passenger compartment temperature then the heater operating time when immediately switched on. Function display The passenger compartment temperature information is only available when the engine is off. Setting the time F After having displayed the time using button 1 press on buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously within 10 seconds. This symbol will flash. F Set the time with button 1. F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to save it. This symbol will be displayed.

slide 551:

3 Ease of use and comfort 11 Immediate switching on During these operations if the message "FAIL" appears it means that the signal has not been received. Follow the procedure again after having changed position. Adjusting the operating time F Press on button 1 to display the operating time F Press on button 5 until the message "OK" appears. When the signal has been received the message "OK" is displayed along with the operating time. The heater starts and this symbol is displayed. This indicator light flashes during heating. F To deactivate the function press on button 4 until the message "OK" appears. This symbol and the indicator light will turn off. This symbol will be displayed. F After having displayed the operating time press on buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously within 10 seconds. This symbol will flash. F Adjust the time by pressing on the buttons 1: by 10 min increment and maximum value of 30 mins.

slide 552:

12 Ease of use and comfort Deferred switching on You must programme your start time for the system to automatically calculate the optimal time to start the heater. This symbol will be displayed. F After having displayed the programming time press on buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously within 10 seconds. The factory value setting is 30 minutes. F Set the time by pressing on button 1. F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to save it. This symbol will be displayed. F Press on button 1 to display the programming time. This symbol will be displayed. This symbol will flash. Programming the start time F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to save the operating time.

slide 553:

3 Ease of use and comfort 13 F After having displayed the programming time using button 1 press on button 5 until the message "OK" appears. Activation / Deactivation When the signal has been received the message "OK" is displayed along with this symbol. This indicator lights up until the heater starts. Stopping the heating F Press button 5. This symbol will remain displayed. Changing the heating level The system has 5 heating levels: C1 lowest level to C5 highest level. F After having displayed the heating level using button 1 press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5. The letter "C" will flash. F Adjust the heating level by pressing on button 1. F Press simultaneously on buttons 4 and 5 to save the selected level. The letter "C" will be displayed. The presets are replaced by the new entries. The programmed times are memorised until the next change. When the start time is activated it is not possible to change the heating level. You must first deactivate the start time. This symbol is displayed when the heater starts. HTM: Heat Thermo Management F To deactivate the programming press on button 4 until the message "OK" appears. This symbol will disappear. This indicator light turns off. During these operations if the message "FAIL" appears it means that the signal has not been received. Follow the procedure again after having changed position.

slide 554:

14 Ease of use and comfort Operating fault In the event of a fault with the programmable heating contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Changing the battery F Unclip the case. F Replace the battery observing the polarities. F Reset the remote control. The remote control is powered by a 6V-28L battery which is provided. Information on the screen indicates when this battery needs to be changed. Resetting the remote control If the battery is disconnected or when changing the battery the remote control must be reset. F After turning on the power within the next 5 seconds press button 4 for 1 second. If the operation is successful the message "OK" will be displayed on the remote controls screen. If there is a fault the message "FAIL" will appear. F Start the operation again. Do not throw away used batteries take them to an approved collection point.

slide 555:

4 Lighting and visibility 15 Windscreen wash Wiper control stalk F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. The windscreen wash and then the wiper will operate for a fixed period. The windscreen wash includes a wiper blade system with integral washer jets. The screenwash fluid is sprayed from along the length of the wiper blade. This improves visibility and reduces the consumption of screenwash fluid. In some cases depending on the composition or the colour of the liquid and the outside lighting the liquid spray may be hardly perceptible. To avoid damaging the wiper blades do not operate the windscreen washer if the windscreen washer reservoir is empty. Only operate the windscreen washer if there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen and hindering visibility. Always use windscreen washer fluid suitable for low temperatures during the winter period.

slide 556:

Safety 16 Trailer stability assist When towing this system reduces the risk of the vehicle or trailer swaying. Operation The system is activated automatically when the ignition is switched on. The electronic stability programme ESC must not have any faults. Between 36 and 100 mph 60 and 160 km/h if the system detects swaying movements in the trailer it acts on the brakes to stabilise the trailer and if necessary reduces engine power to slow down the vehicle. The correction is signalled by the flashing of the indicator lamp in the instrument panel and activation of the brake lights. Operating fault Should a fault occur with the system this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. The trailer stability assist system offers increased safety in normal driving conditions provided that the recommendations on towing a trailer are observed. It must not encourage the driver to take additional risks such as towing a trailer in adverse operating conditions overloading failure to observe the trailer nose weight worn or under-inflated tyres faulty braking system etc. or drive at too high a speed. In certain cases the swaying of the trailer may not be detected by the ESC system particularly with a light trailer. When driving on slippery or poor surfaces the system may not be able to prevent sudden swaying of the trailer. If you continue to tow a trailer reduce your speed and drive carefully Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. For information on the weights and towed loads refer to the "Technical data" section or the registration certificate for your vehicle. For advice on driving safely when Towing a trailer refer to the corresponding section.

slide 557:

5 Safety 17 Consultez la législation en vigueur dans votre pays avant dinstaller votre enfant à cette place. “Rearwards-facing” “Forward-facing” Ensure that the seatbelt is taut. For child seats with a stay ensure that this has stable contact with the ground. If necessary adjust the passenger seat. If a “forward-facing” child seat is installed in the front passenger seat adjust the vehicles seat in the maximum rear longitudinal position which is the highest position with the back straightened up. Leave the passenger airbag active. If a “rearwards-facing” child seat is installed in the front passenger seat adjust the vehicles seat in the maximum rear longitudinal position which is the highest position with the back straightened up. The passenger airbag should be neutralised otherwise there is a danger that the child will be seriously injured or killed when the airbag opens. Passenger seat adjusted in the highest position and the maximum rear longitudinal position.

slide 558:

Safety 18 Deactivating the front passenger airbag Never install a “rearwards-facing” child restraining system on a protected seat with an activated front airbag. This can cause death or serious injury to the child. The warning label located on each site of the passenger sun visor repeats this order. In accordance with current regulations you will find this warning in all the required languages in the following tables. Passenger airbag OFF For more information on the Airbags particularly on neutralising the front passenger airbag please refer to the corresponding column.

slide 559:

5 Safety 19 Location of child seats attached with the seat belt In accordance with European legislation this table indicates the installation options for child seats fixed with the seat belt and universally approved a depending on the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle. Weight of the child/ indicative age Seat Front passenger airbag Less than 13 kg Groups 0 b and 0+ Up to around 1 year From 9 to 18 kg Group 1 From around 1 to 3 years From 15 to 25 kg Group 2 From around 3 to 6 years From 22 to 36 kg Group 3 From around 6 to 10 years Row 1 c Passenger seat With vertical adjustment "OFF” deactivated U U U U "ON” activated X UF UF UF Row 2 d Rear seat behind the driver U U U U Rear seat behind the passenger U U U U Central rear seat e U U U U maximum vertical position.

slide 560:

Safety 20 U: Seat adapted to installation of a child seat attached with a seat belt and universal approved “rearward-facing” and/or “forward-facing”. UF: Seat adapted to installation of a child seat attached with a seat belt and universal approved “rearward-facing”. X: Seat not adapted to installation of a child seat of the weight group indicated. a Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles with a seat belt. b Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots and “car” beds cannot be installed in the front passenger seat. c Check the current legislation in your country before installing your child in this seat. d To install a child seat in a rear seat rearward-facing or forward-facing bring forward the front seat then raise the back to allow enough space to the child seat and the childs legs. e A child seat with stay should never be installed in this place. Remove and arrange the headrest before installing a child seat with back to a passenger seat. Replace the headrest once the child seat has been removed.

slide 561:

5 Safety 21 “ISOFIX” fastenings Your vehicle has been approved according to the latest ISOFIX regulations. The seats shown below are equipped with regulation ISOFIX anchoring: There are three rings for each seat: This ISOFIX fastening provides you with a reliable solid and rapid assembly of the child seat in your vehicle. ISOFIX child seats are equipped with two locks anchored to the two A rings. Some seats also have a top strap attached to the B ring. To attach the child seat to the TOP TETHER: F Remove and arrange the head rest before installing the child seat in this place replace it once the child seat has been removed F Pass the strap of the child seat behind the back of the seat by centring it between the gaps of the headrest pins F Fix the clip to the high strap of B ring F Tighten the top strap. When installing an ISOFIX child seat on the rear left of the bench seat before fixing the seat remove the central rear seat belt beforehand to the centre of the vehicle so as not to hinder the operation of the belt. Incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle will compromise the protection of the child in the event of collision. Follow the assembly notes shown in the installation instructions delivered with the child seat. To see the ISOFIX seat installation options in your vehicle check the summary table. - Two A rings located between the back and seat of the vehicles marked by a label. - A B ring located behind the seat and marked by a label called Top Tether to fasten the top strap.Top Tether

slide 562:

Safety 22 Summary table for the location of i-Size child seats i-Size child seats are equipped with two locks anchored to the two A rings. These i-Size child seats also have: - either a top strap attached to the B ring - or a stay resting on the vehicle’s floor which is compatible with the i-Size approved seat whose role is to prevent the child seat from toppling over in the event of collision. For more information on ISOFIX fastening please refer to the corresponding column. In accordance with European regulations this table shows you the installation options for i-Size child seats for seats in the vehicle equipped with i-Size approved ISOFIX fastenings. Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system Row 1 a Passenger seat “OFF” deactivated i-U “ON” activated i-UF Row 2 Rear seat behind the driver i-U Rear seat behind the passenger i-U Central rear seat Non i-Size

slide 563:

5 Safety 23 i-U: suitable for “universal” category i-Size restraint systems facing forwards and backwards. i-UF: suitable only for “universal” category i-Size restraint systems facing forwards. X: seating place not suitable for “universal” category i-Size restraint systems. a Check the current legislation in your country before installing a child in this seat. Remove and arrange the head rest before installing a child seat with back in a passenger seat. Replace the headrest once the child seat has been removed.

slide 564:

Driving 24 Distance alert and Active Safety Brake This system includes three functions: - Distance alert alert if there is a risk of collision - Intelligent emergency braking assistance - Active Safety Brake automatic emergency braking. Distance alert: it warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian present in their traffic lane. Intelligent emergency braking assistance: it supplements the braking action taken by the driver if this is inadequate. Active Safety Brake: it intervenes following the alert if the driver does not react quickly enough and does not operate the vehicles brakes. If the driver fails to act it contributes towards avoiding a collision or limiting its severity by reducing the speed of your vehicle. Activation and operating conditions The vehicle has a camera located at the top of the windscreen and depending on the version a radar located in the front bumpers. The system is activated from about 4 mph 7 km/h and is deactivated below about 3 mph 5 km/h. It takes account of: - registered vehicles running in the same direction or stationary - pedestrians in the traffic lane bicycles motorcycles animals and objects on the road are not necessarily detected. This system is designed to assist the driver and improve road safety. It is the drivers responsibility to continuously monitor the state of the traffic observing the driving regulations. This system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

slide 565:

6 Driving 25 Operating limits In the following cases deactivating the system via the vehicles configuration menu is recommended: - when towing a trailer - when carrying long objects on roof bars or a roof rack - before using an automatic car wash with the engine running - before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in a workshop - when the vehicle is being towed with the engine running - when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is fitted depending on version - following impact damage to the windscreen close to the detection camera - if the front bumper has been damaged - if the brake lamps are not working. Because of limits in the operation of the system it is possible that warnings are not given are given too late or seem unjustified. Consequently the driver must always remain attentive and able to react at any time to avoid an accident. Distance alert Depending on the degree of risk of collision detected by the system and the alert threshold chosen by the driver different levels of alert can be triggered and displayed in the instrument panel. Level 1: visual alert only signalling that the vehicle in front is very close. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle time between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. Level 2: visual and audible alert warning you that a collision is imminent. The message "Brake" is displayed. This level of alert is based on the time before collision. It takes into account the vehicle dynamics the speed of your vehicle and the one in front the environmental conditions the operating conditions of the vehicle on a curve pedals pressed etc. to trigger the alert at the relevant moment.

slide 566:

Driving 26 Where the speed of your vehicle is too high approaching another vehicle the first level of alert may not be displayed: the level 2 alert may be displayed directly. Important: alert level 1 is never displayed when the "Close" trigger threshold has been selected. Modifying the alert trigger threshold This threshold determines how you wish to be alerted of the presence of a moving or stationary vehicle in front of you or a pedestrian present in your traffic lane. The current threshold can be modified via the vehicle configuration menu. You can select one of three thresholds: - "Distant" - "Normal" - "Close". The last threshold selected is kept in memory when the ignition is switched off. Intelligent emergency braking assistance If the driver brakes but not sufficiently to avoid a collision this system will supplement the braking within the limits of the laws of physics. This assistance will only be provided if you press the brake pedal. Active Safety Brake This function also called automatic emergency braking aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a frontal collision with your vehicle where the driver fails to react. Using a radar and a camera depending on the version this function acts on the vehicles braking system.

slide 567:

6 Driving 27 If the camera and/or radar have confirmed the presence of a vehicle or a pedestrian this warning lamp flashes once the function is acting on the vehicles brakes. Important: if operation of the automatic emergency braking is triggered you must take back control of your vehicle and brake with the pedal to supplement or finish the automatic braking action. The driver can take back control of the vehicle at any time by sharply turning the steering wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal. The point at which braking is triggered may be adjusted according to the reaction from the driver such as movement of the steering wheel or pressing the accelerator pedal. Operation of the function may be felt by slight vibration in the brake pedal. If the vehicle comes to a complete stop the automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 seconds. With a manual gear box in the event of automatic emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a complete stop the engine may stall. With an automatic gear box in the event of automatic emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a complete stop maintain the brake pedal down to stop the vehicle from starting off again. Specifc conditions for operation The vehicles speed must be between 3 mph and 53 mph 5km/h and 85 km/h versions with camera alone or 87 mph 140 km/h versions with camera and radar when a moving vehicle is detected. The vehicles speed must not exceed 50 mph 80km/h when a stopped vehicle is detected. The vehicles speed must not exceed 37 mph 60 km/h when a pedestrian is detected. The ESC system must not be defective. The CDS must not be deactivated. All passengers seatbelts must be fastened. Driving at steady speed on roads with few bends is required. After an impact the function automatically stops operating. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

slide 568:

Driving 28 Deactivation / Activation By default the system is automatically activated at every engine start-up. The system can be deactivated or activated via the vehicle settings menu. Deactivation of the system is signalled by the illumination of this indicator lamp accompanied by the display of a message. Clean the windscreen regularly particularly the area in front of the camera. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could conceal the detection camera. Clean the front bumper removing mud snow etc. If the front bumper is to be repainted or retouched contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Certain types of paint could interfere with the operation of the radar. Operating fault Check that the sensors camera and radar are not covered by dirt mud frost snow etc. If the fault persists contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. In the event of a fault with the system you are alerted by the tell-tale lighting up accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. The camera my be disrupted or not work in the following situations: - poor visibility inadequate street lighting falling snow heavy rain dense fog etc. - dazzle headlamps of an oncoming vehicle low sun reflections on a damp road leaving a tunnel alternating shade and light etc. - obstruction of the camera or radar mud frost snow etc.. In these situations detection performance may be reduced.

slide 569:

29 8 In the event of a breakdown Disconnecting the battery Rapid lock lug F Raise palette A as much as possible to unlock clamp B. F Remove clamp B by raising it. F Raise palette A as much as possible. F Replace clamp B open on the + terminal F Press clamp B up to the stop. F Lower palette A to lock clamp B. Do not press too hard on the palette because if the clamp is badly positioned it will then be impossible to lock restart the procedure. After re-connection During the trip following the initial starting of the engine the Stop Start may not be operational. In this case the function will only be available after the vehicle has been continuously immobile the duration of which will depend on the ambient temperature and the battery charge state up to around 8 hours After reconnecting the battery switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to allow the electronic systems to initialise. For versions with right-hand drive when the odometer reaches 100 km 65 miles you should wait 15 minutes before starting the engine. However if slight perturbations persist after this check with your PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When referring to the corresponding column your should reinitialise some equipment such as: - The remote control key or electronic key depending on the version - The sunroof and its electric privacy drape - The electric window winder - The date and time - The memorised radio stations Disconnecting the + terminal Reconnecting the + terminal In order to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine it is recommended that the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long period. Before disconnecting the battery: F close all openings doors tailgate windows sunroof F switch off all electrical consumers audio system wipers lighting etc. F switch off the ignition and wait for four minutes. At the battery it is only necessary to disconnect the + terminal.

slide 570:

Technical data 30 Characteristics of engines and towed loads Engines The engine characteristics are detailed on the vehicles registration certificate and in the sales documentation. Weights and towed loads When the ambient temperature is high leaving the engine running for 1 to 2 minutes after stopping the vehicle to allow it to cool is recommended. The weights and towed loads relating to your vehicle are stated in the registration certificate and in the sales documentation. These values are also shown on the manufacturers nameplate or label. For more information contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1000 metres. The towed load value must be reduced by 10 for each additional 1000 metres of altitude. The recommended nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the towbar dismantlable with or without a tool. GTW: Gross train weight High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine. If the ambient temperature is above 37°C limit the towed load. Towing with a towing vehicle which is only slightly laden may negatively affect its handling. Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. With a towing vehicle never exceed the speed of 62 mph 100 km/h observe the local legislation in force. The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed according to the conditions defined in European legislation Directive 1999/99/ EC. For more information contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

slide 571:

9 Technical data 31 Petrol engines and towed loads Engines 1.2 litre PureTech 130 SS 1.2 litre PureTech 130 SS 1.6 litre THP 150 1.6 litre THP 160 1.6 litre THP 165 SS Gearboxes BVM6 Manual 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed Codes EB2DTS MCM STT EB2DTS AT6III STT EP6FDTM AT6III EP6FDTMD AT6III EP6FDT AT6III STT Model codes MR... M4... HNYH/C1B HNYH/C1F - HNYH/C1K HNYW/C1B HNYW/C1F 5GYW/C1A 5GXV/C1A 5GZW/C1B 5GZW/C1F Cylinder capacity cm³ 1199 1199 1598 1598 1598 Max power: EU standard kW 96 96 110 120 121.4 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer within the GTW limit kg on a 10 or 12 gradient 1400 - 1300 1200 600 600 1550 Unbraked trailer kg 660 670 600 600 685 Recommended nose weight kg 80 80 70 70 80

slide 572:

Technical data 32 Diesel engines and towed loads Engines 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 115 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 SS 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 SS Gearboxes BVM Manual 5-speed BVM6 Manual 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed BVM6 Manual 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed Codes DV6FD BE4 STT DV6FC ML6C STT DV6FC AT6III STT DV6FC ML6C STT DV6FC AT6III STT Model codes MC... BHYB/C2B BHYB/C2F BHXH/C2B BHXH/C2F BHXW/C2B BHXW/C2F BHZH/C2B BHZH/C2F - BHZH/C2K BHZW/C2B BHZW/C2F Cylinder capacity cm³ 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 Max power: EU standard kW 73 85 85 88 88 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer within the GTW limit kg on a 10 or 12 gradient 1300 1500 1300 1500 - 1400 1300 Unbraked trailer kg 680 685 695 685 695 Recommended nose weight kg 80 80 80 80 80

slide 573:

9 Technical data 33 Diesel engines and towed loads Engines 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 2.0 litre BlueHDi 150 SS 2.0 litre BlueHDi 180 SS Gearboxes BVM6 Manual 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed BVM6 Manual 6-speed EAT6 Auto. 6-speed Codes DW10FD ML6C DW10FD AM6III DW10FD ML6C STT DW10FC AM6III STT Model codes MR... M9... AHXG/C2A AHXV/C2A AHRH/C2B AHRH/C2F AHSH/C2B AHSH/C2F AHXH/C2B AHXH/C2F AHWW/C2B AHWW/C2F Cylinder capacity cm³ 1997 1997 1997 1997 Max power: EU standard kW 110 110 110 133 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer within the GTW limit kg on a 10 or 12 gradient 600 600 2000 1700 Unbraked trailer kg 600 600 745 750 Recommended nose weight kg 70 70 80 80

slide 574:

Technical data 34 Dimensions in mm These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

slide 575:

9 Technical data 35 Identifcation markings Different visible markings for the identification of your vehicle. A. Vehicle identification number VIN under the bonnet. The number is engraved on the body structure. B. Vehicle identification number VIN on the dashboard. The number is recorded on a label visible through the windscreen. - the vehicle identification number VIN - the maximum authorised vehicle weight the Gross Vehicle Weight or GVW - the maximum authorised train weight GTW - the maximum weight on the front axle - the maximum weight on the rear axle. - the spare tyre pressure. It also indicates the paint colour code. The vehicle may be originally equipped with tyres with higher load and speed indices than those indicated on the label without affecting inflation pressure. Checking tyre pressures The tyre pressures should be checked when cold at least monthly. The pressures given on the label are valid for cold tyres. If you have driven for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles 10 kilometres at more than 30 mph 50 km/h the tyres will be warm. In this case 0.3 bar 30 kPa should be added to the pressures given on the label. Never reduce the pressure of a warm tyre. Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption. C. Manufacturers label. This self-destructing label is affixed near to the right-hand door. It bears the following information: - the name of the manufacturer - the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval number D. Tyres / paint code label. This label is affixed near to the drivers door. It bears the following information about the tyres: - the tyre pressures unladen and laden - the tyre specification made up of the dimensions and type as well as the load and speed indices

slide 577:

Even partial copies and translations of this document are forbidden without the written consent of PEUGEOT Cars. PEUGEOT Cars certifies by application of the provisions of European regulation Directive 2000/53 relating to off-road vehicles that it has satisfied the targets set by the EU and that recycled materials are used in manufacturing the products it markets. 07-16 Printed in the EU. Anglais DAD

slide 578:

www.peugeot.com Anglais DAD 16P84.A030 16P84.A030

authorStream Live Help